This preview shows page 1. Sign up to view the full content.
Unformatted text preview: TI84 Plus TI84 Plus Silver Edition Guidebook Important Information
Texas Instruments makes no warranty, either express or implied, including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, regarding any programs or book materials and makes such materials available solely on an "asis" basis. In no event shall Texas Instruments be liable to anyone for special, collateral, incidental, or consequential damages in connection with or arising out of the purchase or use of these materials, and the sole and exclusive liability of Texas Instruments, regardless of the form of action, shall not exceed the purchase price of this product. Moreover, Texas Instruments shall not be liable for any claim of any kind whatsoever against the use of these materials by any other party.
© 2005 Texas Instruments Incorporated Windows and Macintosh are trademarks of their respective owners. ii USA FCC Information Concerning Radio Frequency Interference
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you can try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • • • • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. Caution: Any changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Texas Instruments may void your authority to operate the equipment. iii Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition
Documentation Conventions
In the body of this guidebook, TI84 Plus refers to the TI84 Plus Silver Edition. Sometimes, as in Chapter 19, the full name TI84 Plus Silver Edition is used to distinguish it from the TI84 Plus. All the instructions and examples in this guidebook also work for the TI84 Plus. All the functions of the TI84 Plus Silver Edition and the TI84 Plus are the same. The two graphing calculators differ only in available RAM memory, interchangeable faceplates, and Flash application ROM memory. TI84 Plus Keyboard
Generally, the keyboard is divided into these zones: graphing keys, editing keys, advanced function keys, and scientific calculator keys. Keyboard Zones
Graphing — Graphing keys access the interactive graphing features. Editing — Editing keys allow you to edit expressions and values. Advanced — Advanced function keys display menus that access the advanced functions.
Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 1 Scientific — Scientific calculator keys access the capabilities of a standard scientific calculator. TI84 Plus Graphing Keys Editing Keys Advanced Function Keys Scientific Calculator Keys Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 2 Using the Color.Coded Keyboard The keys on the TI84 Plus are colorcoded to help you easily locate the key you need. The light colored keys are the number keys. The light gray keys along the right side of the keyboard are the common math functions. The light gray keys across the top set up and display graphs. The Œ key with the purple lettering provides access to applications such as the Inequality Graphing application. The primary function of each key is printed on the keys. For example, when you press , the MATH menu is displayed. and Keys Using the y and ƒ Keys The secondary function of each key is printed in blue above the key. When you press the blue y key, the character, abbreviation, or word printed in blue above the other keys becomes active for the next keystroke. For example, when you press y and then , the TEST menu is displayed. This guidebook describes this keystroke combination as y :. The alpha function of each key is printed in green above the key. When you press the green ƒ key, the alpha character printed in green above the other keys becomes active for the next keystroke. For example, when you press ƒ and then , the letter A is entered. This guidebook describes this keystroke combination as ƒ [A]. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 3 The y key accesses the second function printed in blue above each key. The ƒ key accesses the alpha function printed in green above each key. Turning On and Turning Off the TI84 Plus
Turning On the Graphing Calculator To turn on the TI84 Plus, press É. • If you previously had turned off the graphing calculator by pressing y M, the TI84 Plus displays the home screen as it was when you last used it and clears any error. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 4 • If Automatic Power Down™ (APD™) had previously turned off the graphing calculator, the TI84 Plus will return exactly as you left it, including the display, cursor, and any error. If the TI84 Plus is turned off and connected to another graphing calculator or personal computer, any communication activity will “wake up” the TI84 Plus. • To prolong the life of the batteries, APD turns off the TI84 Plus automatically after about five minutes without any activity. Turning Off the Graphing Calculator To turn off the TI84 Plus manually, press y M. • • All settings and memory contents are retained by Constant Memory™. Any error condition is cleared. Batteries The TI84 Plus uses five batteries: four AAA alkaline batteries and one SR44SW or 303 silver oxide backup battery. The silver oxide battery provides auxiliary power to retain memory while you replace the AAA batteries. To replace batteries without losing any information stored in memory, follow the steps in Appendix C. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 5 Setting the Display Contrast
Adjusting the Display Contrast You can adjust the display contrast to suit your viewing angle and lighting conditions. As you change the contrast setting, a number from 0 (lightest) to 9 (darkest) in the topright corner indicates the current level. You may not be able to see the number if contrast is too light or too dark.
Note: The TI84 Plus has 40 contrast settings, so each number 0 through 9 represents four settings. The TI84 Plus retains the contrast setting in memory when it is turned off. To adjust the contrast, follow these steps. 1. Press and release the y key. 2. Press and hold † or }, which are below and above the contrast symbol (blue, halfshaded circle). • • † lightens the screen. } darkens the screen. Note: If you adjust the contrast setting to 0, the display may become completely blank. To restore the screen, press and release y, and then press and hold } until the display reappears. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 6 When to Replace Batteries When the batteries are low, a lowbattery message is displayed when you turn on the graphing calculator. To replace the batteries without losing any information in memory, follow the steps in Appendix C. Generally, the graphing calculator will continue to operate for one or two weeks after the lowbattery message is first displayed. After this period, the TI84 Plus will turn off automatically and the unit will not operate. Batteries must be replaced. All memory should be retained.
Note: The operating period following the first lowbattery message could be longer than two weeks if you use the graphing calculator infrequently. The Display
Types of Displays The TI84 Plus displays both text and graphs. Chapter 3 describes graphs. Chapter 9 describes how the TI84 Plus can display a horizontally or vertically split screen to show graphs and text simultaneously. Home Screen The home screen is the primary screen of the TI84 Plus. On this screen, enter instructions to execute and expressions to evaluate. The answers are displayed on the same screen.
Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 7 Displaying Entries and Answers When text is displayed, the TI84 Plus screen can display a maximum of 8 lines with a maximum of 16 characters per line. If all lines of the display are full, text scrolls off the top of the display. If an expression on the home screen, the Y= editor (Chapter 3), or the program editor (Chapter 16) is longer than one line, it wraps to the beginning of the next line. In numeric editors such as the window screen (Chapter 3), a long expression scrolls to the right and left. When an entry is executed on the home screen, the answer is displayed on the right side of the next line.
Entry Answer The mode settings control the way the TI84 Plus interprets expressions and displays answers. If an answer, such as a list or matrix, is too long to display entirely on one line, an ellipsis (...) is displayed to the right or left. Press ~ and  to display the answer.
Entry Answer Returning to the Home Screen To return to the home screen from any other screen, press y 5. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 8 Busy Indicator When the TI84 Plus is calculating or graphing, a vertical moving line is displayed as a busy indicator in the topright corner of the screen. When you pause a graph or a program, the busy indicator becomes a vertical moving dotted line. Display Cursors In most cases, the appearance of the cursor indicates what will happen when you press the next key or select the next menu item to be pasted as a character.
Cursor Entry Insert Second Alpha Full Appearance Effect of Next Keystroke A character is entered at the cursor; any existing character is overwritten A character is inserted in front of the cursor location A 2nd character (blue on the keyboard) is entered or a 2nd operation is executed An alpha character (green on the keyboard) is entered or SOLVE is executed $ Solid rectangle Underline __ Þ Ø # Reverse arrow Reverse A Checkerboard rectangle No entry; the maximum characters are entered at a prompt or memory is full If you press ƒ during an insertion, the cursor becomes an underlined A (A). If you press y during an insertion, the underlined cursor becomes an underlined # (#). Graphs and editors sometimes display additional cursors, which are described in other chapters. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 9 Interchangeable Faceplates
The TI84 Plus Silver Edition has interchangeable faceplates that let you customize the appearance of your unit. To purchase additional faceplates, refer to the TI Online Store at education.ti.com. Removing a Faceplate 1. Lift the tab at the bottom edge of the faceplate away from the TI84 Plus Silver Edition case. 2. Carefully lift the faceplate away from the unit until it releases. Be careful not to damage the faceplate or the keyboard. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 10 Installing New Faceplates 1. Align the top of the faceplate in the corresponding grooves of the TI84 Plus Silver Edition case. 2. Gently click the faceplate into place. Do not force. 3. Make sure you gently press each of the grooves to ensure the faceplate is installed properly. See the diagram for proper groove placement. Using the Clock
Use the Clock to set the time and date, select the clock display format, and turn the clock on and off. The clock is turned on by default and is accessed from the mode screen. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 11 Displaying the Clock Settings 1. Press z 2. Press the † to move the cursor to SET CLOCK. 3. Press Í. Changing the Clock settings 1. Press the ~ or  to highlight the date format you want, example: M/D/Y. Press Í. 2. Press † to highlight YEAR. Press ‘ and type the year, example: 2004. 3. Press † to highlight MONTH. Press and type the number of the month (a number from 1– 12). 4. Press † to highlight DAY. Press ‘ and type the date. 5. Press † to highlight TIME. Press ~ or  to highlight the time format you want. Press Í. 6. Press † to highlight HOUR. Press ‘ and type the hour. A number from 1–12 or 0–23. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 12 7. Press † to highlight MINUTE. Press ‘ and type the minutes. A number from 0–59. 8. Press † to highlight AM/PM. Press ~ or  to highlight the format. Press Í. 9. To Save changes, press † to select SAVE. Press Í. Error Messages If you type the wrong date for the month, for example: June 31, June does not have 31 days, you will receive an error message with two choices: • To Quit the Clock application and return to the Home screen, select 1: Quit. Press Í. — or — • To return to the clock application and correct the error, select 2: Goto. Press Í. Turning the Clock On There are two options to turn the clock on. One option is through the MODE screen, the other is through the Catalog. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 13 Using the Mode Screen to turn the clock on 1. If the Clock is turned off, Press † to highlight TURN CLOCK ON. 2. Press Í Í. Using the Catalog to turn the clock on 1. If the Clock is turned off, Press y N 2. Press † or } to scroll the CATALOG until the selection cursor points to ClockOn. 3. Press Í Í. Turning the Clock Off 1. Press y N. 2. Press † or } to scroll the CATALOG until the selection cursor points to ClockOff. 3. Press Í.
ClockOff will turn off the Clock display. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 14 Entering Expressions and Instructions
What Is an Expression? An expression is a group of numbers, variables, functions and their arguments, or a combination of these elements. An expression evaluates to a single answer. On the TI84 Plus, you enter an expression in the same order as you would write it on paper. For example, pR2 is an expression. You can use an expression on the home screen to calculate an answer. In most places where a value is required, you can use an expression to enter a value. Entering an Expression To create an expression, you enter numbers, variables, and functions from the keyboard and menus. An expression is completed when you press Í, regardless of the cursor location. The entire expression is evaluated according to Equation Operating System (EOS™) rules, and the answer is displayed. Most TI84 Plus functions and operations are symbols comprising several characters. You must enter the symbol from the keyboard or a menu; do not spell it out. For example, to calculate the log of 45, you must press « 45. Do not enter the letters L, O, and G. If you enter LOG, the TI84 Plus interprets the entry as implied multiplication of the variables L, O, and G. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 15 Calculate 3.76 P (L7.9 + ‡5) + 2 log 45.
3 Ë 76 ¥ £ Ì 7 Ë 9 Ã y C 5 ¤ ¤ Ã 2 « 45 ¤ Í Multiple Entries on a Line To enter two or more expressions or instructions on a line, separate them with colons (ƒ [:]). All instructions are stored together in last entry (ENTRY). Entering a Number in Scientific Notation To enter a number in scientific notation, follow these steps. 1. Enter the part of the number that precedes the exponent. This value can be an expression. 2. Press y D. â is pasted to the cursor location. 3. If the exponent is negative, press Ì, and then enter the exponent, which can be one or two digits. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 16 When you enter a number in scientific notation, the TI84 Plus does not automatically display answers in scientific or engineering notation. The mode settings and the size of the number determine the display format. Functions A function returns a value. For example, ÷, L, +, ‡(, and log( are the functions in the example on the previous page. In general, the first letter of each function is lowercase on the TI84 Plus. Most functions take at least one argument, as indicated by an open parenthesis ( ( ) following the name. For example, sin( requires one argument, sin(value). Instructions An instruction initiates an action. For example, ClrDraw is an instruction that clears any drawn elements from a graph. Instructions cannot be used in expressions. In general, the first letter of each instruction name is uppercase. Some instructions take more than one argument, as indicated by an open parenthesis ( ( ) at the end of the name. For example, Circle( requires three arguments, Circle(X,Y,radius). Interrupting a Calculation To interrupt a calculation or graph in progress, which is indicated by the busy indicator, press É. When you interrupt a calculation, a menu is displayed. • • To return to the home screen, select 1:Quit. To go to the location of the interruption, select 2:Goto. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 17 When you interrupt a graph, a partial graph is displayed. • • To return to the home screen, press ‘ or any nongraphing key. To restart graphing, press a graphing key or select a graphing instruction. TI84 Plus Edit Keys
Keystrokes Result Moves the cursor within an expression; these keys repeat. Moves the cursor from line to line within an expression that occupies more than one line; these keys repeat. On the top line of an expression on the home screen, } moves the cursor to the beginning of the expression. On the bottom line of an expression on the home screen, † moves the cursor to the end of the expression. Moves the cursor to the beginning of an expression. Moves the cursor to the end of an expression. Evaluates an expression or executes an instruction. On a line with text on the home screen, clears the current line. On a blank line on the home screen, clears everything on the home screen. In an editor, clears the expression or value where the cursor is located; it does not store a zero. Deletes a character at the cursor; this key repeats. Changes the cursor to an underline (__); inserts characters in front of the underline cursor; to end insertion, press y 6 or press , }, ~, or †. ~ or  } or † y y~ Í ‘ { y6 Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 18 Keystrokes Result Changes the cursor to Þ; the next keystroke performs a 2nd operation (an operation in blue above a key and to the left); to cancel 2nd, press y again. Changes the cursor to Ø; the next keystroke pastes an alpha character (a character in green above a key and to the right) or executes SOLVE (Chapters 10 and 11); to cancel ƒ, press ƒ or press , }, ~, or †. Changes the cursor to Ø; sets alphalock; subsequent keystrokes (on an alpha key) paste alpha characters; to cancel alphalock, press ƒ. If you are prompted to enter a name such as for a group or a program, alphalock is set automatically. Pastes an X in Func mode, a T in Par mode, a q in Pol mode, or an n in Seq mode with one keystroke. y ƒ y7 „ Setting Modes
Checking Mode Settings Mode settings control how the TI84 Plus displays and interprets numbers and graphs. Mode settings are retained by the Constant Memory feature when the TI84 Plus is turned off. All numbers, including elements of matrices and lists, are displayed according to the current mode settings. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 19 To display the mode settings, press z. The current settings are highlighted. Defaults are highlighted below. The following pages describe the mode settings in detail. Normal Sci Eng Float 0123456789 Radian Degree Func Par Pol Seq Connected Dot Sequential Simul Real a+bi re^qi Full Horiz GT Set Clock
Numeric notation Number of decimal places Unit of angle measure Type of graphing Whether to connect graph points Whether to plot simultaneously Real, rectangular complex, or polar complex Full screen, two splitscreen modes 01/01/01 12:00 AM Changing Mode Settings To change mode settings, follow these steps. 1. Press † or } to move the cursor to the line of the setting that you want to change. 2. Press ~ or  to move the cursor to the setting you want. 3. Press Í. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 20 Setting a Mode from a Program You can set a mode from a program by entering the name of the mode as an instruction; for example, Func or Float. From a blank program command line, select the mode setting from the mode screen; the instruction is pasted to the cursor location. Normal, Sci, Eng Notation modes only affect the way an answer is displayed on the home screen. Numeric answers can be displayed with up to 10 digits and a twodigit exponent. You can enter a number in any format.
Normal notation mode is the usual way we express numbers, with digits to the left and right of the decimal, as in 12345.67. Sci (scientific) notation mode expresses numbers in two parts. The significant digits display with one digit to the left of the decimal. The appropriate power of 10 displays to the right of å, as in 1.234567â4.
Eng (engineering) notation mode is similar to scientific notation. However, the number can have one, two, or three digits before the decimal; and the powerof10 exponent is a multiple of three, as in 12.34567â3. Note: If you select Normal notation, but the answer cannot display in 10 digits (or the absolute value is less than .001), the TI84 Plus expresses the answer in scientific notation. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 21 Float, 0123456789
Float (floating) decimal mode displays up to 10 digits, plus the sign and decimal. 0123456789 (fixed) decimal mode specifies the number of digits (0 through 9) to display to the right of the decimal. Place the cursor on the desired number of decimal digits, and then press Í. The decimal setting applies to Normal, Sci, and Eng notation modes. The decimal setting applies to these numbers: • • • • • An answer displayed on the home screen Coordinates on a graph (Chapters 3, 4, 5, and 6) The Tangent( DRAW instruction equation of the line, x, and dy/dx values (Chapter 8) Results of CALCULATE operations (Chapters 3, 4, 5, and 6) The regression equation stored after the execution of a regression model (Chapter 12) Radian, Degree Angle modes control how the TI84 Plus interprets angle values in trigonometric functions and polar/rectangular conversions.
Radian mode interprets angle values as radians. Answers display in radians. Degree mode interprets angle values as degrees. Answers display in degrees. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 22 Func, Par, Pol, Seq Graphing modes define the graphing parameters. Chapters 3, 4, 5, and 6 describe these modes in detail.
Func (function) graphing mode plots functions, where Y is a function of X (Chapter 3). Par (parametric) graphing mode plots relations, where X and Y are functions of T (Chapter 4).
Pol (polar) graphing mode plots functions, where r is a function of q (Chapter 5). Seq (sequence) graphing mode plots sequences (Chapter 6). Connected, Dot
Connected plotting mode draws a line connecting each point calculated for the selected functions.
Dot plotting mode plots only the calculated points of the selected functions. Sequential, Simul
Sequential graphingorder mode evaluates and plots one function completely before the next function is evaluated and plotted.
Simul (simultaneous) graphingorder mode evaluates and plots all selected functions for a single value of X and then evaluates and plots them for the next value of X. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 23 Note: Regardless of which graphing mode is selected, the TI84 Plus will sequentially graph all stat plots before it graphs any functions. Real, a+bi, re^qi
Real mode does not display complex results unless complex numbers are entered as input. Two complex modes display complex results. • •
a+bi (rectangular complex mode) displays complex numbers in the form a+bi. re^qi (polar complex mode) displays complex numbers in the form re^qi. Full, Horiz, GT
Full screen mode uses the entire screen to display a graph or edit screen. Each splitscreen mode displays two screens simultaneously. • •
Horiz (horizontal) mode displays the current graph on the top half of the screen; it displays the home screen or an editor on the bottom half (Chapter 9).
GT (graphtable) mode displays the current graph on the left half of the screen; it displays the table screen on the right half (Chapter 9). Set Clock Use the clock to set the time, date, and clock display formats. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 24 Using TI84 Plus Variable Names
Variables and Defined Items On the TI84 Plus you can enter and use several types of data, including real and complex numbers, matrices, lists, functions, stat plots, graph databases, graph pictures, and strings. The TI84 Plus uses assigned names for variables and other items saved in memory. For lists, you also can create your own fivecharacter names.
Variable Type Real numbers Complex numbers Matrices Lists Functions Parametric equations Polar functions Sequence functions Stat plots Graph databases Graph pictures Strings Names A, B, ... , Z A, B, ... , Z ãAä, ãBä, ãCä, ... , ãJä
L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, and userdefined names Y1, Y2, ... , Y9, Y0 X1T and Y1T, ... , X6T and Y6T r1, r2, r3, r4, r5, r6 u, v, w Plot1, Plot2, Plot3 GDB1, GDB2, ... , GDB9, GDB0 Pic1, Pic2, ... , Pic9, Pic0 Str1, Str2, ... , Str9, Str0 Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 25 Variable Type Apps AppVars Groups System variables Names Applications Application variables Grouped variables Xmin, Xmax, and others Notes about Variables • • • You can create as many list names as memory will allow (Chapter 11). Programs have userdefined names and share memory with variables (Chapter 16). From the home screen or from a program, you can store to matrices (Chapter 10), lists (Chapter 11), strings (Chapter 15), system variables such as Xmax (Chapter 1), TblStart (Chapter 7), and all Y= functions (Chapters 3, 4, 5, and 6). From an editor, you can store to matrices, lists, and Y= functions (Chapter 3). From the home screen, a program, or an editor, you can store a value to a matrix element or a list element. You can use DRAW STO menu items to store and recall graph databases and pictures (Chapter 8). Although most variables can be archived, system variables including r, t, x, y, and q cannot be archived (Chapter 18)
Apps are independent applications.which are stored in Flash ROM. AppVars is a • • • • • variable holder used to store variables created by independent applications. You cannot edit or change variables in AppVars unless you do so through the application which created them. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 26 Storing Variable Values
Storing Values in a Variable Values are stored to and recalled from memory using variable names. When an expression containing the name of a variable is evaluated, the value of the variable at that time is used. To store a value to a variable from the home screen or a program using the ¿ key, begin on a blank line and follow these steps. 1. Enter the value you want to store. The value can be an expression. 2. Press ¿. ! is copied to the cursor location. 3. Press ƒ and then the letter of the variable to which you want to store the value. 4. Press Í. If you entered an expression, it is evaluated. The value is stored to the variable. Displaying a Variable Value To display the value of a variable, enter the name on a blank line on the home screen, and then press Í. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 27 Archiving Variables (Archive, Unarchive) You can archive data, programs, or other variables in a section of memory called user data archive where they cannot be edited or deleted inadvertently. Archived variables are indicated by asterisks (ä) to the left of the variable names. Archived variables cannot be edited or executed. They can only be seen and unarchived. For example, if you archive list L1, you will see that L1 exists in memory but if you select it and paste the name L1 to the home screen, you won’t be able to see its contents or edit it until they are unarchived. Recalling Variable Values
Using Recall (RCL) To recall and copy variable contents to the current cursor location, follow these steps. To leave RCL, press ‘. 1. Press y K. RCL and the edit cursor are displayed on the bottom line of the screen. 2. Enter the name of the variable in any of five ways. • • • • Press ƒ and then the letter of the variable. Press y 9, and then select the name of the list, or press y [Ln]. Press y >, and then select the name of the matrix. Press to display the VARS menu or ~ to display the VARS YVARS menu; then select the type and then the name of the variable or function. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 28 • Press , and then select the name of the program (in the program editor only). The variable name you selected is displayed on the bottom line and the cursor disappears. 3. Press Í. The variable contents are inserted where the cursor was located before you began these steps. Note: You can edit the characters pasted to the expression without affecting the value in memory. ENTRY (Last Entry) Storage Area
Using ENTRY (Last Entry) When you press Í on the home screen to evaluate an expression or execute an instruction, the expression or instruction is placed in a storage area called ENTRY (last entry). When you turn off the TI84 Plus, ENTRY is retained in memory. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 29 To recall ENTRY, press y [. The last entry is pasted to the current cursor location, where you can edit and execute it. On the home screen or in an editor, the current line is cleared and the last entry is pasted to the line. Because the TI84 Plus updates ENTRY only when you press Í, you can recall the previous entry even if you have begun to enter the next expression.
5Ã7 Í y[ Accessing a Previous Entry The TI84 Plus retains as many previous entries as possible in ENTRY, up to a capacity of 128 bytes. To scroll those entries, press y [ repeatedly. If a single entry is more than 128 bytes, it is retained for ENTRY, but it cannot be placed in the ENTRY storage area.
1 ¿ƒ A Í 2¿ƒ B Í y[ Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 30 If you press y [ after displaying the oldest stored entry, the newest stored entry is displayed again, then the nextnewest entry, and so on. y[ Reexecuting the Previous Entry After you have pasted the last entry to the home screen and edited it (if you chose to edit it), you can execute the entry. To execute the last entry, press Í. To reexecute the displayed entry, press Í again. Each reexecution displays an answer on the right side of the next line; the entry itself is not redisplayed. Í ƒ N Ã 1 ¿ƒ N ƒ ã:äŠƒÄN ¡ Í Í Í Multiple Entry Values on a Line To store to ENTRY two or more expressions or instructions, separate each expression or instruction with a colon, then press Í. All expressions and instructions separated by colons are stored in ENTRY.
0 ¿ƒ N Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 31 When you press y [, all the expressions and instructions separated by colons are pasted to the current cursor location. You can edit any of the entries, and then execute all of them when you press Í. For the equation A=pr 2, use trial and error to find the radius of a circle that covers 200 square centimeters. Use 8 as your first guess.
8 ¿ ƒ R ƒ ã :ä yB ƒ R ¡Í y[ y  7 y 6 Ë 95 Í Continue until the answer is as accurate as you want. Clearing ENTRY
Clear Entries (Chapter 18) clears all data that the TI84 Plus is holding in the ENTRY storage area. Using Ans in an Expression When an expression is evaluated successfully from the home screen or from a program, the TI84 Plus stores the answer to a storage area called Ans (last answer). Ans may be a real or complex number, a list, a matrix, or a string. When you turn off the TI84 Plus, the value in Ans is retained in memory. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 32 You can use the variable Ans to represent the last answer in most places. Press y Z to copy the variable name Ans to the cursor location. When the expression is evaluated, the TI84 Plus uses the value of Ans in the calculation. Calculate the area of a garden plot 1.7 meters by 4.2 meters. Then calculate the yield per square meter if the plot produces a total of 147 tomatoes.
1Ë7¯4Ë2 Í 147 ¥ y Z Í Continuing an Expression You can use Ans as the first entry in the next expression without entering the value again or pressing y Z. On a blank line on the home screen, enter the function. The TI84 Plus pastes the variable name Ans to the screen, then the function.
5¥2 Í ¯9Ë9 Í Storing Answers To store an answer, store Ans to a variable before you evaluate another expression. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 33 Calculate the area of a circle of radius 5 meters. Next, calculate the volume of a cylinder of radius 5 meters and height 3.3 meters, and then store the result in the variable V. yB 5 ¡ Í ¯3Ë3 Í ¿ƒ V Í TI84 Plus Menus
Using a TI84 Plus Menu You can access most TI84 Plus operations using menus. When you press a key or key combination to display a menu, one or more menu names appear on the top line of the screen. • • The menu name on the left side of the top line is highlighted. Up to seven items in that menu are displayed, beginning with item 1, which also is highlighted. A number or letter identifies each menu item’s place in the menu. The order is 1 through 9, then 0, then A, B, C, and so on. The LIST NAMES, PRGM EXEC, and PRGM EDIT menus only label items 1 through 9 and 0. When the menu continues beyond the displayed items, a down arrow ($) replaces the colon next to the last displayed item. When a menu item ends in an ellipsis (...), the item displays a secondary menu or editor when you select it. • • Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 34 • When an asterisk (ä) appears to the left of a menu item, that item is stored in user data archive (Chapter 18). To display any other menu listed on the top line, press ~ or  until that menu name is highlighted. The cursor location within the initial menu is irrelevant. The menu is displayed with the cursor on the first item. Displaying a Menu While using your TI84 Plus, you often will need to access items from its menus. When you press a key that displays a menu, that menu temporarily replaces the screen where you are working. For example, when you press , the MATH menu is displayed as a full screen. After you select an item from a menu, the screen where you are working usually is displayed again. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 35 Moving from One Menu to Another Some keys access more than one menu. When you press such a key, the names of all accessible menus are displayed on the top line. When you highlight a menu name, the items in that menu are displayed. Press ~ and  to highlight each menu name. Scrolling a Menu To scroll down the menu items, press †. To scroll up the menu items, press }. To page down six menu items at a time, press ƒ †. To page up six menu items at a time, press ƒ }. The green arrows on the graphing calculator, between † and }, are the pagedown and pageup symbols. To wrap to the last menu item directly from the first menu item, press }. To wrap to the first menu item directly from the last menu item, press †. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 36 Selecting an Item from a Menu You can select an item from a menu in either of two ways. • Press the number or letter of the item you want to select. The cursor can be anywhere on the menu, and the item you select need not be displayed on the screen. • Press † or } to move the cursor to the item you want, and then press Í. After you select an item from a menu, the TI84 Plus typically displays the previous screen. Note: On the LIST NAMES, PRGM EXEC, and PRGM EDIT menus, only items 1 through 9 and 0 are labeled in such a way that you can select them by pressing the appropriate number key. To move the cursor to the first item beginning with any alpha character or q, press the key combination for that alpha character or q. If no items begin with that character, the cursor moves beyond it to the next item. Calculate 3‡27.
27 ¤ Í †††Í Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 37 Leaving a Menu without Making a Selection You can leave a menu without making a selection in any of four ways. • • • • Press y 5 to return to the home screen. Press ‘ to return to the previous screen. Press a key or key combination for a different menu, such as or y 9. Press a key or key combination for a different screen, such as o or y 0. VARS and VARS YVARS Menus
VARS Menu You can enter the names of functions and system variables in an expression or store to them directly. To display the VARS menu, press . All VARS menu items display secondary menus, which show the names of the system variables. 1:Window, 2:Zoom, and 5:Statistics each access more than one secondary menu. VARS YVARS 1: Window... 2: Zoom...
X/Y, T/q, and U/V/W variables ZX/ZY, ZT/Zq, and ZU variables Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 38 VARS YVARS 3: GDB... 4: Picture... 5: Statistics... 6: Table... 7: String...
Graph database variables Picture variables XY, G, EQ, TEST, and PTS variables TABLE variables String variables Selecting a Variable from the VARS Menu or VARS YVARS Menu To display the VARS YVARS menu, press ~. 1:Function, 2:Parametric, and 3:Polar display secondary menus of the Y= function variables. VARS YVARS 1: Function... 2: Parametric... 3: Polar... 4: On/Off...
Yn functions XnT, YnT functions rn functions Lets you select/deselect functions Note: The sequence variables (u, v, w) are located on the keyboard as the second functions of ¬, −, and ®. To select a variable from the VARS or VARS YVARS menu, follow these steps. 1. Display the VARS or VARS YVARS menu. • Press to display the VARS menu.
39 Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition • Press ~ to display the VARS YVARS menu. 2. Select the type of variable, such as 2:Zoom from the VARS menu or 3:Polar from the VARS YVARS menu. A secondary menu is displayed. 3. If you selected 1:Window, 2:Zoom, or 5:Statistics from the VARS menu, you can press ~ or  to display other secondary menus. 4. Select a variable name from the menu. It is pasted to the cursor location. Equation Operating System (EOS™)
Order of Evaluation The Equation Operating System (EOS) defines the order in which functions in expressions are entered and evaluated on the TI84 Plus. EOS lets you enter numbers and functions in a simple, straightforward sequence. EOS evaluates the functions in an expression in this order.
Order Number Function 1 2 Functions that precede the argument, such as ‡(, sin(, or log( Functions that are entered after the argument, such as 2, M1, !, ¡, r, and conversions Powers and roots, such as 2^5 or 5x‡32 Permutations (nPr) and combinations (nCr) Multiplication, implied multiplication, and division Addition and subtraction 3 4 5 6 Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 40 Order Number Function 7 8 9 Relational functions, such as > or Logic operator and Logic operators or and xor Note: Within a priority level, EOS evaluates functions from left to right. Calculations within parentheses are evaluated first. Implied Multiplication The TI84 Plus recognizes implied multiplication, so you need not press ¯ to express multiplication in all cases. For example, the TI84 Plus interprets 2p, 4sin(46), 5(1+2), and (2…5)7 as implied multiplication.
Note: TI84 Plus implied multiplication rules, although like the TI83, differ from those of the TI82. For example, the TI84 Plus evaluates 1à2X as (1à2)…X, while the TI82 evaluates 1à2X as 1à(2…X) (Chapter 2). Parentheses All calculations inside a pair of parentheses are completed first. For example, in the expression 4(1+2), EOS first evaluates the portion inside the parentheses, 1+2, and then multiplies the answer, 3, by 4. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 41 You can omit the close parenthesis ( ) ) at the end of an expression. All open parenthetical elements are closed automatically at the end of an expression. This is also true for open parenthetical elements that precede the store or displayconversion instructions.
Note: An open parenthesis following a list name, matrix name, or Y= function name does not indicate implied multiplication. It specifies elements in the list (Chapter 11) or matrix (Chapter 10) and specifies a value for which to solve the Y= function. Negation To enter a negative number, use the negation key. Press Ì and then enter the number. On the TI84 Plus, negation is in the third level in the EOS hierarchy. Functions in the first level, such as squaring, are evaluated before negation. For example, MX2, evaluates to a negative number (or 0). Use parentheses to square a negative number. Note: Use the ¹ key for subtraction and the Ì key for negation. If you press ¹ to enter a negative number, as in 9 ¯ ¹ 7, or if you press Ì to indicate subtraction, as in 9 Ì 7, an error occurs. If you press ƒ A Ì ƒ B, it is interpreted as implied multiplication (A…MB). Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 42 Special Features of the TI84 Plus
Flash – Electronic Upgradability The TI84 Plus uses Flash technology, which lets you upgrade to future software versions without buying a new graphing calculator. As new functionality becomes available, you can electronically upgrade your TI84 Plus from the Internet. Future software versions include maintenance upgrades that will be released free of charge, as well as new applications and major software upgrades that will be available for purchase from the TI Web site: education.ti.com For details, refer to: Chapter 19 1.5 Megabytes (M) of Available Memory 1.5 M of available memory are built into the TI84 Plus Silver Edition, and .5 M for the TI84 Plus. About 24 kilobytes (K) of RAM (random access memory) are available for you to compute and store functions, programs, and data. About 1.5 M of user data archive allow you to store data, programs, applications, or any other variables to a safe location where they cannot be edited or deleted inadvertently. You can also free up RAM by archiving variables to user data. For details, refer to: Chapter 18 Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 43 Applications Applications can be installed to customize the TI84 Plus to your classroom needs. The big 1.5 M archive space lets you store up to 94 applications at one time. Applications can also be stored on a computer for later use or linked unittounit. There are 30 App slots for the TI84 Plus. For details, refer to: Chapter 18 Archiving You can store variables in the TI84 Plus user data archive, a protected area of memory separate from RAM. The user data archive lets you: • • Store data, programs, applications or any other variables to a safe location where they cannot be edited or deleted inadvertently. Create additional free RAM by archiving variables. By archiving variables that do not need to be edited frequently, you can free up RAM for applications that may require additional memory. For details, refer to: Chapter 18 Other TI84 Plus Features
The TI84 Plus guidebook that is included with your graphing calculator has introduced you to basic TI84 Plus operations. This guidebook covers the other features and capabilities of the TI84 Plus in greater detail. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 44 Graphing You can store, graph, and analyze up to 10 functions, up to six parametric functions, up to six polar functions, and up to three sequences. You can use DRAW instructions to annotate graphs. The graphing chapters appear in this order: Function, Parametric, Polar, Sequence, and DRAW. For graphing details, refer to: Chapters 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 Sequences You can generate sequences and graph them over time. Or, you can graph them as web plots or as phase plots. For details, refer to: Chapter 6 Tables You can create function evaluation tables to analyze many functions simultaneously. For details, refer to: Chapter 7 Split Screen You can split the screen horizontally to display both a graph and a related editor (such as the Y= editor), the table, the stat list editor, or the home screen. Also, you can split the screen vertically to display a graph and its table simultaneously.
Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 45 For details, refer to: Chapter 9 Matrices You can enter and save up to 10 matrices and perform standard matrix operations on them. For details, refer to: Chapter 10 Lists You can enter and save as many lists as memory allows for use in statistical analyses. You can attach formulas to lists for automatic computation. You can use lists to evaluate expressions at multiple values simultaneously and to graph a family of curves. For details, refer to: Chapter 11 Statistics You can perform one and twovariable, listbased statistical analyses, including logistic and sine regression analysis. You can plot the data as a histogram, xyLine, scatter plot, modified or regular boxandwhisker plot, or normal probability plot. You can define and store up to three stat plot definitions. For details, refer to: Chapter 12 Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 46 Inferential Statistics You can perform 16 hypothesis tests and confidence intervals and 15 distribution functions. You can display hypothesis test results graphically or numerically. For details, refer to: Chapter 13 Applications Press Œ to see the complete list of applications that came with your graphing calculator. Documentation for TI Flash applications are on the product CD. Visit education.ti.com/calc/guides for additional Flash application guidebooks. For details, refer to: Chapter 14 CATALOG The CATALOG is a convenient, alphabetical list of all functions and instructions on the TI84 Plus. You can paste any function or instruction from the CATALOG to the current cursor location. For details, refer to: Chapter 15 Programming You can enter and store programs that include extensive control and input/output instructions.
Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 47 For details, refer to: Chapter 16 Archiving Archiving allows you to store data, programs, or other variables to user data archive where they cannot be edited or deleted inadvertently. Archiving also allows you to free up RAM for variables that may require additional memory. Archived variables are indicated by asterisks (ä) to the left of the variable names. For details, refer to: Chapter 16 Communication Link The TI84 Plus has a USB port using a USB unittounit cable to connect and communicate with another TI84 Plus or TI84 Plus Silver Edition. The TI84 Plus also has an I/O port using an I/O unittounit cable to communicate with a TI84 Plus Silver Edition, a TI84 Plus, a TI83 Plus Silver Edition, a TI83 Plus, a TI83, a TI82, a TI73, CBL 2™, or a CBR™ System. With TI Connect™ software and a USB computer cable, you can also link the TI84 Plus to a personal computer. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 48 As future software upgrades become available on the TI Web site, you can download the software to your PC and then use the TI Connect™ software and a USB computer cable to upgrade your TI84 Plus. For details, refer to: Chapter 19 Error Conditions
Diagnosing an Error The TI84 Plus detects errors while performing these tasks. • • • • Evaluating an expression Executing an instruction Plotting a graph Storing a value When the TI84 Plus detects an error, it returns an error message as a menu title, such as ERR:SYNTAX or ERR:DOMAIN. Appendix B describes each error type and possible reasons for the error. • • If you select 1:Quit (or press y 5 or ‘), then the home screen is displayed. If you select 2:Goto, then the previous screen is displayed with the cursor at or near the error location. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 49 Note: If a syntax error occurs in the contents of a Y= function during program execution, then the Goto option returns to the Y= editor, not to the program. Correcting an Error To correct an error, follow these steps. 1. Note the error type (ERR:error type). 2. Select 2:Goto, if it is available. The previous screen is displayed with the cursor at or near the error location. 3. Determine the error. If you cannot recognize the error, refer to Appendix B. 4. Correct the expression. Chapter 1: Operating the TI84 Plus Silver Edition 50 Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations
Getting Started: Coin Flip
Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. Suppose you want to model flipping a fair coin 10 times. You want to track how many of those 10 coin flips result in heads. You want to perform this simulation 40 times. With a fair coin, the probability of a coin flip resulting in heads is 0.5 and the probability of a coin flip resulting in tails is 0.5. 1. Begin on the home screen. Press  to display the MATH PRB menu. Press 7 to select 7:randBin( (random Binomial). randBin( is pasted to the home screen. Press 10 to enter the number of coin flips. Press ¢. Press Ë 5 to enter the probability of heads. Press ¢. Press 40 to enter the number of simulations. Press ¤. 2. Press Í to evaluate the expression. A list of 40 elements is generated with the first 7 displayed. The list contains the count of heads resulting from each set of 10 coin flips. The list has 40 elements because this simulation was performed 40 times. In this example, the coin came up heads five times in the first set of 10 coin flips, five times in the second set of 10 coin flips, and so on. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 51 3. Press ~ or  to view the additional counts in the list. Ellipses (...) indicate that the list continues beyond the screen. 4. Press ¿ y d Í to store the data to the list name L1. You then can use the data for another activity, such as plotting a histogram (Chapter 12).
Note: Since randBin( generates random numbers, your list elements may differ from those in the example. Keyboard Math Operations
Using Lists with Math Operations Math operations that are valid for lists return a list calculated element by element. If you use two lists in the same expression, they must be the same length. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 52 Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division You can use + (addition, Ã), N (subtraction, ¹), … (multiplication, ¯), and à (division, ¥) with real and complex numbers, expressions, lists, and matrices. You cannot use à with matrices.
valueA+valueB valueA…valueB valueA N valueB valueA à valueB Trigonometric Functions You can use the trigonometric (trig) functions (sine, ˜; cosine, ™; and tangent, š) with real numbers, expressions, and lists. The current angle mode setting affects interpretation. For example, sin(30) in Radian mode returns L.9880316241; in Degree mode it returns .5.
sin(value) cos(value) tan(value) You can use the inverse trig functions (arcsine, y ?; arccosine, y @; and arctangent, y A) with real numbers, expressions, and lists. The current angle mode setting affects interpretation.
sinL1(value) cosL1(value) tanL1(value) Note: The trig functions do not operate on complex numbers. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 53 Power, Square, Square Root You can use ^ (power, ›), 2 (square, ¡), and ‡( (square root, y C) with real and complex numbers, expressions, lists, and matrices. You cannot use ‡( with matrices.
value^power È value2 ‡(value) È Inverse You can use L1 (inverse, œ) with real and complex numbers, expressions, lists, and matrices. The multiplicative inverse is equivalent to the reciprocal, 1àx.
value1 log(, 10^(, ln( You can use log( (logarithm, «), 10^( (power of 10, y G), and ln( (natural log, µ) with real or complex numbers, expressions, and lists.
log(value) 10^(power) ln(value) Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 54 Exponential
e^( (exponential, y J) returns the constant e raised to a power. You can use e^( with real or complex numbers, expressions, and lists. e^(power) Constant
e (constant, y [e]) is stored as a constant on the TI84 Plus. Press y [e] to copy e to the cursor location. In calculations, the TI84 Plus uses 2.718281828459 for e. Negation M (negation, Ì) returns the negative of value. You can use M with real or complex numbers, expressions, lists, and matrices. Mvalue EOS™ rules (Chapter 1) determine when negation is evaluated. For example, LA2 returns a negative number, because squaring is evaluated before negation. Use parentheses to square a negated number, as in (LA)2. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 55 Note: On the TI84 Plus, the negation symbol (M) is shorter and higher than the subtraction sign (N), which is displayed when you press ¹. Pi p (Pi, y B) is stored as a constant in the TI84 Plus. In calculations, the TI84 Plus uses 3.1415926535898 for p. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 56 MATH Operations
MATH Menu To display the MATH menu, press . MATH NUM CPX PRB 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 0: 4Frac 4Dec
3 3 Displays the answer as a fraction. Displays the answer as a decimal. Calculates the cube. ‡( Calculates the cube root. Calculates the xth root. Finds the minimum of a function. Finds the maximum of a function. Computes the numerical derivative. Computes the function integral. Displays the equation solver. x‡ fMin( fMax( nDeriv( fnInt( Solver... 4Frac, 4Dec 4Frac (display as a fraction) displays an answer as its rational equivalent. You can use 4Frac with real or complex numbers, expressions, lists, and matrices. If the answer Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 57 cannot be simplified or the resulting denominator is more than three digits, the decimal equivalent is returned. You can only use 4Frac following value.
value 4Frac 4Dec (display as a decimal) displays an answer in decimal form. You can use 4Dec with real or complex numbers, expressions, lists, and matrices. You can only use 4Dec following value.
value 4Dec Cube, Cube Root (cube) returns the cube of value. You can use 3 with real or complex numbers, expressions, lists, and square matrices.
value3
3 (cube root) returns the cube root of value. You can use 3‡( with real or complex numbers, expressions, and lists.
3‡ (
3‡(value) Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 58 x‡ x (Root) (Root) ‡ (xth root) returns the xth root of value. You can use x‡ with real or complex numbers, expressions, and lists.
xthrootx‡value fMin(, fMax(
fMin( (function minimum) and fMax( (function maximum) return the value at which the local minimum or local maximum value of expression with respect to variable occurs, between lower and upper values for variable. fMin( and fMax( are not valid in expression. The accuracy is controlled by tolerance (if not specified, the default is 1âL5). fMin(expression,variable,lower,upper[,tolerance]) fMax(expression,variable,lower,upper[,tolerance]) Note: In this guidebook, optional arguments and the commas that accompany them are enclosed in brackets ([ ]). Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 59 nDeriv(
nDeriv( (numerical derivative) returns an approximate derivative of expression with respect to variable, given the value at which to calculate the derivative and H (if not specified, the default is 1âL3). nDeriv( is valid only for real numbers. nDeriv(expression,variable,value[,H]) nDeriv( uses the symmetric difference quotient method, which approximates the numerical derivative value as the slope of the secant line through these points.
f( x + ε) – f( x – ε) f ′ ( x ) = 2ε As H becomes smaller, the approximation usually becomes more accurate. You can use nDeriv( once in expression. Because of the method used to calculate nDeriv(, the TI84 Plus can return a false derivative value at a nondifferentiable point. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 60 fnInt(
fnInt( (function integral) returns the numerical integral (GaussKronrod method) of expression with respect to variable, given lower limit, upper limit, and a tolerance (if not specified, the default is 1âL5). fnInt( is valid only for real numbers. fnInt(expression,variable,lower,upper[,tolerance]) Note: To speed the drawing of integration graphs (when fnInt( is used in a Y= equation), increase the value of the Xres window variable before you press s. Using the Equation Solver
Solver
Solver displays the equation solver, in which you can solve for any variable in an equation. The equation is assumed to be equal to zero. Solver is valid only for real numbers. When you select Solver, one of two screens is displayed. • • The equation editor (see step 1 picture below) is displayed when the equation variable eqn is empty. The interactive solver editor is displayed when an equation is stored in eqn. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 61 Entering an Expression in the Equation Solver To enter an expression in the equation solver, assuming that the variable eqn is empty, follow these steps. 1. Select 0:Solver from the MATH menu to display the equation editor. 2. Enter the expression in any of three ways. • • • Enter the expression directly into the equation solver. Paste a Y= variable name from the VARS YVARS menu to the equation solver. Press y K, paste a Y= variable name from the VARS YVARS menu, and press Í. The expression is pasted to the equation solver. The expression is stored to the variable eqn as you enter it. 3. Press Í or †. The interactive solver editor is displayed. • The equation stored in eqn is set equal to zero and displayed on the top line. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 62 • • • Variables in the equation are listed in the order in which they appear in the equation. Any values stored to the listed variables also are displayed. The default lower and upper bounds appear in the last line of the editor (bound={L1â99,1â99}). A $ is displayed in the first column of the bottom line if the editor continues beyond the screen. Note: To use the solver to solve an equation such as K=.5MV2, enter eqn:0=KN.5MV2 in the equation editor. Entering and Editing Variable Values When you enter or edit a value for a variable in the interactive solver editor, the new value is stored in memory to that variable. You can enter an expression for a variable value. It is evaluated when you move to the next variable. Expressions must resolve to real numbers at each step during the iteration. You can store equations to any VARS YVARS variables, such as Y1 or r6, and then reference the variables in the equation. The interactive solver editor displays all variables of all Y= functions referenced in the equation. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 63 Solving for a Variable in the Equation Solver To solve for a variable using the equation solver after an equation has been stored to eqn, follow these steps. 1. Select 0:Solver from the MATH menu to display the interactive solver editor, if not already displayed. 2. Enter or edit the value of each known variable. All variables, except the unknown variable, must contain a value. To move the cursor to the next variable, press Í or †. 3. Enter an initial guess for the variable for which you are solving. This is optional, but it may help find the solution more quickly. Also, for equations with multiple roots, the TI84 Plus will attempt to display the solution that is closest to your guess. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 64 ( u pper + lower ) The default guess is calculated as  . 2 4. Edit bound={lower,upper}. lower and upper are the bounds between which the TI84 Plus searches for a solution. This is optional, but it may help find the solution more quickly. The default is bound={L1â99,1â99}. 5. Move the cursor to the variable for which you want to solve and press ƒ \. • The solution is displayed next to the variable for which you solved. A solid square in the first column marks the variable for which you solved and indicates that the equation is balanced. An ellipsis shows that the value continues beyond the screen.
Note: When a number continues beyond the screen, be sure to press ~ to scroll to the end of the number to see whether it ends with a negative or positive exponent. A very small number may appear to be a large number until you scroll right to see the exponent. • • The values of the variables are updated in memory.
leftNrt=diff is displayed in the last line of the editor. diff is the difference between the left and right sides of the equation. A solid square in the first column next to Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 65 leftNrt indicates that the equation has been evaluated at the new value of the variable for which you solved. Editing an Equation Stored to eqn To edit or replace an equation stored to eqn when the interactive equation solver is displayed, press } until the equation editor is displayed. Then edit the equation. Equations with Multiple Roots Some equations have more than one solution. You can enter a new initial guess or new bounds to look for additional solutions. Further Solutions After you solve for a variable, you can continue to explore solutions from the interactive solver editor. Edit the values of one or more variables. When you edit any variable value, the solid squares next to the previous solution and leftNrt=diff disappear. Move the cursor to the variable for which you now want to solve and press ƒ \. Controlling the Solution for Solver or solve( The TI84 Plus solves equations through an iterative process. To control that process, enter bounds that are relatively close to the solution and enter an initial guess within those bounds. This will help to find a solution more quickly. Also, it will define which solution you want for equations with multiple solutions. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 66 Using solve( on the Home Screen or from a Program The function solve( is available only from CATALOG or from within a program. It returns a solution (root) of expression for variable, given an initial guess, and lower and upper bounds within which the solution is sought. The default for lower is L1â99. The default for upper is L1â99. solve( is valid only for real numbers.
solve(expression,variable,guess[,{lower,upper}]) expression is assumed equal to zero. The value of variable will not be updated in memory. guess may be a value or a list of two values. Values must be stored for every variable in expression, except variable, before expression is evaluated. lower and upper must be entered in list format. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 67 MATH NUM (Number) Operations
MATH NUM Menu To display the MATH NUM menu, press ~. MATH NUM CPX PRB 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: abs( round( iPart( fPart( int( min( max( lcm( gcd(
Absolute value Round Integer part Fractional part Greatest integer Minimum value Maximum value Least common multiple Greatest common divisor abs(
abs( (absolute value) returns the absolute value of real or complex (modulus) numbers, expressions, lists, and matrices.
abs(value) Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 68 Note: abs( is also available on the MATH CPX menu. round(
round( returns a number, expression, list, or matrix rounded to #decimals (9). If #decimals is omitted, value is rounded to the digits that are displayed, up to 10 digits. round(value[,#decimals]) iPart(, fPart(
iPart( (integer part) returns the integer part or parts of real or complex numbers, expressions, lists, and matrices.
iPart(value) fPart( (fractional part) returns the fractional part or parts of real or complex numbers, expressions, lists, and matrices. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 69 fPart(value) int(
int( (greatest integer) returns the largest integer real or complex numbers, expressions, lists, and matrices. int(value) Note: For a given value, the result of int( is the same as the result of iPart( for nonnegative numbers and negative integers, but one integer less than the result of iPart( for negative noninteger numbers. min(, max(
min( (minimum value) returns the smaller of valueA and valueB or the smallest element in list. If listA and listB are compared, min( returns a list of the smaller of each pair of elements. If list and value are compared, min( compares each element in list with value. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 70 max( (maximum value) returns the larger of valueA and valueB or the largest element in list. If listA and listB are compared, max( returns a list of the larger of each pair of elements. If list and value are compared, max( compares each element in list with value. min(valueA,valueB) min(list) min(listA,listB) min(list,value) max(valueA,valueB) max(list) max(listA,listB) max(list,value) Note: min( and max( also are available on the LIST MATH menu. lcm(, gcd(
lcm( returns the least common multiple of valueA and valueB, both of which must be nonnegative integers. When listA and listB are specified, lcm( returns a list of the lcm of each pair of elements. If list and value are specified, lcm( finds the lcm of each element in list and value. gcd( returns the greatest common divisor of valueA and valueB, both of which must be nonnegative integers. When listA and listB are specified, gcd( returns a list of the gcd of Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 71 each pair of elements. If list and value are specified, gcd( finds the gcd of each element in list and value.
lcm(valueA,valueB) lcm(listA,listB) lcm(list,value) gcd(valueA,valueB) gcd(listA,listB) gcd(list,value) Entering and Using Complex Numbers
ComplexNumber Modes The TI84 Plus displays complex numbers in rectangular form and polar form. To select a complexnumber mode, press z, and then select either of the two modes. • •
a+bi (rectangularcomplex mode) re^qi (polarcomplex mode) Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 72 On the TI84 Plus, complex numbers can be stored to variables. Also, complex numbers are valid list elements. In Real mode, complexnumber results return an error, unless you entered a complex number as input. For example, in Real mode ln(L1) returns an error; in a+bi mode ln(L1) returns an answer. Real mode
a+bi mode $ $ Entering Complex Numbers Complex numbers are stored in rectangular form, but you can enter a complex number in rectangular form or polar form, regardless of the mode setting. The components of complex numbers can be real numbers or expressions that evaluate to real numbers; expressions are evaluated when the command is executed. Note about Radian Versus Degree Mode Radian mode is recommended for complex number calculations. Internally, the TI84 Plus converts all entered trigonometric values to radians, but it does not convert values for exponential, logarithmic, or hyperbolic functions. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 73 In degree mode, complex identities such as e^(iq) = cos(q) + i sin(q) are not generally true because the values for cos and sin are converted to radians, while those for e^() are not. For example, e^(i45) = cos(45) + i sin(45) is treated internally as e^(i45) = cos(p/4) + i sin(p/4). Complex identities are always true in radian mode. Interpreting Complex Results Complex numbers in results, including list elements, are displayed in either rectangular or polar form, as specified by the mode setting or by a display conversion instruction. In the example below, polarcomplex (re^qi) and Radian modes are set. RectangularComplex Mode Rectangularcomplex mode recognizes and displays a complex number in the form a+bi, where a is the real component, b is the imaginary component, and i is a constant equal to –1 . To enter a complex number in rectangular form, enter the value of a (real component), press Ã or ¹, enter the value of b (imaginary component), and press y V (constant).
real component(+ or N)imaginary component i Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 74 PolarComplex Mode Polarcomplex mode recognizes and displays a complex number in the form re^qi, where r is the magnitude, e is the base of the natural log, q is the angle, and i is a constant equal to –1 . To enter a complex number in polar form, enter the value of r (magnitude), press y J (exponential function), enter the value of q (angle), press y V (constant), and then press ¤.
magnitudee^(anglei) Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 75 MATH CPX (Complex) Operations
MATH CPX Menu To display the MATH CPX menu, press ~ ~. MATH NUM 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: conj( real( imag( angle( abs( 4Rect 4Polar CPX PRB
Returns the complex conjugate. Returns the real part. Returns the imaginary part. Returns the polar angle. Returns the magnitude (modulus). Displays the result in rectangular form. Displays the result in polar form. conj(
conj( (conjugate) returns the complex conjugate of a complex number or list of complex numbers.
conj(a+bi) returns aNbi in a+bi mode. conj(re^(qi)) returns re^(Lqi) in re^qi mode. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 76 real(
real( (real part) returns the real part of a complex number or list of complex numbers. real(a+bi) returns a. real(re^(qi)) returns r†cos(q). imag(
imag( (imaginary part) returns the imaginary (nonreal) part of a complex number or list of complex numbers.
imag(a+bi) returns b. imag(re^(qi)) returns r†sin(q). angle(
angle( returns the polar angle of a complex number or list of complex numbers, calculated as tanL1 (b/a), where b is the imaginary part and a is the real part. The calculation is adjusted by +p in the second quadrant or Np in the third quadrant. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 77 angle(a+bi) returns tanL1(b/a). angle(re^(qi)) returns q, where Lp<q<p. abs(
abs( (absolute value) returns the magnitude (modulus), ( real 2 + imag 2 ) , of a complex number or list of complex numbers.
abs(a+bi) returns ( a 2 + b 2 ) . abs(re^(qi)) returns r (magnitude). 4Rect 4Rect (display as rectangular) displays a complex result in rectangular form. It is valid only at the end of an expression. It is not valid if the result is real.
complex result8Rect returns a+bi. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 78 4Polar 4Polar (display as polar) displays a complex result in polar form. It is valid only at the end of an expression. It is not valid if the result is real.
complex result8Polar returns re^(qi). MATH PRB (Probability) Operations
MATH PRB Menu To display the MATH PRB menu, press . MATH NUM CPX PRB 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: rand nPr nCr ! randInt(
Randomnumber generator Number of permutations Number of combinations Factorial Randominteger generator randNorm( Random # from Normal distribution randBin(
Random # from Binomial distribution Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 79 rand
rand (random number) generates and returns one or more random numbers > 0 and < 1. To generate a list of randomnumbers, specify an integer > 1 for numtrials (number of trials). The default for numtrials is 1. rand[(numtrials)] Note: To generate random numbers beyond the range of 0 to 1, you can include rand in an expression. For example, rand5 generates a random number > 0 and < 5. With each rand execution, the TI84 Plus generates the same randomnumber sequence for a given seed value. The TI84 Plus factoryset seed value for rand is 0. To generate a different randomnumber sequence, store any nonzero seed value to rand. To restore the factoryset seed value, store 0 to rand or reset the defaults (Chapter 18).
Note: The seed value also affects randInt(, randNorm(, and randBin( instructions. nPr, nCr
nPr (number of permutations) returns the number of permutations of items taken number at a time. items and number must be nonnegative integers. Both items and number can be lists. items nPr number Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 80 nCr (number of combinations) returns the number of combinations of items taken number at a time. items and number must be nonnegative integers. Both items and number can be lists.
items nCr number Factorial
! (factorial) returns the factorial of either an integer or a multiple of .5. For a list, it returns factorials for each integer or multiple of .5. value must be ‚ L.5 and 69. value! Note: The factorial is computed recursively using the relationship (n+1)! = n…n!, until n is reduced to either 0 or L1/2. At that point, the definition 0!=1 or the definition (L1à2)!=‡p is used to complete the calculation. Hence: n!=n…(nN1)…(nN2)… ... …2…1, if n is an integer ‚ 0 n!= n…(nN1)…(nN2)… ... …1à2…‡p, if n+1à2 is an integer ‚ 0 n! is an error, if neither n nor n+1à2 is an integer ‚ 0. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 81 (The variable n equals value in the syntax description above.) randInt(
randInt( (random integer) generates and displays a random integer within a range specified by lower and upper integer bounds. To generate a list of random numbers, specify an integer > 1 for numtrials (number of trials); if not specified, the default is 1. randInt(lower,upper[,numtrials]) randNorm(
randNorm( (random Normal) generates and displays a random real number from a specified Normal distribution. Each generated value could be any real number, but most will be within the interval [mN3(s), m+3(s)]. To generate a list of random numbers, specify an integer > 1 for numtrials (number of trials); if not specified, the default is 1.
randNorm(m,s[,numtrials]) Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 82 randBin(
randBin( (random Binomial) generates and displays a random integer from a specified Binomial distribution. numtrials (number of trials) must be ‚ 1. prob (probability of success) must be ‚ 0 and 1. To generate a list of random numbers, specify an integer > 1 for numsimulations (number of simulations); if not specified, the default is 1.
randBin(numtrials,prob[,numsimulations]) Note: The seed value stored to rand also affects randInt(, randNorm(, and randBin( instructions. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 83 ANGLE Operations
ANGLE Menu To display the ANGLE menu, press y ;. The ANGLE menu displays angle indicators and instructions. The Radian/Degree mode setting affects the TI84 Plus’s interpretation of ANGLE menu entries. ANGLE 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: ¡ ' r 8DMS
Degree notation DMS minute notation Radian notation Displays as degree/minute/second R8Pr( Returns r, given X and Y R8Pq(
Returns q, given X and Y P8Rx( Returns x, given R and q P8Ry( Returns y, given R and q Entry Notation DMS (degrees/minutes/seconds) entry notation comprises the degree symbol (¡), the minute symbol ('), and the second symbol ("). degrees must be a real number; minutes and seconds must be real numbers ‚ 0.
degrees¡minutes'seconds" Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 84 For example, enter for 30 degrees, 1 minute, 23 seconds. If the angle mode is not set to Degree, you must use ¡ so that the TI84 Plus can interpret the argument as degrees, minutes, and seconds.
Degree mode Radian mode Degree ¡ (degree) designates an angle or list of angles as degrees, regardless of the current angle mode setting. In Radian mode, you can use ¡ to convert degrees to radians.
value¡ {value1,value2,value3,value4,...,value n}¡ ¡ also designates degrees (D) in DMS format. ' (minutes) designates minutes (M) in DMS format. " (seconds) designates seconds (S) in DMS format.
Note: " is not on the ANGLE menu. To enter ", press ƒ [ã]. Radians (radians) designates an angle or list of angles as radians, regardless of the current angle mode setting. In Degree mode, you can use r to convert radians to degrees.
r Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 85 valuer Degree mode 8DMS 8DMS (degree/minute/second) displays answer in DMS format. The mode setting must be Degree for answer to be interpreted as degrees, minutes, and seconds. 8DMS is valid only at the end of a line.
answer8DMS R8Pr (, R8Pq( , P8Rx(, P8Ry(
R8Pr( converts rectangular coordinates to polar coordinates and returns r. R8Pq( converts rectangular coordinates to polar coordinates and returns q. x and y can be lists. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 86 R8Pr(x,y), R8Pq(x,y) Note: Radian mode is set. P8Rx( converts polar coordinates to rectangular coordinates and returns x. P8Ry( converts polar coordinates to rectangular coordinates and returns y. r and q can be lists. P8Rx(r,q), P8Ry(r,q) Note: Radian mode is set. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 87 TEST (Relational) Operations
TEST Menu To display the TEST menu, press y :.
This operator... Returns 1 (true) if... TEST 1: = 2: ƒ 3: > 4: ‚ 5: < 6: LOGIC
Equal Not equal to Greater than Greater than or equal to Less than Less than or equal to Ä=, ƒ, >, ‚, <, Relational operators compare valueA and valueB and return 1 if the test is true or 0 if the test is false. valueA and valueB can be real numbers, expressions, or lists. For = and ƒ only, valueA and valueB also can be matrices or complex numbers. If valueA and valueB are matrices, both must have the same dimensions. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 88 Relational operators are often used in programs to control program flow and in graphing to control the graph of a function over specific values.
valueA=valueB valueA>valueB valueA<valueB valueAƒvalueB valueA‚valueB valueAvalueB Using Tests Relational operators are evaluated after mathematical functions according to EOS rules (Chapter 1). • • The expression 2+2=2+3 returns 0. The TI84 Plus performs the addition first because of EOS rules, and then it compares 4 to 5. The expression 2+(2=2)+3 returns 6. The TI84 Plus performs the relational test first because it is in parentheses, and then it adds 2, 1, and 3. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 89 TEST LOGIC (Boolean) Operations
TEST LOGIC Menu To display the TEST LOGIC menu, press y : ~.
This operator... Returns a 1 (true) if... TEST 1: and 2: or 3: xor LOGIC
Both values are nonzero (true). At least one value is nonzero (true). Only one value is zero (false). The value is zero (false). 4: not( Boolean Operators Boolean operators are often used in programs to control program flow and in graphing to control the graph of the function over specific values. Values are interpreted as zero (false) or nonzero (true). and, or, xor
and, or, and xor (exclusive or) return a value of 1 if an expression is true or 0 if an expression is false, according to the table below. valueA and valueB can be real numbers, expressions, or lists. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 90 valueA and valueB valueA or valueB valueA xor valueB valueA valueB and returns returns returns returns 1 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 0 xor 0 1 1 0 ƒ0 ƒ0
0 0 ƒ0
0 ƒ0
0 not(
not( returns 1 if value (which can be an expression) is 0. not(value) Using Boolean Operations Boolean logic is often used with relational tests. In the following program, the instructions store 4 into C. Chapter 2: Math, Angle, and Test Operations 91 Chapter 3: Function Graphing
Getting Started: Graphing a Circle
Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. Graph a circle of radius 10, centered on the origin in the standard viewing window. To graph this circle, you must enter separate formulas for the upper and lower portions of the circle. Then use ZSquare (zoom square) to adjust the display and make the functions appear as a circle. 1. In Func mode, press o to display the Y= editor. Press y C 100 ¹ „ ¡ ¤ Í to enter the expression Y=‡(100NX 2), which defines the top half of the circle. The expression Y=L‡(100NX 2) defines the bottom half of the circle. On the TI84 Plus, you can define one function in terms of another. To define Y2=LY1, press Ì to enter the negation sign. Press ~ to display the VARS YVARS menu. Then press Í to select 1:Function. The FUNCTION secondary menu is displayed. Press 1 to select 1:Y1. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 92 2. Press q 6 to select 6:ZStandard. This is a quick way to reset the window variables to the standard values. It also graphs the functions; you do not need to press s. Notice that the functions appear as an ellipse in the standard viewing window. 3. To adjust the display so that each pixel represents an equal width and height, press q 5 to select 5:ZSquare. The functions are replotted and now appear as a circle on the display. 4. To see the ZSquare window variables, press p and notice the new values for Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, and Ymax. Defining Graphs
TI84 Plus—Graphing Mode Similarities Chapter 3 specifically describes function graphing, but the steps shown here are similar for each TI84 Plus graphing mode. Chapters 4, 5, and 6 describe aspects that are unique to parametric graphing, polar graphing, and sequence graphing. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 93 Defining a Graph To define a graph in any graphing mode, follow these steps. Some steps are not always necessary. 1. Press z and set the appropriate graph mode. 2. Press o and enter, edit, or select one or more functions in the Y= editor. 3. Deselect stat plots, if necessary. 4. Set the graph style for each function. 5. Press p and define the viewing window variables. 6. Press y . and select the graph format settings. Displaying and Exploring a Graph After you have defined a graph, press s to display it. Explore the behavior of the function or functions using the TI84 Plus tools described in this chapter. Saving a Graph for Later Use You can store the elements that define the current graph to any of 10 graph database variables (GDB1 through GDB9, and GDB0; Chapter 8). To recreate the current graph later, simply recall the graph database to which you stored the original graph. These types of information are stored in a GDB. • • Y= functions Graph style settings Chapter 3: Function Graphing 94 • • Window settings Format settings You can store a picture of the current graph display to any of 10 graph picture variables (Pic1 through Pic9, and Pic0; Chapter 8). Then you can superimpose one or more stored pictures onto the current graph. Setting the Graph Modes
Checking and Changing the Graphing Mode To display the mode screen, press z. The default settings are highlighted below. To graph functions, you must select Func mode before you enter values for the window variables and before you enter the functions. The TI84 Plus has four graphing modes. • • • •
Func (function graphing) Par (parametric graphing; Chapter 4) Pol (polar graphing; Chapter 5) Seq (sequence graphing; Chapter 6) Chapter 3: Function Graphing 95 Other mode settings affect graphing results. Chapter 1 describes each mode setting. • • • •
Float or 0123456789 (fixed) decimal mode affects displayed graph coordinates. Radian or Degree angle mode affects interpretation of some functions. Connected or Dot plotting mode affects plotting of selected functions. Sequential or Simul graphingorder mode affects function plotting when more than one function is selected. Setting Modes from a Program To set the graphing mode and other modes from a program, begin on a blank line in the program editor and follow these steps. 1. Press z to display the mode settings. 2. Press †, ~, , and } to place the cursor on the mode that you want to select. 3. Press Í to paste the mode name to the cursor location. The mode is changed when the program is executed. Defining Functions
Displaying Functions in the Y= Editor To display the Y= editor, press o. You can store up to 10 functions to the function variables Y1 through Y9, and Y0. You can graph one or more defined functions at once. In this example, functions Y1 and Y2 are defined and selected. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 96 Defining or Editing a Function To define or edit a function, follow these steps. 1. Press o to display the Y= editor. 2. Press † to move the cursor to the function you want to define or edit. To erase a function, press ‘. 3. Enter or edit the expression to define the function. • You may use functions and variables (including matrices and lists) in the expression. When the expression evaluates to a nonreal number, the value is not plotted; no error is returned. The independent variable in the function is X. Func mode defines „ as X. To enter X, press „ or press ƒ [X]. When you enter the first character, the = is highlighted, indicating that the function is selected. • • As you enter the expression, it is stored to the variable Yn as a userdefined function in the Y= editor. 4. Press Í or † to move the cursor to the next function. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 97 Defining a Function from the Home Screen or a Program To define a function from the home screen or a program, begin on a blank line and follow these steps. 1. Press ƒ [ã], enter the expression, and then press ƒ [ã] again. 2. Press ¿. 3. Press ~ 1 to select 1:Function from the VARS YVARS menu. 4. Select the function name, which pastes the name to the cursor location on the home screen or program editor. 5. Press Í to complete the instruction.
"expression"!Yn When the instruction is executed, the TI84 Plus stores the expression to the designated variable Yn, selects the function, and displays the message Done. Evaluating Y= Functions in Expressions You can calculate the value of a Y= function Yn at a specified value of X. A list of values returns a list. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 98 Yn(value) Yn({value1,value2,value3, . . .,value n}) Selecting Selecting and Deselecting Functions
Selecting and Deselecting a Function You can select and deselect (turn on and turn off) a function in the Y= editor. A function is selected when the = sign is highlighted. The TI84 Plus graphs only the selected functions. You can select any or all functions Y1 through Y9, and Y0. To select or deselect a function in the Y= editor, follow these steps. 1. Press o to display the Y= editor. 2. Move the cursor to the function you want to select or deselect. 3. Press  to place the cursor on the function’s = sign. 4. Press Í to change the selection status. When you enter or edit a function, it is selected automatically. When you clear a function, it is deselected. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 99 Turning On or Turning Off a Stat Plot in the Y= Editor To view and change the on/off status of a stat plot in the Y= editor, use Plot1 Plot2 Plot3 (the top line of the Y= editor). When a plot is on, its name is highlighted on this line. To change the on/off status of a stat plot from the Y= editor, press } and ~ to place the cursor on Plot1, Plot2, or Plot3, and then press Í. Plot1 is turned on. Plot2 and Plot3 are turned off. Selecting and Deselecting Functions from the Home Screen or a Program To select or deselect a function from the home screen or a program, begin on a blank line and follow these steps. 1. Press ~ to display the VARS YVARS menu. 2. Select 4:On/Off to display the ON/OFF secondary menu. 3. Select 1:FnOn to turn on one or more functions or 2:FnOff to turn off one or more functions. The instruction you select is copied to the cursor location. 4. Enter the number (1 through 9, or 0; not the variable Yn) of each function you want to turn on or turn off. • If you enter two or more numbers, separate them with commas. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 100 • To turn on or turn off all functions, do not enter a number after FnOn or FnOff.
FnOn[function#,function#, . . .,function n] FnOff[function#,function#, . . .,function n] 5. Press Í. When the instruction is executed, the status of each function in the current mode is set and Done is displayed. For example, in Func mode, FnOff :FnOn 1,3 turns off all functions in the Y= editor, and then turns on Y1 and Y3. Setting Graph Styles for Functions
MATH Graph Style Icons in the Y= Editor This table describes the graph styles available for function graphing. Use the styles to visually differentiate functions to be graphed together. For example, you can set Y1 as a solid line, Y2 as a dotted line, and Y3 as a thick line.
Icon Style Line Description A solid line connects plotted points; this is the default in Connected mode ç Chapter 3: Function Graphing 101 Icon Style Thick Above Below Path Animate Dot Description A thick solid line connects plotted points Shading covers the area above the graph Shading covers the area below the graph A circular cursor traces the leading edge of the graph and draws a path A circular cursor traces the leading edge of the graph without drawing a path A small dot represents each plotted point; this is the default in Dot mode è é ê ë ì í Note: Some graph styles are not available in all graphing modes. Chapters 4, 5, and 6 list the styles for Par, Pol, and Seq modes. Setting the Graph Style To set the graph style for a function, follow these steps. 1. Press o to display the Y= editor. 2. Press † and } to move the cursor to the function. 3. Press   to move the cursor left, past the = sign, to the graph style icon in the first column. The insert cursor is displayed. (Steps 2 and 3 are interchangeable.) 4. Press Í repeatedly to rotate through the graph styles. The seven styles rotate in the same order in which they are listed in the table above. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 102 5. Press ~, }, or † when you have selected a style. Shading Above and Below When you select é or ê for two or more functions, the TI84 Plus rotates through four shading patterns. • • • • • Vertical lines shade the first function with a é or ê graph style. Horizontal lines shade the second. Negatively sloping diagonal lines shade the third. Positively sloping diagonal lines shade the fourth. The rotation returns to vertical lines for the fifth é or ê function, repeating the order described above. When shaded areas intersect, the patterns overlap. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 103 Note: When é or ê is selected for a Y= function that graphs a family of curves, such as Y1={1,2,3}X, the four shading patterns rotate for each member of the family of curves. Setting a Graph Style from a Program To set the graph style from a program, select H:GraphStyle( from the PRGM CTL menu. To display this menu, press while in the program editor. function# is the number of the Y= function name in the current graphing mode. graphstyle# is an integer from 1 to 7 that corresponds to the graph style, as shown below. 1 = ç (line) 2 = è (thick) 3 = é (above) 4 = ê (below) 5 = ë (path) 6 = ì (animate) 7 = í (dot) GraphStyle(function#,graphstyle#) For example, when this program is executed in Func mode, GraphStyle(1,3) sets Y1 to é (above). Chapter 3: Function Graphing 104 Setting the Viewing Window Variables
The TI84 Plus Viewing Window The viewing window is the portion of the coordinate plane defined by Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, and Ymax. Xscl (X scale) defines the distance between tick marks on the xaxis. Yscl (Y scale) defines the distance between tick marks on the yaxis. To turn off tick marks, set Xscl=0 and Yscl=0. Displaying the Window Variables To display the current window variable values, press p. The window editor above and to the right shows the default values in Func graphing mode and Radian angle mode. The window variables differ from one graphing mode to another.
Xres sets pixel resolution (1 through 8) for function graphs only. The default is 1. • • At Xres=1, functions are evaluated and graphed at each pixel on the xaxis. At Xres=8, functions are evaluated and graphed at every eighth pixel along the xaxis. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 105 Note: Small Xres values improve graph resolution but may cause the TI84 Plus to draw graphs more slowly. Changing a Window Variable Value To change a window variable value from the window editor, follow these steps. 1. Press † or } to move the cursor to the window variable you want to change. 2. Edit the value, which can be an expression. • • Enter a new value, which clears the original value. Move the cursor to a specific digit, and then edit it. 3. Press Í, †, or }. If you entered an expression, the TI84 Plus evaluates it. The new value is stored.
Note: Xmin<Xmax and Ymin<Ymax must be true in order to graph. Storing to a Window Variable from the Home Screen or a Program To store a value, which can be an expression, to a window variable, begin on a blank line and follow these steps. 1. Enter the value you want to store. 2. Press ¿. 3. Press to display the VARS menu. 4. Select 1:Window to display the Func window variables (X/Y secondary menu). • Press ~ to display the Par and Pol window variables (T/q secondary menu). Chapter 3: Function Graphing 106 • Press ~ ~ to display the Seq window variables (U/V/W secondary menu). 5. Select the window variable to which you want to store a value. The name of the variable is pasted to the current cursor location. 6. Press Í to complete the instruction. When the instruction is executed, the TI84 Plus stores the value to the window variable and displays the value. @X and @Y The variables @X and @Y (items 8 and 9 on the VARS (1:Window) X/Y secondary menu) define the distance from the center of one pixel to the center of any adjacent pixel on a graph (graphing accuracy). @X and @Y are calculated from Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, and Ymax when you display a graph. ( Xmax – Xmin ) ∆ X = 94 ( Ymax – Ymin ) ∆ Y = 62 You can store values to @X and @Y. If you do, Xmax and Ymax are calculated from @X, Xmin, @Y, and Ymin. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 107 Setting the Graph Format
Displaying the Format Settings To display the format settings, press y .. The default settings are highlighted below. RectGC CoordOn GridOff AxesOn LabelOff ExprOn PolarGC
Sets cursor coordinates. CoordOff Sets coordinates display on or off. GridOn AxesOff LabelOn ExprOff
Sets grid off or on. Sets axes on or off. Sets axes label off or on. Sets expression display on or off. Format settings define a graph’s appearance on the display. Format settings apply to all graphing modes. Seq graphing mode has an additional mode setting (Chapter 6). Changing a Format Setting To change a format setting, follow these steps. 1. Press †, ~, }, and  as necessary to move the cursor to the setting you want to select. 2. Press Í to select the highlighted setting. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 108 RectGC, PolarGC
RectGC (rectangular graphing coordinates) displays the cursor location as rectangular coordinates X and Y.
PolarGC (polar graphing coordinates) displays the cursor location as polar coordinates R and q. The RectGC/PolarGC setting determines which variables are updated when you plot the graph, move the freemoving cursor, or trace. • •
RectGC updates X and Y; if CoordOn format is selected, X and Y are displayed. PolarGC updates X, Y, R, and q; if CoordOn format is selected, R and q are displayed. CoordOn, CoordOff
CoordOn (coordinates on) displays the cursor coordinates at the bottom of the graph. If ExprOff format is selected, the function number is displayed in the topright corner. CoordOff (coordinates off) does not display the function number or coordinates. GridOff, GridOn Grid points cover the viewing window in rows that correspond to the tick marks on each axis.
GridOff does not display grid points. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 109 GridOn displays grid points. AxesOn, AxesOff
AxesOn displays the axes. AxesOff does not display the axes. This overrides the LabelOff/ LabelOn format setting. LabelOff, LabelOn
LabelOff and LabelOn determine whether to display labels for the axes (X and Y), if AxesOn format is also selected. ExprOn, ExprOff
ExprOn and ExprOff determine whether to display the Y= expression when the trace cursor is active. This format setting also applies to stat plots. When ExprOn is selected, the expression is displayed in the topleft corner of the graph screen. When ExprOff and CoordOn both are selected, the number in the topright corner specifies which function is being traced. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 110 Displaying Graphs
Displaying a New Graph To display the graph of the selected function or functions, press s. TRACE, ZOOM instructions, and CALC operations display the graph automatically. As the TI84 Plus plots the graph, the busy indicator is on. As the graph is plotted, X and Y are updated. Pausing or Stopping a Graph While plotting a graph, you can pause or stop graphing. • • Press Í to pause; then press Í to resume. Press É to stop; then press s to redraw. Smart Graph Smart Graph is a TI84 Plus feature that redisplays the last graph immediately when you press s, but only if all graphing factors that would cause replotting have remained the same since the graph was last displayed. If you performed any of these actions since the graph was last displayed, the TI84 Plus will replot the graph based on new values when you press s. • • • Changed a mode setting that affects graphs Changed a function in the current picture Selected or deselected a function or stat plot Chapter 3: Function Graphing 111 • • • • Changed the value of a variable in a selected function Changed a window variable or graph format setting Cleared drawings by selecting ClrDraw Changed a stat plot definition Overlaying Functions on a Graph On the TI84 Plus, you can graph one or more new functions without replotting existing functions. For example, store sin(X) to Y1 in the Y= editor and press s. Then store cos(X) to Y2 and press s again. The function Y2 is graphed on top of Y1, the original function. Graphing a Family of Curves If you enter a list (Chapter 11) as an element in an expression, the TI84 Plus plots the function for each value in the list, thereby graphing a family of curves. In Simul graphingorder mode, it graphs all functions sequentially for the first element in each list, and then for the second, and so on. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 112 {2,4,6}sin(X) graphs three functions: 2 sin(X), 4 sin(X), and 6 sin(X). {2,4,6}sin({1,2,3}X) graphs 2 sin(X), 4 sin(2X), and 6 sin(3X) . Note: When using more than one list, the lists must have the same dimensions. Exploring Graphs with the FreeMoving Cursor
FreeMoving Cursor When a graph is displayed, press , ~, }, or † to move the cursor around the graph. When you first display the graph, no cursor is visible. When you press , ~, }, or †, the cursor moves from the center of the viewing window. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 113 As you move the cursor around the graph, the coordinate values of the cursor location are displayed at the bottom of the screen if CoordOn format is selected. The Float/Fix decimal mode setting determines the number of decimal digits displayed for the coordinate values. To display the graph with no cursor and no coordinate values, press ‘ or Í. When you press , ~, }, or †, the cursor moves from the same position. Graphing Accuracy The freemoving cursor moves from pixel to pixel on the screen. When you move the cursor to a pixel that appears to be on the function, the cursor may be near, but not actually on, the function. The coordinate value displayed at the bottom of the screen actually may not be a point on the function. To move the cursor along a function, use r. The coordinate values displayed as you move the cursor approximate actual math coordinates, *accurate to within the width and height of the pixel. As Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, and Ymax get closer together (as in a Zoom In) graphing accuracy increases, and the coordinate values more closely approximate the math coordinates. Free moving cursor “on” the curve Chapter 3: Function Graphing 114 Exploring Graphs with TRACE
Beginning a Trace Use TRACE to move the cursor from one plotted point to the next along a function. To begin a trace, press r. If the graph is not displayed already, press r to display it. The trace cursor is on the first selected function in the Y= editor, at the middle X value on the screen. The cursor coordinates are displayed at the bottom of the screen if CoordOn format is selected. The Y= expression is displayed in the topleft corner of the screen, if ExprOn format is selected. Moving the Trace Cursor
To move the TRACE cursor To the previous or next plotted point, Five plotted points on a function (Xres affects this), To any valid X value on a function, From one function to another, do this: press  or ~. press y  or y ~. enter a value, and then press Í. press } or †. When the trace cursor moves along a function, the Y value is calculated from the X value; that is, Y=Yn(X). If the function is undefined at an X value, the Y value is blank. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 115 Trace cursor on the curve If you move the trace cursor beyond the top or bottom of the screen, the coordinate values at the bottom of the screen continue to change appropriately. Moving the Trace Cursor from Function to Function To move the trace cursor from function to function, press † and }. The cursor follows the order of the selected functions in the Y= editor. The trace cursor moves to each function at the same X value. If ExprOn format is selected, the expression is updated. Moving the Trace Cursor to Any Valid X Value To move the trace cursor to any valid X value on the current function, enter the value. When you enter the first digit, an X= prompt and the number you entered are displayed in the bottomleft corner of the screen. You can enter an expression at the X= prompt. The Chapter 3: Function Graphing 116 value must be valid for the current viewing window. When you have completed the entry, press Í to move the cursor. Note: This feature does not apply to stat plots. Panning to the Left or Right If you trace a function beyond the left or right side of the screen, the viewing window automatically pans to the left or right. Xmin and Xmax are updated to correspond to the new viewing window. Quick Zoom While tracing, you can press Í to adjust the viewing window so that the cursor location becomes the center of the new viewing window, even if the cursor is above or below the display. This allows panning up and down. After Quick Zoom, the cursor remains in TRACE. Leaving and Returning to TRACE When you leave and return to TRACE, the trace cursor is displayed in the same location it was in when you left TRACE, unless Smart Graph has replotted the graph.
Chapter 3: Function Graphing 117 Using TRACE in a Program On a blank line in the program editor, press r. The instruction Trace is pasted to the cursor location. When the instruction is encountered during program execution, the graph is displayed with the trace cursor on the first selected function. As you trace, the cursor coordinate values are updated. When you finish tracing the functions, press Í to resume program execution. Exploring Graphs with the ZOOM Instructions
ZOOM Menu To display the ZOOM menu, press q. You can adjust the viewing window of the graph quickly in several ways. All ZOOM instructions are accessible from programs. ZOOM MEMORY
Draws a box to define the viewing window. Magnifies the graph around the cursor. Views more of a graph around the cursor. Sets @X and @Y to 0.1. Sets equalsize pixels on the X and Y axes. 1: ZBox 2: Zoom In 3: Zoom Out 4: ZDecimal 5: ZSquare Chapter 3: Function Graphing 118 ZOOM MEMORY
Sets the standard window variables. Sets the builtin trig window variables. Sets integer values on the X and Y axes. Sets the values for current stat lists. Fits YMin and YMax between XMin and XMax. 6: ZStandard 7: ZTrig 8: ZInteger 9: ZoomStat 0: ZoomFit Zoom Cursor When you select 1:ZBox, 2:Zoom In, or 3:Zoom Out, the cursor on the graph becomes the zoom cursor (+), a smaller version of the freemoving cursor (+). ZBox To define a new viewing window using ZBox, follow these steps. 1. Select 1:ZBox from the ZOOM menu. The zoom cursor is displayed at the center of the screen. 2. Move the zoom cursor to any spot you want to define as a corner of the box, and then press Í. When you move the cursor away from the first defined corner, a small, square dot indicates the spot. 3. Press , }, ~, or †. As you move the cursor, the sides of the box lengthen or shorten proportionately on the screen.
Note: To cancel ZBox before you press Í, press ‘. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 119 4. When you have defined the box, press Í to replot the graph. To use ZBox to define another box within the new graph, repeat steps 2 through 4. To cancel ZBox, press ‘. Zoom In, Zoom Out
Zoom In magnifies the part of the graph that surrounds the cursor location. Zoom Out displays a greater portion of the graph, centered on the cursor location. The XFact and YFact settings determine the extent of the zoom. To zoom in on a graph, follow these steps. 1. Check XFact and YFact; change as needed. 2. Select 2:Zoom In from the ZOOM menu. The zoom cursor is displayed. 3. Move the zoom cursor to the point that is to be the center of the new viewing window. 4. Press Í. The TI83 Plus adjusts the viewing window by XFact and YFact; updates the window variables; and replots the selected functions, centered on the cursor location. 5. Zoom in on the graph again in either of two ways. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 120 • • To zoom in at the same point, press Í. To zoom in at a new point, move the cursor to the point that you want as the center of the new viewing window, and then press Í. To zoom out on a graph, select 3:Zoom Out and repeat steps 3 through 5. To cancel Zoom In or Zoom Out, press ‘. ZDecimal
ZDecimal replots the functions immediately. It updates the window variables to preset values, as shown below. These values set @X and @Y equal to 0.1 and set the X and Y value of each pixel to one decimal place.
Xmin=L4.7 Xmax=4.7 Xscl=1 Ymin=L3.1 Ymax=3.1 Yscl=1 ZSquare
ZSquare replots the functions immediately. It redefines the viewing window based on the current values of the window variables. It adjusts in only one direction so that @X=@Y, which makes the graph of a circle look like a circle. Xscl and Yscl remain unchanged. The midpoint of the current graph (not the intersection of the axes) becomes the midpoint of the new graph. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 121 ZStandard
ZStandard replots the functions immediately. It updates the window variables to the standard values shown below. Xmin=L10 Xmax=10 Xscl=1 Ymin=L10 Ymax=10 Yscl=1 Xres=1 ZTrig
ZTrig replots the functions immediately. It updates the window variables to preset values that are appropriate for plotting trig functions. Those preset values in Radian mode are shown below.
Xmin=L(47à24)p Xmax=(47à24)p Xscl=p/2 Ymin=L4 Ymax=4 Yscl=1 ZInteger
ZInteger redefines the viewing window to the dimensions shown below. To use ZInteger, move the cursor to the point that you want to be the center of the new window, and then press Í; ZInteger replots the functions. @X=1 @Y=1
Xscl=10 Yscl=10 Chapter 3: Function Graphing 122 ZoomStat
ZoomStat redefines the viewing window so that all statistical data points are displayed. For regular and modified box plots, only Xmin and Xmax are adjusted. ZoomFit
ZoomFit replots the functions immediately. ZoomFit recalculates YMin and YMax to include the minimum and maximum Y values of the selected functions between the current XMin and XMax. XMin and XMax are not changed. Using ZOOM MEMORY
ZOOM MEMORY Menu To display the ZOOM MEMORY menu, press q ~. ZOOM MEMORY
Uses the previous viewing window. Stores the userdefined window. Recalls the userdefined window. Changes Zoom In and Zoom Out factors. 1: ZPrevious 2: ZoomSto 3: ZoomRcl 4: SetFactors... Chapter 3: Function Graphing 123 ZPrevious
ZPrevious replots the graph using the window variables of the graph that was displayed before you executed the last ZOOM instruction. ZoomSto
ZoomSto immediately stores the current viewing window. The graph is displayed, and the values of the current window variables are stored in the userdefined ZOOM variables ZXmin, ZXmax, ZXscl, ZYmin, ZYmax, ZYscl, and ZXres. These variables apply to all graphing modes. For example, changing the value of ZXmin in Func mode also changes it in Par mode. ZoomRcl
ZoomRcl graphs the selected functions in a userdefined viewing window. The userdefined viewing window is determined by the values stored with the ZoomSto instruction. The window variables are updated with the userdefined values, and the graph is plotted. ZOOM FACTORS The zoom factors, XFact and YFact, are positive numbers (not necessarily integers) greater than or equal to 1. They define the magnification or reduction factor used to Zoom In or Zoom Out around a point. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 124 Checking XFact and YFact To display the ZOOM FACTORS screen, where you can review the current values for XFact and YFact, select 4:SetFactors from the ZOOM MEMORY menu. The values shown are the defaults. Changing XFact and YFact You can change XFact and YFact in either of two ways. • • Enter a new value. The original value is cleared automatically when you enter the first digit. Place the cursor on the digit you want to change, and then enter a value or press { to delete it. Using ZOOM MEMORY Menu Items from the Home Screen or a Program From the home screen or a program, you can store directly to any of the userdefined ZOOM variables. From a program, you can select the ZoomSto and ZoomRcl instructions from the ZOOM
MEMORY menu. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 125 Using the CALC (Calculate) Operations
CALCULATE Menu To display the CALCULATE menu, press y /. Use the items on this menu to analyze the current graph functions. CALCULATE 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: value zero minimum maximum intersect dy/dx ‰f(x)dx
Calculates a function Y value for a given X. Finds a zero (xintercept) of a function. Finds a minimum of a function. Finds a maximum of a function. Finds an intersection of two functions. Finds a numeric derivative of a function. Finds a numeric integral of a function. value
value evaluates one or more currently selected functions for a specified value of X. Note: When a value is displayed for X, press ‘ to clear the value. When no value is displayed, press ‘ to cancel the value operation. To evaluate a selected function at X, follow these steps. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 126 1. Select 1:value from the CALCULATE menu. The graph is displayed with X= in the bottomleft corner. 2. Enter a real value, which can be an expression, for X between Xmin and Xmax. 3. Press Í. The cursor is on the first selected function in the Y= editor at the X value you entered, and the coordinates are displayed, even if CoordOff format is selected. To move the cursor from function to function at the entered X value, press } or †. To restore the freemoving cursor, press  or ~. zero
zero finds a zero (xintercept or root) of a function using solve(. Functions can have more than one xintercept value; zero finds the zero closest to your guess. The time zero spends to find the correct zero value depends on the accuracy of the values you specify for the left and right bounds and the accuracy of your guess. To find a zero of a function, follow these steps. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 127 1. Select 2:zero from the CALCULATE menu. The current graph is displayed with Left Bound? in the bottomleft corner. 2. Press } or † to move the cursor onto the function for which you want to find a zero. 3. Press  or ~ (or enter a value) to select the xvalue for the left bound of the interval, and then press Í. A 4 indicator on the graph screen shows the left bound. Right Bound? is displayed in the bottomleft corner. Press  or ~ (or enter a value) to select the xvalue for the right bound, and then press Í. A 3 indicator on the graph screen shows the right bound. Guess? is then displayed in the bottomleft corner. 4. Press  or ~ (or enter a value) to select a point near the zero of the function, between the bounds, and then press Í. The cursor is on the solution and the coordinates are displayed, even if CoordOff format is selected. To move to the same xvalue for other selected functions, press } or †. To restore the freemoving cursor, press  or ~. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 128 minimum, maximum
minimum and maximum find a minimum or maximum of a function within a specified interval to a tolerance of 1âL5. To find a minimum or maximum, follow these steps. 1. Select 3:minimum or 4:maximum from the CALCULATE menu. The current graph is displayed. 2. Select the function and set left bound, right bound, and guess as described for zero. The cursor is on the solution, and the coordinates are displayed, even if you have selected CoordOff format; Minimum or Maximum is displayed in the bottomleft corner. To move to the same xvalue for other selected functions, press } or †. To restore the freemoving cursor, press  or ~. intersect
intersect finds the coordinates of a point at which two or more functions intersect using solve(. The intersection must appear on the display to use intersect. To find an intersection, follow these steps. 1. Select 5:intersect from the CALCULATE menu. The current graph is displayed with First curve? in the bottomleft corner. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 129 2. Press † or }, if necessary, to move the cursor to the first function, and then press Í. Second curve? is displayed in the bottomleft corner. 3. Press † or }, if necessary, to move the cursor to the second function, and then press Í. 4. Press ~ or  to move the cursor to the point that is your guess as to location of the intersection, and then press Í. The cursor is on the solution and the coordinates are displayed, even if CoordOff format is selected. Intersection is displayed in the bottomleft corner. To restore the freemoving cursor, press , }, ~, or †. dy/dx
dy/dx (numerical derivative) finds the numerical derivative (slope) of a function at a point, with H=1âL3. To find a function’s slope at a point, follow these steps. 1. Select 6:dy/dx from the CALCULATE menu. The current graph is displayed. 2. Press } or † to select the function for which you want to find the numerical derivative. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 130 3. Press  or ~ (or enter a value) to select the X value at which to calculate the derivative, and then press Í. The cursor is on the solution and the numerical derivative is displayed. To move to the same xvalue for other selected functions, press } or †. To restore the freemoving cursor, press  or ~. ‰f(x)dx ‰f(x)dx (numerical integral) finds the numerical integral of a function in a specified interval. It uses the fnInt( function, with a tolerance of H=1âL3. To find the numerical integral of a function, follow these steps. 1. Select 7:‰f(x)dx from the CALCULATE menu. The current graph is displayed with Lower Limit? in the bottomleft corner. 2. Press } or † to move the cursor to the function for which you want to calculate the integral. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 131 3. Set lower and upper limits as you would set left and right bounds for zero. The integral value is displayed, and the integrated area is shaded. Note: The shaded area is a drawing. Use ClrDraw (Chapter 8) or any action that invokes Smart Graph to clear the shaded area. Chapter 3: Function Graphing 132 Chapter 4: Parametric Graphing
Getting Started: Path of a Ball
Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. Graph the parametric equation that describes the path of a ball hit at an initial speed of 30 meters per second, at an initial angle of 25 degrees with the horizontal from ground level. How far does the ball travel? When does it hit the ground? How high does it go? Ignore all forces except gravity. For initial velocity v o and angle q, the position of the ball as a function of time has horizontal and vertical components. Horizontal: X1(t)=tv 0cos(q)
1 Vertical: Y1(t)=tv 0sin(q)N  gt2 2 The vertical and horizontal vectors of the ball’s motion also will be graphed. Vertical vector: Horizontal vector: Gravity constant: X2(t)=0 X3(t)=X1(t) g=9.8 m/sec2 Y2(t)=Y1(t) Y3(t)=0 Chapter 4: Parametric Graphing 133 1. Press z. Press † † † ~ Í to select Par mode. Press † † ~ Í to select Simul for simultaneous graphing of all three parametric equations in this example. 2. Press o. Press 30 „ ™ 25 y ; 1 (to select ¡) ¤ Í to define X1T in terms of T. 3. Press 30 „ ˜ 25 y ; 1 ¤ ¹ 9.8 ¥ 2 „ ¡ Í to define Y1T. The vertical component vector is defined by X2T and Y2T. 4. Press 0 Í to define X2T. 5. Press ~ to display the VARS YVARS menu. Press 2 to display the PARAMETRIC secondary menu. Press 2 Í to define Y2T. Chapter 4: Parametric Graphing 134 The horizontal component vector is defined by X3T and Y3T. 6. Press ~ 2, and then press 1 Í to define X3T. Press 0 Í to define Y3T. 7. Press   } Í to change the graph style to è for X3T and Y3T. Press } Í Í to change the graph style to ë for X2T and Y2T. Press } Í Í to change the graph style to ë for X1T and Y1T. (These keystrokes assume that all graph styles were set to ç originally.) 8. Press p. Enter these values for the window variables.
Tmin=0 Tmax=5 Tstep=.1 Xmin=L10 Xmax=100 Xscl=50 Ymin=L5 Ymax=15 Yscl=10 9. Press y . † † † ~ Í to set AxesOff, which turns off the axes. Chapter 4: Parametric Graphing 135 10. Press s. The plotting action simultaneously shows the ball in flight and the vertical and horizontal component vectors of the motion.
Note: To simulate the ball flying through the air, set graph style to ì (animate) for X1T and Y1T. 11. Press r to obtain numerical results and answer the questions at the beginning of this section. Tracing begins at Tmin on the first parametric equation (X1T and Y1T). As you press ~ to trace the curve, the cursor follows the path of the ball over time. The values for X (distance), Y (height), and T (time) are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Defining and Displaying Parametric Graphs
TI84 Plus Graphing Mode Similarities The steps for defining a parametric graph are similar to the steps for defining a function graph. Chapter 4 assumes that you are familiar with Chapter 3: Function Graphing. Chapter 4 details aspects of parametric graphing that differ from function graphing. Chapter 4: Parametric Graphing 136 Setting Parametric Graphing Mode To display the mode screen, press z. To graph parametric equations, you must select Par graphing mode before you enter window variables and before you enter the components of parametric equations. Displaying the Parametric Y= Editor After selecting Par graphing mode, press o to display the parametric Y= editor. In this editor, you can display and enter both the X and Y components of up to six equations, X1T and Y1T through X6T and Y6T. Each is defined in terms of the independent variable T. A common application of parametric graphs is graphing equations over time. Selecting Selecting a Graph Style The icons to the left of X1T through X6T represent the graph style of each parametric equation. The default in Par mode is ç (line), which connects plotted points. Line, è (thick), ë (path), ì (animate), and í (dot) styles are available for parametric graphing. Chapter 4: Parametric Graphing 137 Defining and Editing Parametric Equations To define or edit a parametric equation, follow the steps in Chapter 3 for defining a function or editing a function. The independent variable in a parametric equation is T. In Par graphing mode, you can enter the parametric variable T in either of two ways. • • Press „. Press ƒ [T]. Two components, X and Y, define a single parametric equation. You must define both of them. Selecting and Deselecting Parametric Equations The TI84 Plus graphs only the selected parametric equations. In the Y= editor, a parametric equation is selected when the = signs of both the X and Y components are highlighted. You may select any or all of the equations X1T and Y1T through X6T and Y6T. To change the selection status, move the cursor onto the = sign of either the X or Y component and press Í. The status of both the X and Y components is changed. Chapter 4: Parametric Graphing 138 Setting Window Variables To display the window variable values, press p. These variables define the viewing window. The values below are defaults for Par graphing in Radian angle mode. Tmin=0 Tmax=6.2831853... Tstep=.1308996... Xmin=L10 Xmax=10 Xscl=1 Ymin=L10 Ymax=10 Yscl=1
Smallest T value to evaluate Largest T value to evaluate (2p) T value increment (pà24) Smallest X value to be displayed Largest X value to be displayed Spacing between the X tick marks Smallest Y value to be displayed Largest Y value to be displayed Spacing between the Y tick marks Note: To ensure that sufficient points are plotted, you may want to change the T window variables. Setting the Graph Format To display the current graph format settings, press y .. Chapter 3 describes the format settings in detail. The other graphing modes share these format settings; Seq graphing mode has an additional axes format setting. Chapter 4: Parametric Graphing 139 Displaying a Graph When you press s, the TI84 Plus plots the selected parametric equations. It evaluates the X and Y components for each value of T (from Tmin to Tmax in intervals of Tstep), and then plots each point defined by X and Y. The window variables define the viewing window. As the graph is plotted, X, Y, and T are updated. Smart Graph applies to parametric graphs. Window Variables and Y.VARS Menus You can perform these actions from the home screen or a program. • Access functions by using the name of the X or Y component of the equation as a variable. • Store parametric equations. Chapter 4: Parametric Graphing 140 • Select or deselect parametric equations. • Store values directly to window variables. Exploring Parametric Graphs
FreeMoving Cursor The freemoving cursor in Par graphing works the same as in Func graphing. In RectGC format, moving the cursor updates the values of X and Y; if CoordOn format is selected, X and Y are displayed. In PolarGC format, X, Y, R, and q are updated; if CoordOn format is selected, R and q are displayed. TRACE To activate TRACE, press r. When TRACE is active, you can move the trace cursor along the graph of the equation one Tstep at a time. When you begin a trace, the trace Chapter 4: Parametric Graphing 141 cursor is on the first selected function at Tmin. If ExprOn is selected, then the function is displayed. In RectGC format, TRACE updates and displays the values of X, Y, and T if CoordOn format is on. In PolarGC format, X, Y, R, q and T are updated; if CoordOn format is selected, R, q, and T are displayed. The X and Y (or R and q) values are calculated from T. To move five plotted points at a time on a function, press y  or y ~. If you move the cursor beyond the top or bottom of the screen, the coordinate values at the bottom of the screen continue to change appropriately. Quick Zoom is available in Par graphing; panning is not. Moving the Trace Cursor to Any Valid T Value To move the trace cursor to any valid T value on the current function, enter the number. When you enter the first digit, a T= prompt and the number you entered are displayed in the bottomleft corner of the screen. You can enter an expression at the T= prompt. The value must be valid for the current viewing window. When you have completed the entry, press Í to move the cursor. Chapter 4: Parametric Graphing 142 ZOOM
ZOOM operations in Par graphing work the same as in Func graphing. Only the X (Xmin, Xmax, and Xscl) and Y (Ymin, Ymax, and Yscl) window variables are affected. The T window variables (Tmin, Tmax, and Tstep) are only affected when you select ZStandard. The VARS ZOOM secondary menu ZT/Zq items 1:ZTmin, 2:ZTmax, and 3:ZTstep are the zoom memory variables for Par graphing. CALC
CALC operations in Par graphing work the same as in Func graphing. The CALCULATE menu items available in Par graphing are 1:value, 2:dy/dx, 3:dy/dt, and 4:dx/dt. Chapter 4: Parametric Graphing 143 Chapter 5: Polar Graphing
Getting Started: Polar Rose
Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. The polar equation R=Asin(Bq) graphs a rose. Graph the rose for A=8 and B=2.5, and then explore the appearance of the rose for other values of A and B. 1. Press z to display the MODE screen. Press † † † ~ ~ Í to select Pol graphing mode. Select the defaults (the options on the left) for the other mode settings. 2. Press o to display the polar Y= editor. Press 8 ˜ 2.5 „ ¤ Í to define r1. 3. Press q 6 to select 6:ZStandard and graph the equation in the standard viewing window. The graph shows only five petals of the rose, and the rose does not appear to be symmetrical. This is because the standard window sets qmax=2p and defines the window, rather than the pixels, as square. Chapter 5: Polar Graphing 144 4. Press p to display the window variables. Press † 4 y B to increase the value of qmax to 4p. 5. Press q 5 to select 5:ZSquare and plot the graph. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 with new values for the variables A and B in the polar equation r1=Asin(Bq). Observe how the new values affect the graph. Defining and Displaying Polar Graphs
TI84 Plus Graphing Mode Similarities The steps for defining a polar graph are similar to the steps for defining a function graph. Chapter 5 assumes that you are familiar with Chapter 3: Function Graphing. Chapter 5 details aspects of polar graphing that differ from function graphing. Chapter 5: Polar Graphing 145 Setting Polar Graphing Mode To display the mode screen, press z. To graph polar equations, you must select Pol graphing mode before you enter values for the window variables and before you enter polar equations. Displaying the Polar Y= Editor After selecting Pol graphing mode, press o to display the polar Y= editor. In this editor, you can enter and display up to six polar equations, r1 through r6. Each is defined in terms of the independent variable q. Selecting Graph Styles The icons to the left of r1 through r6 represent the graph style of each polar equation. The default in Pol graphing mode is ç (line), which connects plotted points. Line, è (thick), ë (path), ì (animate), and í (dot) styles are available for polar graphing. Chapter 5: Polar Graphing 146 Defining and Editing Polar Equations To define or edit a polar equation, follow the steps in Chapter 3 for defining a function or editing a function. The independent variable in a polar equation is q. In Pol graphing mode, you can enter the polar variable q in either of two ways. • • Press „. Press ƒ [q]. Selecting and Deselecting Polar Equations The TI84 Plus graphs only the selected polar equations. In the Y= editor, a polar equation is selected when the = sign is highlighted. You may select any or all of the equations. To change the selection status, move the cursor onto the = sign, and then press Í. Setting Window Variables To display the window variable values, press p. These variables define the viewing window. The values below are defaults for Pol graphing in Radian angle mode. qmin=0 qmax=6.2831853... qstep=.1308996... Xmin=L10
Smallest q value to evaluate Largest q value to evaluate (2p) Increment between q values (pà24) Smallest X value to be displayed Chapter 5: Polar Graphing 147 Xmax=10 Xscl=1 Ymin=L10 Ymax=10 Yscl=1 Largest X value to be displayed Spacing between the X tick marks Smallest Y value to be displayed Largest Y value to be displayed Spacing between the Y tick marks Note: To ensure that sufficient points are plotted, you may want to change the q window variables. Setting the Graph Format To display the current graph format settings, press y .. Chapter 3 describes the format settings in detail. The other graphing modes share these format settings. Displaying a Graph When you press s, the TI84 Plus plots the selected polar equations. It evaluates R for each value of q (from qmin to qmax in intervals of qstep) and then plots each point. The window variables define the viewing window. As the graph is plotted, X, Y, R, and q are updated. Smart Graph applies to polar graphs. Chapter 5: Polar Graphing 148 Window Variables and Y.VARS Menus You can perform these actions from the home screen or a program. • Access functions by using the name of the equation as a variable. • Store polar equations. • Select or deselect polar equations. • Store values directly to window variables. Chapter 5: Polar Graphing 149 Exploring Polar Graphs
FreeMoving Cursor The freemoving cursor in Pol graphing works the same as in Func graphing. In RectGC format, moving the cursor updates the values of X and Y; if CoordOn format is selected, X and Y are displayed. In PolarGC format, X, Y, R, and q are updated; if CoordOn format is selected, R and q are displayed. TRACE To activate TRACE, press r. When TRACE is active, you can move the trace cursor along the graph of the equation one qstep at a time. When you begin a trace, the trace cursor is on the first selected function at qmin. If ExprOn format is selected, then the equation is displayed. In RectGC format, TRACE updates the values of X, Y, and q; if CoordOn format is selected, X, Y, and q are displayed. In PolarGC format, TRACE updates X, Y, R, and q; if CoordOn format is selected, R and q are displayed. To move five plotted points at a time on a function, press y  or y ~. If you move the trace cursor beyond the top or bottom of the screen, the coordinate values at the bottom of the screen continue to change appropriately. Quick Zoom is available in Pol graphing mode; panning is not. Chapter 5: Polar Graphing 150 Moving the Trace Cursor to Any Valid Theta Value To move the trace cursor to any valid q value on the current function, enter the number. When you enter the first digit, a q= prompt and the number you entered are displayed in the bottomleft corner of the screen. You can enter an expression at the q= prompt. The value must be valid for the current viewing window. When you complete the entry, press Í to move the cursor. ZOOM
ZOOM operations in Pol graphing work the same as in Func graphing. Only the X (Xmin, Xmax, and Xscl) and Y (Ymin, Ymax, and Yscl) window variables are affected. The q window variables (qmin, qmax, and qstep) are not affected, except when you select ZStandard. The VARS ZOOM secondary menu ZT/Zq items 4:Zqmin, 5:Zqmax, and 6:Zqstep are zoom memory variables for Pol graphing. CALC
CALC operations in Pol graphing work the same as in Func graphing. The CALCULATE menu items available in Pol graphing are 1:value, 2:dy/dx, and 3:dr/dq. Chapter 5: Polar Graphing 151 Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing
Getting Started: Forest and Trees
Note: Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. A small forest of 4,000 trees is under a new forestry plan. Each year 20 percent of the trees will be harvested and 1,000 new trees will be planted. Will the forest eventually disappear? Will the forest size stabilize? If so, in how many years and with how many trees? 1. Press z. Press † † † ~ ~ ~ Í to select Seq graphing mode. 2. Press y . and select Time axes format and ExprOn format if necessary. Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 152 3. Press o. If the graphstyle icon is not ç (dot), press  , press Í until ç is displayed, and then press ~ ~. 4. Press ~ 3 to select iPart( (integer part) because only whole trees are harvested. After each annual harvest, 80 percent (.80) of the trees remain. Press Ë 8 y [u] £ „ ¹ 1 ¤ to define the number of trees after each harvest. Press Ã 1000 ¤ to define the new trees. Press † 4000 to define the number of trees at the beginning of the program. 5. Press p 0 to set nMin=0. Press † 50 to set nMax=50. nMin and nMax evaluate forest size over 50 years. Set the other window variables.
PlotStart=1 Xmin=0 Ymin=0 PlotStep=1 Xmax=50 Ymax=6000 Xscl=10 Yscl=1000 6. Press r. Tracing begins at nMin (the start of the forestry plan). Press ~ to trace the sequence year by year. The sequence is displayed at the top of the screen. The values for n (number of years), X (X=n, because n is plotted on the xaxis), and Y (tree count) are displayed at the bottom. When will the forest stabilize? With how many trees? Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 153 Defining and Displaying Sequence Graphs
TI84 Plus Graphing Mode Similarities The steps for defining a sequence graph are similar to the steps for defining a function graph. Chapter 6 assumes that you are familiar with Chapter 3: Function Graphing. Chapter 6 details aspects of sequence graphing that differ from function graphing. Setting Sequence Graphing Mode To display the mode screen, press z. To graph sequence functions, you must select Seq graphing mode before you enter window variables and before you enter sequence functions. Sequence graphs automatically plot in Simul mode, regardless of the current plottingorder mode setting. TI84 Plus Sequence Functions u, v, and w The TI84 Plus has three sequence functions that you can enter from the keyboard: u, v, and w. They are above the ¬, −, and ® keys. You can define sequence functions in terms of: • • • The independent variable n The previous term in the sequence function, such as u(nN1) The term that precedes the previous term in the sequence function, such as u(nN2) Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 154 • The previous term or the term that precedes the previous term in another sequence function, such as u(nN1) or u(nN2) referenced in the sequence v(n). Note: Statements in this chapter about u(n) are also true for v(n) and w(n); statements about u(nN1) are also true for v(nN1) and w(nN1); statements about u(nN2) are also true for v(nN2) and w(nN2). Displaying the Sequence Y= Editor After selecting Seq mode, press o to display the sequence Y= editor. In this editor, you can display and enter sequences for u(n), v(n), and w(n). Also, you can edit the value for nMin, which is the sequence window variable that defines the minimum n value to evaluate. The sequence Y= editor displays the nMin value because of its relevance to u(nMin), v(nMin), and w(nMin), which are the initial values for the sequence equations u(n), v(n), and w(n), respectively.
nMin in the Y= editor is the same as nMin in the window editor. If you enter a new value for nMin in one editor, the new value for nMin is updated in both editors. Note: Use u(nMin), v(nMin), or w(nMin) only with a recursive sequence, which requires an initial value. Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 155 Selecting Graph Styles The icons to the left of u(n), v(n), and w(n) represent the graph style of each sequence (Chapter 3). The default in Seq mode is í (dot), which shows discrete values. Dot, ç (line), and è (thick) styles are available for sequence graphing. Graph styles are ignored in Web format. Selecting and Deselecting Sequence Functions The TI84 Plus graphs only the selected sequence functions. In the Y= editor, a sequence function is selected when the = signs of both u(n)= and u(nMin)= are highlighted. To change the selection status of a sequence function, move the cursor onto the = sign of the function name, and then press Í. The status is changed for both the sequence function u(n) and its initial value u(nMin). Defining and Editing a Sequence Function To define or edit a sequence function, follow the steps in Chapter 3 for defining a function. The independent variable in a sequence is n. In Seq graphing mode, you can enter the sequence variable in either of two ways. • • Press „. Press y N [N]. You can enter the function name from the keyboard. Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 156 • • • To enter the function name u, press y [u] (above ¬). To enter the function name v, press y [v] (above −). To enter the function name w, press y [w] (above ®). Generally, sequences are either nonrecursive or recursive. Sequences are evaluated only at consecutive integer values. n is always a series of consecutive integers, starting at zero or any positive integer. Nonrecursive Sequences In a nonrecursive sequence, the nth term is a function of the independent variable n. Each term is independent of all other terms. For example, in the nonrecursive sequence below, you can calculate u(5) directly, without first calculating u(1) or any previous term. The sequence equation above returns the sequence 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, … for n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, … .
Note: You may leave blank the initial value u(nMin) when calculating nonrecursive sequences. Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 157 Recursive Sequences In a recursive sequence, the nth term in the sequence is defined in relation to the previous term or the term that precedes the previous term, represented by u(nN1) and u(nN2). A recursive sequence may also be defined in relation to n, as in u(n)=u(nN1)+n. For example, in the sequence below you cannot calculate u(5) without first calculating u(1), u(2), u(3), and u(4). Using an initial value u(nMin) = 1, the sequence above returns 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, ... .
Note: On the TI84 Plus, you must type each character of the terms. For example, to enter u(nN1), press y [u] £ „ ¹ À ¤. Recursive sequences require an initial value or values, since they reference undefined terms. • If each term in the sequence is defined in relation to the previous term, as in u(nN1), you must specify an initial value for the first term. • If each term in the sequence is defined in relation to the term that precedes the previous term, as in u(nN2), you must specify initial values for the first two terms. Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 158 Enter the initial values as a list enclosed in braces ({ }) with commas separating the values. The value of the first term is 0 and the value of the second term is 1 for the sequence
u(n). Setting Window Variables To display the window variables, press p. These variables define the viewing window. The values below are defaults for Seq graphing in both Radian and Degree angle modes. nMin=1 nMax=10 PlotStart=1 PlotStep=1 Xmin=L10
Smallest n value to evaluate Largest n value to evaluate First term number to be plotted Incremental n value (for graphing only) Smallest X value to be displayed Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 159 Xmax=10 Xscl=1 Ymin=L10 Ymax=10 Yscl=1 Largest X value to be displayed Spacing between the X tick marks Smallest Y value to be displayed Largest Y value to be displayed Spacing between the Y tick marks nMin must be an integer  0. nMax, PlotStart, and PlotStep must be integers  1. nMin is the smallest n value to evaluate. nMin also is displayed in the sequence Y= editor. nMax is the largest n value to evaluate. Sequences are evaluated at u(nMin), u(nMin+1), u(nMin+2), ... , u(nMax). PlotStart is the first term to be plotted. PlotStart=1 begins plotting on the first term in the sequence. If you want plotting to begin with the fifth term in a sequence, for example, set
PlotStart=5. The first four terms are evaluated but are not plotted on the graph. PlotStep is the incremental n value for graphing only. PlotStep does not affect sequence evaluation; it only designates which points are plotted on the graph. If you specify
PlotStep=2, the sequence is evaluated at each consecutive integer, but it is plotted on the graph only at every other integer. Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 160 Selecting Axes Combinations
Setting the Graph Format To display the current graph format settings, press y .. Chapter 3 describes the format settings in detail. The other graphing modes share these format settings. The axes setting on the top line of the screen is available only in Seq mode. Time Web uv RectGC CoordOn GridOff AxesOn LableOff ExprOn vw uw Polar GC CoordOff GridOn AxesOff LabelOn ExprOff
Type of sequence plot (axes) Rectangular or polar output Cursor coordinate display on/off Grid display off or on Axes display on or off Axes label display off or on Expression display on or off Setting Setting Axes Format For sequence graphing, you can select from five axes formats. The table below shows the values that are plotted on the xaxis and yaxis for each axes setting.
Axes Setting Time Web xaxis n u(nN1), v(nN1), w(nN1) yaxis u(n), v(n), w(n) u(n), v(n), w(n) Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 161 Axes Setting uv vw uw xaxis u(n) v(n) u(n) yaxis v(n) w(n) w(n) Displaying a Sequence Graph To plot the selected sequence functions, press s. As a graph is plotted, the TI84 Plus updates X, Y, and n. Smart Graph applies to sequence graphs (Chapter 3). Exploring Sequence Graphs
FreeMoving Cursor The freemoving cursor in Seq graphing works the same as in Func graphing. In RectGC format, moving the cursor updates the values of X and Y; if CoordOn format is selected, X and Y are displayed. In PolarGC format, X, Y, R, and q are updated; if CoordOn format is selected, R and q are displayed. TRACE The axes format setting affects TRACE. Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 162 When Time, uv, vw, or uw axes format is selected, TRACE moves the cursor along the sequence one PlotStep increment at a time. To move five plotted points at once, press y ~ or y . • • When you begin a trace, the trace cursor is on the first selected sequence at the term number specified by PlotStart, even if it is outside the viewing window. Quick Zoom applies to all directions. To center the viewing window on the current cursor location after you have moved the trace cursor, pressÍÍ. The trace cursor returns to nMin. In Web format, the trail of the cursor helps identify points with attracting and repelling behavior in the sequence. When you begin a trace, the cursor is on the xaxis at the initial value of the first selected function.
Note: To move the cursor to a specified n during a trace, enter a value for n, and press Í. For example, to quickly return the cursor to the beginning of the sequence, paste nMin to the n= prompt and press Í. Value Moving the Trace Cursor to Any Valid n Value To move the trace cursor to any valid n value on the current function, enter the number. When you enter the first digit, an n= prompt and the number you entered are displayed in the bottomleft corner of the screen. You can enter an expression at the n= prompt. The Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 163 value must be valid for the current viewing window. When you have completed the entry, press Í to move the cursor. ZOOM
ZOOM operations in Seq graphing work the same as in Func graphing. Only the X (Xmin, Xmax, and Xscl) and Y (Ymin, Ymax, and Yscl) window variables are affected. PlotStart, PlotStep, nMin, and nMax are only affected when you select ZStandard. The VARS Zoom secondary menu ZU items 1 through 7 are the ZOOM MEMORY variables for Seq graphing. CALC The only CALC operation available in Seq graphing is value. • • When Time axes format is selected, value displays Y (the u(n) value) for a specified n value. When Web axes format is selected, value draws the web and displays Y (the u(n) value) for a specified n value. Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 164 • When uv, vw, or uw axes format is selected, value displays X and Y according to the axes format setting. For example, for uv axes format, X represents u(n) and Y represents v(n). Evaluating u, v, and w To enter the sequence names u, v, or w, press y [u], [v], or [w]. You can evaluate these names in any of three ways. • • • Calculate the nth value in a sequence. Calculate a list of values in a sequence. Generate a sequence with u(nstart,nstop[,nstep]). nstep is optional; default is 1. Graphing Web Plots
Graphing a Web Plot To select Web axes format, press y . ~ Í. A web plot graphs u(n) versus u(nN1), which you can use to study longterm behavior (convergence, divergence, or oscillation) of a recursive sequence. You can see how the sequence may change behavior as its initial value changes. Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 165 Valid Functions for Web Plots When Web axes format is selected, a sequence will not graph properly or will generate an error. • • • It must be recursive with only one recursion level (u(nN1) but not u(nN2)). It cannot reference n directly. It cannot reference any defined sequence except itself. Displaying the Graph Screen In Web format, press s to display the graph screen. The TI84 Plus: • • Draws a y=x reference line in AxesOn format. Plots the selected sequences with u(nN1) as the independent variable. Note: A potential convergence point occurs whenever a sequence intersects the y=x reference line. However, the sequence may or may not actually converge at that point, depending on the sequence’s initial value. Drawing the Web To activate the trace cursor, press r. The screen displays the sequence and the current n, X, and Y values (X represents u(nN1) and Y represents u(n)). Press ~ repeatedly to draw the web step by step, starting at nMin. In Web format, the trace cursor follows this course. 1. It starts on the xaxis at the initial value u(nMin) (when PlotStart=1). Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 166 2. It moves vertically (up or down) to the sequence. 3. It moves horizontally to the y=x reference line. 4. It repeats this vertical and horizontal movement as you continue to press ~. Using Web Plots to Illustrate Convergence
Example: Convergence 1. Press o in Seq mode to display the sequence Y= editor. Make sure the graph style is set to í (dot), and then define nMin, u(n) and u(nMin) as shown below. 2. Press y . Í to set Time axes format. 3. Press p and set the variables as shown below.
nMin=1 nMax=25 PlotStart=1 PlotStep=1 Xmin=0 Xmax=25 Xscl=1 Ymin=L10 Ymax=10 Yscl=1 4. Press s to graph the sequence. Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 167 5. Press y . and select the Web axes setting. 6. Press p and change the variables below.
Xmin=L10 Xmax=10 7. Press s to graph the sequence. 8. Press r, and then press ~ to draw the web. The displayed cursor coordinates n, X (u(nN1)), and Y (u(n)) change accordingly. When you press ~, a new n value is displayed, and the trace cursor is on the sequence. When you press ~ again, the n value remains the same, and the cursor moves to the y=x reference line. This pattern repeats as you trace the web. Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 168 Graphing Phase Plots
Graphing with uv, vw, and uw The phaseplot axes settings uv, vw, and uw show relationships between two sequences. To select a phaseplot axes setting, press y ., press ~ until the cursor is on uv, vw, or uw, and then press Í.
Axes Setting uv vw uw xaxis u(n) v(n) u(n) yaxis v(n) w(n) w(n) Example: PredatorPrey Model Use the predatorprey model to determine the regional populations of a predator and its prey that would maintain population equilibrium for the two species. This example uses the model to determine the equilibrium populations of foxes and rabbits, with initial populations of 200 rabbits (u(nMin)) and 50 foxes (v(nMin)). These are the variables (given values are in parentheses):
R M K = = = number of rabbits rabbit population growth rate without foxes rabbit population death rate with foxes (.05) (.001) Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 169 W G D n Rn Wn = = = = = = number of foxes fox population growth rate with rabbits fox population death rate without rabbits time (in months) R nN1(1+M NKW nN1) W nN1(1+GR nN1ND) (.0002) (.03) 1. Press o in Seq mode to display the sequence Y= editor. Define the sequences and initial values for Rn and Wn as shown below. Enter the sequence Rn as u(n) and enter the sequence Wn as v(n). 2. Press y . Í to select Time axes format. Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 170 3. Press p and set the variables as shown below.
nMin=0 nMax=400 PlotStart=1 PlotStep=1 Xmin=0 Xmax=400 Xscl=100 Ymin=0 Ymax=300 Yscl=100 4. Press s to graph the sequence. 5. Press r ~ to individually trace the number of rabbits (u(n)) and foxes (v(n)) over time (n).
Note: Press a number, and then press Í to jump to a specific n value (month) while in TRACE. 6. Press y . ~ ~ Í to select uv axes format. Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 171 7. Press p and change these variables as shown below.
Xmin=84 Xmax=237 Xscl=50 Ymin=25 Ymax=75 Yscl=10 8. Press r. Trace both the number of rabbits (X) and the number of foxes (Y) through 400 generations.
Note: When you press r, the equation for u is displayed in the topleft corner. Press } or † to see the equation for v. Comparing TI84 Plus and TI82 Sequence Variables
Sequences and Window Variables Refer to the table if you are familiar with the TI82. It shows TI84 Plus sequences and sequence window variables, as well as their TI82 counterparts.
TI84 Plus In the Y= editor: u(n) u(nMin) Un UnStart (window variable) TI82 Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 172 TI84 Plus v(n) v(nMin) w(n) w(nMin) In the window editor: nMin nMax PlotStart PlotStep TI82 Vn VnStart (window variable) not available not available nStart nMax nMin not available Keystroke Differences Between TI84 Plus and TI82
Sequence Keystroke Changes Refer to the table if you are familiar with the TI82. It compares TI84 Plus sequencename syntax and variable syntax with TI82 sequencename syntax and variable syntax.
TI84 Plus / TI82 n/n u(n) / Un On TI84 Plus, press: On TI82, press: „ y [u] £„¤ yô y ó ¶¦À Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 173 TI84 Plus / TI82 v(n) / Vn w(n) u(nN1) / UnN1 v(nN1) / VnN1 w(nN1) On TI84 Plus, press: On TI82, press: y [v] £„¤ y [w] £„¤ y [u] £„¹À¤ y [v] £„¹À¤ y [w] £„¹À¤ y ó ¶¦Á
not available yõ yö
not available Chapter 6: Sequence Graphing 174 Chapter 7: Tables
Getting Started: Roots of a Function
Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. Evaluate the function Y = X3 N 2X at each integer between L10 and 10. How many sign changes occur, and at what X values? 1. Press z † † † Í to set Func graphing mode. 2. Press o. Press „ 3 to select 3. Then press ¹ 2 „ to enter the function Y1=X3N2X. 3. Press y  to display the TABLE SETUP screen. Press Ì 10 Í to set TblStart=L10. Press 1 Í to set @Tbl=1. Chapter 7: Tables 175 Press Í to select Indpnt: Auto (automatically generated independent values). Press † Í to select Depend: Auto (automatically generated dependent values). 4. Press y 0 to display the table screen. 5. Press † until you see the sign changes in the value of Y1. How many sign changes occur, and at what X values? Setting Up the Table
TABLE SETUP Screen To display the TABLE SETUP screen, press y . Chapter 7: Tables 176 TblStart, @Tbl
TblStart (table start) defines the initial value for the independent variable. TblStart applies only when the independent variable is generated automatically (when Indpnt: Auto is selected). @Tbl (table step) defines the increment for the independent variable.
Note: In Seq mode, both TblStart and @Tbl must be integers. Indpnt: Auto, Indpnt: Ask, Depend: Auto, Depend: Ask
Selections Indpnt: Auto Depend: Auto Indpnt: Ask Depend: Auto Indpnt: Auto Depend: Ask Indpnt: Ask Depend: Ask Table Characteristics Values are displayed automatically in both the independentvariable column and in all dependentvariable columns. The table is empty; when you enter a value for the independent variable, all corresponding dependentvariable values are calculated and displayed automatically. Values are displayed automatically for the independent variable; to generate a value for a dependent variable, move the cursor to that cell and press Í. The table is empty; enter values for the independent variable; to generate a value for a dependent variable, move the cursor to that cell and press Í. Chapter 7: Tables 177 Setting Up the Table from the Home Screen or a Program To store a value to TblStart, @Tbl, or TbYZnput from the home screen or a program, select the variable name from the VARS TABLE secondary menu. TblZnput is a list of independentvariable values in the current table. When you press y  in the program editor, you can select IndpntAuto, IndpntAsk, DependAuto, and DependAsk. Defining the Dependent Variables
Defining Dependent Variables from the Y= Editor In the Y= editor, enter the functions that define the dependent variables. Only functions that are selected in the Y= editor are displayed in the table. The current graphing mode is used. In Par mode, you must define both components of each parametric equation (Chapter 4). Editing Dependent Variables from the Table Editor To edit a selected Y= function from the table editor, follow these steps. 1. Press y 0 to display the table, then press ~ or  to move the cursor to a dependentvariable column. 2. Press } until the cursor is on the function name at the top of the column. The function is displayed on the bottom line. Chapter 7: Tables 178 3. Press Í. The cursor moves to the bottom line. Edit the function. 4. Press Í or †. The new values are calculated. The table and the Y= function are updated automatically. Note: You also can use this feature to view the function that defines a dependent variable without having to leave the table. Chapter 7: Tables 179 Displaying the Table
The Table To display the table, press y 0.
Note: The table abbreviates the values, if necessary. Current cell Independentvariable values in the first column Dependentvariable values in the second and third columns Current cell’s full value Independent and Dependent Variables The current graphing mode determines which independent and dependent variables are displayed in the table (Chapter 1). In the table above, for example, the independent Chapter 7: Tables 180 variable X and the dependent variables Y1 and Y2 are displayed because Func graphing mode is set.
Independent Variable Graphing Mode Func (function) Par (parametric) Pol (polar) Seq (sequence) X T Dependent Variable Y1 through Y9, and Y0 X1T/Y1T through X6T/Y6T r1 through r6 u(n), v(n), and w(n) q
n Clearing the Table from the Home Screen or a Program From the home screen, select the ClrTable instruction from the CATALOG. To clear the table, press Í. From a program, select 9:ClrTable from the PRGM I/O menu or from the CATALOG. The table is cleared upon execution. If IndpntAsk is selected, all independent and dependent variable values on the table are cleared. If DependAsk is selected, all dependent variable values on the table are cleared. Scrolling IndependentVariable Values If Indpnt: Auto is selected, you can press } and † in the independentvariable column to display more values. As you scroll the column, the corresponding dependentvariable Chapter 7: Tables 181 values also are displayed. All dependentvariable values may not be displayed if Depend: Ask is selected. Note: You can scroll back from the value entered for TblStart. As you scroll, TblStart is updated automatically to the value shown on the top line of the table. In the example above, TblStart=0 and @Tbl=1 generates and displays values of X=0, …, 6; but you can press } to scroll back and display the table for X=M1, …, 5. Displaying Other Dependent Variables If you have defined more than two dependent variables, the first two selected Y= functions are displayed initially. Press ~ or  to display dependent variables defined by other selected Y= functions. The independent variable always remains in the left column, except during a trace with Par graphing mode and GT splitscreen mode set. Chapter 7: Tables 182 Note: To simultaneously display two dependent variables on the table that are not defined as consecutive Y= functions, go to the Y= editor and deselect the Y= functions between the two you want to display. For example, to simultaneously display Y4 and Y7 on the table, go to the Y= editor and deselect Y5 and Y6. Chapter 7: Tables 183 Chapter 8: Draw Instructions
Getting Started: Drawing a Tangent Line
Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. 2 Suppose you want to find the equation of the tangent line at X =  for the function 2 Y=sin(X). Before you begin, select Radian and Func mode from the mode screen, if necessary. 1. Press o to display the Y= editor. Press ˜ „ ¤ to store sin(X) in Y1. 2. Press q 7 to select 7:ZTrig, which graphs the equation in the Zoom Trig window. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 184 3. Press y < 5 to select 5:Tangent(. The tangent instruction is initiated. 4. Press y C 2 ¤ ¥ 2. 5. Press Í. The tangent line is drawn; the X value and the tangentline equation are displayed on the graph. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 185 Using the DRAW Menu
DRAW Menu To display the DRAW menu, press y <. The TI84 Plus’s interpretation of these instructions depends on whether you accessed the menu from the home screen or the program editor or directly from a graph. DRAW POINTS STO
Clears all drawn elements. Draws a line segment between 2 points. Draws a horizontal line. Draws a vertical line. Draws a line segment tangent to a function. Draws a function. Shades an area between two functions. Draws the inverse of a function. Draws a circle. Draws text on a graph screen. Activates the freeform drawing tool. 1: ClrDraw 2: Line( 3: Horizontal 4: Vertical 5: Tangent( 6: DrawF 7: Shade( 8: DrawInv 9: Circle( 0: Text( A: Pen Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 186 Before Drawing on a Graph The DRAW instructions draw on top of graphs. Therefore, before you use the DRAW instructions, consider whether you want to perform one or more of the following actions. • • • • • • • Change the mode settings on the mode screen. Change the format settings on the format screen. Enter or edit functions in the Y= editor. Select or deselect functions in the Y= editor. Change the window variable values. Turn stat plots on or off. Clear existing drawings with ClrDraw. Note: If you draw on a graph and then perform any of the actions listed above, the graph is replotted without the drawings when you display the graph again. Drawing on a Graph You can use any DRAW menu instructions except DrawInv to draw on Func, Par, Pol, and Seq graphs. DrawInv is valid only in Func graphing. The coordinates for all DRAW instructions are the display’s xcoordinate and ycoordinate values. You can use most DRAW menu and DRAW POINTS menu instructions to draw directly on a graph, using the cursor to identify the coordinates. You also can execute these instructions from the home screen or from within a program. If a graph is not displayed when you select a DRAW menu instruction, the home screen is displayed. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 187 Clearing Drawings
Clearing Drawings When a Graph Is Displayed All points, lines, and shading drawn on a graph with DRAW instructions are temporary. To clear drawings from the currently displayed graph, select 1:ClrDraw from the DRAW menu. The current graph is replotted and displayed with no drawn elements. Clearing Drawings from the Home Screen or a Program To clear drawings on a graph from the home screen or a program, begin on a blank line on the home screen or in the program editor. Select 1:ClrDraw from the DRAW menu. The instruction is copied to the cursor location. Press Í. When ClrDraw is executed, it clears all drawings from the current graph and displays the message Done. When you display the graph again, all drawn points, lines, circles, and shaded areas will be gone. Note: Before you clear drawings, you can store them with StorePic. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 188 Drawing Line Segments
Drawing a Line Segment Directly on a Graph To draw a line segment when a graph is displayed, follow these steps. 1. Select 2:Line( from the DRAW menu. 2. Place the cursor on the point where you want the line segment to begin, and then press Í. 3. Move the cursor to the point where you want the line segment to end. The line is displayed as you move the cursor. Press Í. To continue drawing line segments, repeat steps 2 and 3. To cancel Line(, press ‘. Drawing a Line Segment from the Home Screen or a Program
Line( also draws a line segment between the coordinates (X1,Y1) and (X2,Y2). The values may be entered as expressions. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 189 Line(X1,Y1,X2,Y2) To erase a line segment, enter Line(X1,Y1,X2,Y2,0) Drawing Horizontal and Vertical Lines
Drawing a Line Directly on a Graph To draw a horizontal or vertical line when a graph is displayed, follow these steps. 1. Select 3:Horizontal or 4:Vertical from the DRAW menu. A line is displayed that moves as you move the cursor. 2. Place the cursor on the ycoordinate (for horizontal lines) or xcoordinate (for vertical lines) through which you want the drawn line to pass. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 190 3. Press Í to draw the line on the graph. To continue drawing lines, repeat steps 2 and 3. To cancel Horizontal or Vertical, press ‘. Drawing a Line from the Home Screen or a Program
Horizontal (horizontal line) draws a horizontal line at Y=y. y can be an expression but not a list.
Horizontal y Vertical (vertical line) draws a vertical line at X=x. x can be an expression but not a list. Vertical x To instruct the TI84 Plus to draw more than one horizontal or vertical line, separate each instruction with a colon ( : ). Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 191 Drawing Tangent Lines
Drawing a Tangent Line Directly on a Graph To draw a tangent line when a graph is displayed, follow these steps. 1. Select 5:Tangent( from the DRAW menu. 2. Press † and } to move the cursor to the function for which you want to draw the tangent line. The current graph’s Y= function is displayed in the topleft corner, if ExprOn is selected. 3. Press ~ and  or enter a number to select the point on the function at which you want to draw the tangent line. 4. Press Í. In Func mode, the X value at which the tangent line was drawn is displayed on the bottom of the screen, along with the equation of the tangent line. In all other modes, the dy/dx value is displayed.
Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 192 Note: Change the fixed decimal setting on the mode screen if you want to see fewer digits displayed for X and the equation for Y. Drawing a Tangent Line from the Home Screen or a Program
Tangent( (tangent line) draws a line tangent to expression in terms of X, such as Y1 or X2, at point X=value. X can be an expression. expression is interpreted as being in Func mode. Tangent(expression,value) Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 193 Drawing Functions and Inverses
Drawing a Function
DrawF (draw function) draws expression as a function in terms of X on the current graph. When you select 6:DrawF from the DRAW menu, the TI84 Plus returns to the home screen or the program editor. DrawF is not interactive. DrawF expression Note: You cannot use a list in expression to draw a family of curves. Drawing an Inverse of a Function
DrawInv (draw inverse) draws the inverse of expression by plotting X values on the yaxis and Y values on the xaxis. When you select 8:DrawInv from the DRAW menu, the TI84 Plus returns to the home screen or the program editor. DrawInv is not interactive. DrawInv works in Func mode only. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 194 DrawInv expression Note: You cannot use a list in expression to draw a family of curves. Shading Areas on a Graph
Shading a Graph To shade an area on a graph, select 7:Shade( from the DRAW menu. The instruction is pasted to the home screen or to the program editor.
Shade( draws lowerfunc and upperfunc in terms of X on the current graph and shades the area that is specifically above lowerfunc and below upperfunc. Only the areas where lowerfunc < upperfunc are shaded. Xleft and Xright, if included, specify left and right boundaries for the shading. Xleft and Xright must be numbers between Xmin and Xmax, which are the defaults. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 195 pattern specifies one of four shading patterns. pattern=1 pattern=2 pattern=3 pattern=4 vertical (default) horizontal negative—slope 45¡ positive—slope 45¡ patres specifies one of eight shading resolutions. patres=1 patres=2 patres=3 patres=4 patres=5 patres=6 patres=7 patres=8 shades every pixel (default) shades every second pixel shades every third pixel shades every fourth pixel shades every fifth pixel shades every sixth pixel shades every seventh pixel shades every eighth pixel Shade(lowerfunc,upperfunc[,Xleft,Xright,pattern,patres]) Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 196 Drawing Circles
Drawing a Circle Directly on a Graph To draw a circle directly on a displayed graph using the cursor, follow these steps. 1. Select 9:Circle( from the DRAW menu. 2. Place the cursor at the center of the circle you want to draw. Press Í. 3. Move the cursor to a point on the circumference. Press Í to draw the circle on the graph. Note: This circle is displayed as circular, regardless of the window variable values, because you drew it directly on the display. When you use the Circle( instruction from the home screen or a program, the current window variables may distort the shape. To continue drawing circles, repeat steps 2 and 3. To cancel Circle(, press ‘. Drawing a Circle from the Home Screen or a Program
Circle( draws a circle with center (X,Y) and radius. These values can be expressions. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 197 Circle(X,Y,radius) Note: When you use Circle( on the home screen or from a program, the current window values may distort the drawn circle. Use ZSquare (Chapter 3) before drawing the circle to adjust the window variables and make the circle circular. Placing Text on a Graph
Placing Text Directly on a Graph To place text on a graph when the graph is displayed, follow these steps. 1. Select 0:Text( from the DRAW menu. 2. Place the cursor where you want the text to begin. 3. Enter the characters. Press ƒ or y 7 to enter letters and q. You may enter TI84 Plus functions, variables, and instructions. The font is proportional, so the exact number of characters you can place on the graph varies. As you type, the characters are placed on top of the graph. To cancel Text(, press ‘. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 198 Placing Text on a Graph from the Home Screen or a Program
Text( places on the current graph the characters comprising value, which can include TI84 Plus functions and instructions. The topleft corner of the first character is at pixel (row,column), where row is an integer between 0 and 57 and column is an integer between 0 and 94. Both row and column can be expressions. Text(row,column,value,value…) value can be text enclosed in quotation marks ( " ), or it can be an expression. The TI84 Plus will evaluate an expression and display the result with up to 10 characters. Split Screen On a Horiz split screen, the maximum value for row is 25. On a GT split screen, the maximum value for row is 45, and the maximum value for column is 46. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 199 Using Pen to Draw on a Graph
Using Pen to Draw on a Graph
Pen draws directly on a graph only. You cannot execute Pen from the home screen or a program. To draw on a displayed graph, follow these steps. 1. Select A:Pen from the DRAW menu. 2. Place the cursor on the point where you want to begin drawing. Press Í to turn on the pen. 3. Move the cursor. As you move the cursor, you draw on the graph, shading one pixel at a time. 4. Press Í to turn off the pen. For example, Pen was used to create the arrow pointing to the local minimum of the selected function.
Note: To continue drawing on the graph, move the cursor to a new position where you want to begin drawing again, and then repeat steps 2, 3, and 4. To cancel Pen, press ‘. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 200 Drawing Points on a Graph
DRAW POINTS Menu To display the DRAW POINTS menu, press y < ~. The TI84 Plus’s interpretation of these instructions depends on whether you accessed this menu from the home screen or the program editor or directly from a graph. DRAW POINTS STO
Turns on a point. Turns off a point. Toggles a point on or off. Turns on a pixel. Turns off a pixel. Toggles a pixel on or off. Returns 1 if pixel on, 0 if pixel off. 1: PtOn( 2: PtOff( 3: PtChange( 4: PxlOn( 5: PxlOff( 6: PxlChange( 7: pxlTest( Drawing Points Directly on a Graph with PtOn( To draw a point on a graph, follow these steps. 1. Select 1:PtOn( from the DRAW POINTS menu. 2. Move the cursor to the position where you want to draw the point. 3. Press Í to draw the point. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 201 To continue drawing points, repeat steps 2 and 3. To cancel PtOn(, press ‘. PtErasing Points with PtOff( To erase (turn off) a drawn point on a graph, follow these steps. 1. Select 2:PtOff( (point off) from the DRAW POINTS menu. 2. Move the cursor to the point you want to erase. 3. Press Í to erase the point. To continue erasing points, repeat steps 2 and 3. To cancel PtOff(, press ‘. PtChanging Points with PtChange( To change (toggle on or off) a point on a graph, follow these steps. 1. Select 3:PtChange( (point change) from the DRAW POINTS menu. 2. Move the cursor to the point you want to change. 3. Press Í to change the point’s on/off status. To continue changing points, repeat steps 2 and 3. To cancel PtChange(, press ‘. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 202 Drawing Points from the Home Screen or a Program
PtOn( (point on) turns on the point at (X=x,Y=y). PtOff( turns the point off. PtChange( toggles the point on or off. mark is optional; it determines the point’s appearance; specify 1, 2, or 3, where: 1 = ¦ (dot; default) PtOn(x,y[,mark]) PtOff(x,y[,mark]) PtChange(x,y) 2 = › (box) 3 = + (cross) Note: If you specified mark to turn on a point with PtOn(, you must specify mark when you turn off the point with PtOff(. PtChange( does not have the mark option. Drawing Pixels
TI84 Plus Pixels A pixel is a square dot on the TI84 Plus display. The Pxl (pixel) instructions let you turn on, turn off, or reverse a pixel (dot) on the graph using the cursor. When you select a pixel instruction from the DRAW POINTS menu, the TI84 Plus returns to the home screen or the program editor. The pixel instructions are not interactive.
Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 203 PxlPxlTurning On and Off Pixels with PxlOn( and PxlOff(
PxlOn( (pixel on) turns on the pixel at (row,column), where row is an integer between 0 and 62 and column is an integer between 0 and 94. PxlOff( turns the pixel off. PxlChange( toggles the pixel on and off. PxlOn(row,column) PxlOff(row,column) PxlChange(row,column) pxlUsing pxlTest(
pxlTest( (pixel test) returns 1 if the pixel at (row,column) is turned on or 0 if the pixel is turned off on the current graph. row must be an integer between 0 and 62. column must be an integer between 0 and 94. pxlTest(row,column) Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 204 Split Screen On a Horiz split screen, the maximum value for row is 30 for PxlOn(, PxlOff(, PxlChange(, and pxlTest(. On a GT split screen, the maximum value for row is 50 and the maximum value for column is 46 for PxlOn(, PxlOff(, PxlChange(, and pxlTest(. Storing Graph Pictures (Pic)
DRAW STO Menu To display the DRAW STO menu, press y < . When you select an instruction from the DRAW STO menu, the TI84 Plus returns to the home screen or the program editor. The picture and graph database instructions are not interactive. DRAW POINTS 1: StorePic 2: RecallPic 3: StoreGDB 4: RecallGDB STO
Stores the current picture. Recalls a saved picture. Stores the current graph database. Recalls a saved graph database. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 205 Storing a Graph Picture You can store up to 10 graph pictures, each of which is an image of the current graph display, in picture variables Pic1 through Pic9, or Pic0. Later, you can superimpose the stored picture onto a displayed graph from the home screen or a program. A picture includes drawn elements, plotted functions, axes, and tick marks. The picture does not include axes labels, lower and upper bound indicators, prompts, or cursor coordinates. Any parts of the display hidden by these items are stored with the picture. To store a graph picture, follow these steps. 1. Select 1:StorePic from the DRAW STO menu. StorePic is pasted to the current cursor location. 2. Enter the number (from 1 to 9, or 0) of the picture variable to which you want to store the picture. For example, if you enter 3, the TI84 Plus will store the picture to Pic3. Note: You also can select a variable from the PICTURE secondary menu ( 4). The variable is pasted next to StorePic. 3. Press Í to display the current graph and store the picture. Recalling Graph Pictures (Pic)
Recalling a Graph Picture To recall a graph picture, follow these steps.
Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 206 1. Select 2:RecallPic from the DRAW STO menu. RecallPic is pasted to the current cursor location. 2. Enter the number (from 1 to 9, or 0) of the picture variable from which you want to recall a picture. For example, if you enter 3, the TI84 Plus will recall the picture stored to Pic3. Note: You also can select a variable from the PICTURE secondary menu ( 4). The variable is pasted next to RecallPic. 3. Press Í to display the current graph with the picture superimposed on it.
Note: Pictures are drawings. You cannot trace a curve that is part of a picture. Deleting a Graph Picture To delete graph pictures from memory, use the MEMORY MANAGEMENT/DELETE secondary menu (Chapter 18). Storing Graph Databases (GDB)
What Is a Graph Database? A graph database (GDB) contains the set of elements that defines a particular graph. You can recreate the graph from these elements. You can store up to 10 GDBs in variables GDB1 through GDB9, or GDB0 and recall them to recreate graphs. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 207 A GDB stores five elements of a graph. • • • • • Graphing mode Window variables Format settings All functions in the Y= editor and the selection status of each Graph style for each Y= function GDBs do not contain drawn items or stat plot definitions. Storing a Graph Database To store a graph database, follow these steps. 1. Select 3:StoreGDB from the DRAW STO menu. StoreGDB is pasted to the current cursor location. 2. Enter the number (from 1 to 9, or 0) of the GDB variable to which you want to store the graph database. For example, if you enter 7, the TI84 Plus will store the GDB to GDB7. Note: You also can select a variable from the GDB secondary menu ( 3). The variable is pasted next to StoreGDB. 3. Press Í to store the current database to the specified GDB variable. Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 208 Recalling Graph Databases (GDB)
Recalling a Graph Database
CAUTION: When you recall a GDB, it replaces all existing Y= functions. Consider storing the current Y= functions to another database before recalling a stored GDB. To recall a graph database, follow these steps. 1. Select 4:RecallGDB from the DRAW STO menu. RecallGDB is pasted to the current cursor location. 2. Enter the number (from 1 to 9, or 0) of the GDB variable from which you want to recall a GDB. For example, if you enter 7, the TI84 Plus will recall the GDB stored to GDB7. Note: You also can select a variable from the GDB secondary menu ( 3). The variable is pasted next to RecallGDB. 3. Press Í to replace the current GDB with the recalled GDB. The new graph is not plotted. The TI84 Plus changes the graphing mode automatically, if necessary. Deleting a Graph Database To delete a GDB from memory, use the MEMORY MANAGEMENT/DELETE secondary menu (Chapter 18). Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 209 Chapter 8: Draw Instructions 210 Chapter 9: Split Screen
Getting Started: Exploring the Unit Circle
Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. Use GT (graphtable) splitscreen mode to explore the unit circle and its relationship to the numeric values for the commonly used trigonometric angles of 0¡ 30¡, 45¡, 60¡, 90¡, and so on. 1. Press z to display the mode screen. Press † † ~ Í to select Degree mode. Press † ~ Í to select Par (parametric) graphing mode. Press † † † † ~ ~ Í to select GT (graphtable) splitscreen mode. 2. Press y . to display the format screen. Press † † † † † ~ Í to select ExprOff. Chapter 9: Split Screen 211 3. Press o to display the Y= editor for Par graphing mode. Press ™ „ ¤ Í to store cos(T) to X1T. Press ÷ ˜ „ ¤ Í to store sin(T) to Y1T. 4. Press p to display the window editor. Enter these values for the window variables.
Tmin=0 Xmin=L2.3 Tmax=360 Xmax=2.3 Tstep=15 Xscl=1 Ymin=L2.5 Ymax=2.5 Yscl=1 5. Press r. On the left, the unit circle is graphed parametrically in Degree mode and the trace cursor is activated. When T=0 (from the graph trace coordinates), you can see from the table on the right that the value of X1T (cos(T)) is 1 and Y1T (sin(T)) is 0. Press ~ to move the cursor to the next 15¡ angle increment. As you trace around the circle in steps of 15¡, an approximation of the standard value for each angle is highlighted in the table. 6. Press y  and change Indpnt to Ask. 7. Press y 0 to make the table portion of the split screen active. Press † or } to highlight a value you want to edit, and then enter a new value directly in the table to overwrite the previous value. Chapter 9: Split Screen 212 Using Split Screen
Setting a SplitScreen Mode To set a splitscreen mode, press z, and then move the cursor to the nexttolast line on the mode screen. • • Select Horiz (horizontal) to display the graph screen and another screen split horizontally. Select GT (graphtable) to display the graph screen and table screen split vertically. $ $ The split screen is activated when you press any key that applies to either half of the split screen. Chapter 9: Split Screen 213 If stat plots are turned on, the plots are shown along with the xy plots in graphs. Press y 0 to make the table portion of the split screen active and to display the list data. Press † or } to highlight a value you want to edit, and then enter a new value directly in the table to overwrite the previous value. Press ~ repeatedly to display each column of data (both table and list data). Splitscreen display with both xy plots and stat plots Some screens are never displayed as split screens. For example, if you press z in Horiz or GT mode, the mode screen is displayed as a full screen. If you then press a key that displays either half of a split screen, such as r, the split screen returns. When you press a key or key combination in either Horiz or GT mode, the cursor is placed in the half of the display for which that key applies. For example, if you press r, the cursor is placed in the half in which the graph is displayed. If you press y 0, the cursor is placed in the half in which the table is displayed. The TI84 Plus will remain in splitscreen mode until you change back to Full screen mode. Chapter 9: Split Screen 214 Horiz (Horizontal) Split Screen
Horiz Mode In Horiz (horizontal) splitscreen mode, a horizontal line splits the screen into top and bottom halves. The top half displays the graph. The bottom half displays any of these editors. • • • • • Home screen (four lines) Y= editor (four lines) Stat list editor (two rows) Window editor (three settings) Table editor (two rows) Moving from Half to Half in Horiz Mode To use the top half of the split screen: Chapter 9: Split Screen 215 • • Press s or r. Select a ZOOM or CALC operation. To use the bottom half of the split screen: • • • • • Press any key or key combination that displays the home screen. Press o (Y= editor). Press … Í (stat list editor). Press p (window editor). Press y 0 (table editor). Full Screens in Horiz Mode All other screens are displayed as full screens in Horiz splitscreen mode. To return to the Horiz split screen from a full screen when in Horiz mode, press any key or key combination that displays the graph, home screen, Y= editor, stat list editor, window editor, or table editor. GT (GraphTable) Split Screen
GT Mode In GT (graphtable) splitscreen mode, a vertical line splits the screen into left and right halves. Chapter 9: Split Screen 216 The left half displays all active graphs and plots. The right half displays either table data corresponding to the graph at the left or list data corresponding to the plot at the left. Moving from Half to Half in GT Mode To use the left half of the split screen: • • Press s or r. Select a ZOOM or CALC operation. To use the right half of the split screen, press y 0. If the values at the right are list data, these values can be edited similarly to using the Stat List Editor. Using Using TRACE in GT Mode As you press  or ~ to move the trace cursor along a graph in the split screen’s left half in GT mode, the table on the right half automatically scrolls to match the current cursor values. If more than one graph or plot is active, you can press } or † to select a different graph or plot. Chapter 9: Split Screen 217 Note: When you trace in Par graphing mode, both components of an equation (XnT and YnT) are displayed in the two columns of the table. As you trace, the current value of the independent variable T is displayed on the graph. Full Screens in GT Mode All screens other than the graph and the table are displayed as full screens in GT splitscreen mode. To return to the GT split screen from a full screen when in GT mode, press any key or key combination that displays the graph or the table. TI84 Plus Pixels in Horiz and GT Modes
TI84 Plus Pixels in Horiz and GT Modes Chapter 9: Split Screen 218 Note: Each set of numbers in parentheses above represents the row and column of a corner pixel, which is turned on. DRAW POINTS Menu Pixel Instructions For PxlOn(, PxlOff(, PxlChange(, and pxlTest(: • • In Horiz mode, row must be {30; column must be {94. In GT mode, row must be {50; column must be {46. PxlOn(row,column) DRAW Menu Text( Instruction For the Text( instruction: • • In Horiz mode, row must be {25; column must be {94. In GT mode, row must be {45; column must be {46. Text(row,column,"text") PRGM I/O Menu Output( Instruction For the Output( instruction: • • In Horiz mode, row must be {4; column must be {16. In GT mode, row must be {8; column must be {16. Chapter 9: Split Screen 219 Output(row,column,"text") Note: The Output( instruction can only be used within a program. Setting a SplitScreen Mode from the Home Screen or a Program To set Horiz or GT from a program, follow these steps. 1. Press z while the cursor is on a blank line in the program editor. 2. Select Horiz or GT. The instruction is pasted to the cursor location. The mode is set when the instruction is encountered during program execution. It remains in effect after execution.
Note: You also can paste Horiz or GT to the home screen or program editor from the CATALOG (Chapter 15). Chapter 9: Split Screen 220 Chapter 10: Matrices
Getting Started: Systems of Linear Equations
Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. Find the solution of X + 2Y + 3Z = 3 and 2X + 3Y + 4Z = 3. On the TI84 Plus, you can solve a system of linear equations by entering the coefficients as elements in a matrix, and then using rref( to obtain the reduced rowechelon form. 1. Press y . Press ~ ~ to display the MATRX EDIT menu. Press 1 to select 1: [A]. 2. Press 2 Í 4 Í to define a 2×4 matrix. The rectangular cursor indicates the current element. Ellipses (...) indicate additional columns beyond the screen. 3. Press 1 Í to enter the first element. The rectangular cursor moves to the second column of the first row. Chapter 10: Matrices 221 4. Press 2 Í 3 Í 3 Í to complete the first row for X + 2Y + 3Z = 3. 5. Press 2 Í 3 Í 4 Í 3 Í to enter the second row for 2X + 3Y + 4Z = 3. 6. Press y 5 to return to the home screen. If necessary, press ‘ to clear the home screen. Press y ~ to display the MATRX MATH menu. Press } to wrap to the end of the menu. Select B:rref( to copy rref( to the home screen. 7. Press y 1 to select 1: [A] from the MATRX NAMES menu. Press ¤ Í. The reduced rowechelon form of the matrix is displayed and stored in Ans. 1X N 1Z = L3 1Y + 2Z = 3 therefore therefore X = L3 + Z Y = 3 N 2Z Defining a Matrix
What Is a Matrix? A matrix is a twodimensional array. You can display, define, or edit a matrix in the matrix editor. The TI84 Plus has 10 matrix variables, [A] through [J]. You can define a matrix directly in an expression. A matrix, depending on available memory, may have up to 99 rows or columns. You can store only real numbers in TI84 Plus matrices. Chapter 10: Matrices 222 Selecting a Matrix Before you can define or display a matrix in the editor, you first must select the matrix name. To do so, follow these steps. 1. Press y  to display the MATRX EDIT menu. The dimensions of any previously defined matrices are displayed. 2. Select the matrix you want to define. The MATRX EDIT screen is displayed. Accepting or Changing Matrix Dimensions The dimensions of the matrix (row × column) are displayed on the top line. The dimensions of a new matrix are 1 × 1. You must accept or change the dimensions each time you edit a matrix. When you select a matrix to define, the cursor highlights the row dimension. • • To accept the row dimension, press Í. To change the row dimension, enter the number of rows (up to 99), and then press Í. Chapter 10: Matrices 223 The cursor moves to the column dimension, which you must accept or change the same way you accepted or changed the row dimension. When you press Í, the rectangular cursor moves to the first matrix element. Viewing and Editing Matrix Elements
Displaying Matrix Elements After you have set the dimensions of the matrix, you can view the matrix and enter values for the matrix elements. In a new matrix, all values are zero. Select the matrix from the MATRX EDIT menu and enter or accept the dimensions. The center portion of the matrix editor displays up to seven rows and three columns of a matrix, showing the values of the elements in abbreviated form if necessary. The full value of the current element, which is indicated by the rectangular cursor, is displayed on the bottom line. This is an 8 × 4 matrix. Ellipses in the left or right column indicate additional columns. # or $ in the right column indicate additional rows. Chapter 10: Matrices 224 Deleting a Matrix To delete matrices from memory, use the MEMORY MANAGEMENT/DELETE secondary menu (Chapter 18). Viewing a Matrix The matrix editor has two contexts, viewing and editing. In viewing context, you can use the cursor keys to move quickly from one matrix element to the next. The full value of the highlighted element is displayed on the bottom line. Select the matrix from the MATRX EDIT menu, and then enter or accept the dimensions. ViewingContext Keys
Key Function Moves the rectangular cursor within the current row Moves the rectangular cursor within the current column; on the top row, } moves the cursor to the column dimension; on the column dimension, } moves the cursor to the row dimension  or ~ † or } Chapter 10: Matrices 225 Key Function Switches to editing context; activates the edit cursor on the bottom line Switches to editing context; clears the value on the bottom line Switches to editing context; clears the value on the bottom line; copies the character to the bottom line Nothing Nothing Í ‘
Any entry character y6 { Editing a Matrix Element In editing context, an edit cursor is active on the bottom line. To edit a matrix element value, follow these steps. 1. Select the matrix from the MATRX EDIT menu, and then enter or accept the dimensions. 2. Press , }, ~, and † to move the cursor to the matrix element you want to change. 3. Switch to editing context by pressing Í, ‘, or an entry key. 4. Change the value of the matrix element using the editingcontext keys described below. You may enter an expression, which is evaluated when you leave editing context.
Note: You can press ‘ Í to restore the value at the rectangular cursor if you make a mistake. Chapter 10: Matrices 226 5. Press Í, }, or † to move to another element. EditingContext Keys
Key Function Moves the edit cursor within the value Stores the value displayed on the bottom line to the matrix element; switches to viewing context and moves the rectangular cursor within the column Stores the value displayed on the bottom line to the matrix element; switches to viewing context and moves the rectangular cursor to the next row element Clears the value on the bottom line Copies the character to the location of the edit cursor on the bottom line Activates the insert cursor Deletes the character under the edit cursor on the bottom line  or ~ † or } Í ‘
Any entry character y6 { Chapter 10: Matrices 227 Using Matrices with Expressions
Using a Matrix in an Expression To use a matrix in an expression, you can do any of the following. • • • Copy the name from the MATRX NAMES menu. Recall the contents of the matrix into the expression with y K (Chapter 1). Enter the matrix directly (see below). Entering a Matrix in an Expression You can enter, edit, and store a matrix in the matrix editor. You also can enter a matrix directly in an expression. To enter a matrix in an expression, follow these steps. 1. Press y [ [ ] to indicate the beginning of the matrix. 2. Press y [ [ ] to indicate the beginning of a row. 3. Enter a value, which can be an expression, for each element in the row. Separate the values with commas. 4. Press y [ ] ] to indicate the end of a row. 5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to enter all of the rows. Chapter 10: Matrices 228 6. Press y [ ] ] to indicate the end of the matrix.
Note: The closing ]] are not necessary at the end of an expression or preceding !. The resulting matrix is displayed in the form:
[[element1,1,...,element1,n],...,[elementm,1,...,elementm,n]] Any expressions are evaluated when the entry is executed. Note: The commas that you must enter to separate elements are not displayed on output. Displaying and Copying Matrices
Displaying a Matrix To display the contents of a matrix on the home screen, select the matrix from the MATRX NAMES menu, and then press Í. Ellipses in the left or right column indicate additional columns. # or $ in the right column indicate additional rows. Press ~, , †, and } to scroll the matrix. Chapter 10: Matrices 229 Copying One Matrix to Another To copy a matrix, follow these steps. 1. Press y > to display the MATRX NAMES menu. 2. Select the name of the matrix you want to copy. 3. Press ¿. 4. Press y > again and select the name of the new matrix to which you want to copy the existing matrix. 5. Press Í to copy the matrix to the new matrix name. Accessing a Matrix Element On the home screen or from within a program, you can store a value to, or recall a value from, a matrix element. The element must be within the currently defined matrix dimensions. Select matrix from the MATRX NAMES menu. Chapter 10: Matrices 230 [matrix](row,column) Using Math Functions with Matrices
Using Math Functions with Matrices You can use many of the math functions on the TI84 Plus keyboard, the MATH menu, the MATH NUM menu, and the MATH TEST menu with matrices. However, the dimensions must be appropriate. Each of the functions below creates a new matrix; the original matrix remains the same. Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication To add (Ã) or subtract (¹) matrices, the dimensions must be the same. The answer is a matrix in which the elements are the sum or difference of the individual corresponding elements.
matrixA+matrixB matrixANmatrixB To multiply (¯) two matrices together, the column dimension of matrixA must match the row dimension of matrixB. Chapter 10: Matrices 231 matrixA…matrixB Multiplying a matrix by a value or a value by a matrix returns a matrix in which each element of matrix is multiplied by value.
matrix…value value…matrix Negation Negating a matrix (Ì) returns a matrix in which the sign of every element is changed (reversed). Lmatrix Chapter 10: Matrices 232 abs(
abs( (absolute value, MATH NUM menu) returns a matrix containing the absolute value of each element of matrix. abs(matrix) round(
round( (MATH NUM menu) returns a matrix. It rounds every element in matrix to #decimals ( 9). If #decimals is omitted, the elements are rounded to 10 digits. round(matrix[,#decimals]) Inverse Use the L1 function (œ) to invert a matrix (^L1 is not valid). matrix must be square. The determinant cannot equal zero. Chapter 10: Matrices 233 matrixL 1 Powers To raise a matrix to a power, matrix must be square. You can use 2 (¡), 3 (MATH menu), or ^power (›) for integer power between 0 and 255.
matrix2 matrix3 matrix^power Relational Operations To compare two matrices using the relational operations = and ƒ (TEST menu), they must have the same dimensions. = and ƒ compare matrixA and matrixB on an elementbyelement basis. The other relational operations are not valid with matrices. Chapter 10: Matrices 234 matrixA=matrixB returns 1 if every comparison is true; it returns 0 if any comparison is false.
matrixAƒmatrixB returns 1 if at least one comparison is false; it returns 0 if no comparison is false. iPart(, fPart(, int(
iPart( (integer part), fPart( (fractional part), and int( (greatest integer) are on the MATH NUM menu. iPart( returns a matrix containing the integer part of each element of matrix. fPart( returns a matrix containing the fractional part of each element of matrix. int( returns a matrix containing the greatest integer of each element of matrix. Chapter 10: Matrices 235 iPart(matrix) fPart(matrix) int(matrix) Using the MATRX MATH Operations
MATRX MATH Menu To display the MATRX MATH menu, press y ~. NAMES MATH EDIT
Calculates the determinant. Transposes the matrix. Returns the matrix dimensions. Fills all elements with a constant. Returns the identity matrix. Returns a random matrix. Appends two matrices. Stores a matrix to a list. 1: det( 2: T 3: dim( 4: Fill( 5: identity( 6: randM( 7: augment( 8: Matr4list( Chapter 10: Matrices 236 NAMES MATH EDIT
Stores a list to a matrix. Returns the cumulative sums of a matrix. Returns the rowechelon form of a matrix. Returns the reduced rowechelon form. Swaps two rows of a matrix. Adds two rows; stores in the second row. Multiplies the row by a number. Multiplies the row, adds to the second row. 9: List4matr( 0: cumSum( A: ref( B: rref( C: rowSwap( D: row+( E: …row( F: …row+( det( det( (determinant) returns the determinant (a real number) of a square matrix. det(matrix) Transpose
T (transpose) returns a matrix in which each element (row, column) is swapped with the corresponding element (column, row) of matrix. Chapter 10: Matrices 237 matrixT Accessing Matrix Dimensions with dim(
dim( (dimension) returns a list containing the dimensions ({rows columns}) of matrix. dim(matrix) Note: dim(matrix)"Ln:Ln(1) returns the number of rows. dim(matrix)"Ln:Ln(2) returns the number of columns. Creating a Matrix with dim( Use dim( with ¿ to create a new matrixname of dimensions rows × columns with 0 as each element.
{rows,columns}"dim(matrixname) Chapter 10: Matrices 238 Redimensioning a Matrix with dim( Use dim( with ¿ to redimension an existing matrixname to dimensions rows × columns. The elements in the old matrixname that are within the new dimensions are not changed. Additional created elements are zeros. Matrix elements that are outside the new dimensions are deleted.
{rows,columns}"dim(matrixname) Fill(
Fill( stores value to every element in matrixname. Fill(value,matrixname) identity(
identity( returns the identity matrix of dimension rows × dimension columns. Chapter 10: Matrices 239 identity(dimension) randM(
randM( (create random matrix) returns a rows × columns random matrix of integers ‚ L9 and 9. The seed value stored to the rand function controls the values (Chapter 2). randM(rows,columns) augment(
augment( appends matrixA to matrixB as new columns. matrixA and matrixB both must have the same number of rows.
augment(matrixA,matrixB) Matr4list( Chapter 10: Matrices 240 Matr4list( (matrix stored to list) fills each listname with elements from each column in matrix. Matr4list( ignores extra listname arguments. Likewise, Matr4list( ignores extra matrix columns.
Matr4list(matrix,listnameA,...,listname n) Matr4list( also fills a listname with elements from a specified column# in matrix. To fill a list with a specific column from matrix, you must enter column# after matrix. Matr4list(matrix,column#,listname) List4matr(
List4matr( (lists stored to matrix) fills matrixname column by column with the elements from each list. If dimensions of all lists are not equal, List4matr( fills each extra matrixname row with 0. Complex lists are not valid. Chapter 10: Matrices 241 List4matr(listA,...,list n,matrixname) cumSum(
cumSum( returns cumulative sums of the elements in matrix, starting with the first element. Each element is the cumulative sum of the column from top to bottom.
cumSum(matrix) Row Operations
MATRX MATH menu items A through F are row operations. You can use a row operation in an expression. Row operations do not change matrix in memory. You can enter all row numbers and values as expressions. You can select the matrix from the MATRX NAMES menu. Chapter 10: Matrices 242 ref(, rref(
ref( (rowechelon form) returns the rowechelon form of a real matrix. The number of columns must be greater than or equal to the number of rows. ref(matrix) rref( (reduced rowechelon form) returns the reduced rowechelon form of a real matrix. The number of columns must be greater than or equal to the number of rows. rref(matrix) rowSwap(
rowSwap( returns a matrix. It swaps rowA and rowB of matrix. rowSwap(matrix,rowA,rowB) Chapter 10: Matrices 243 row+(
row+( (row addition) returns a matrix. It adds rowA and rowB of matrix and stores the results in rowB. row+(matrix,rowA,rowB) …row( …row( (row multiplication) returns a matrix. It multiplies row of matrix by value and stores the results in row. …row(value,matrix,row) …row+( …row+( (row multiplication and addition) returns a matrix. It multiplies rowA of matrix by value, adds it to rowB, and stores the results in rowB. Chapter 10: Matrices 244 …row+(value,matrix,rowA,rowB) Chapter 10: Matrices 245 Chapter 11: Lists
Getting Started: Generating a Sequence
Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. Calculate the first eight terms of the sequence 1/A2. Store the results to a usercreated list. Then display the results in fraction form. Begin this example on a blank line on the home screen. 1. Press y 9 ~ to display the LIST OPS menu. 2. Press 5 to select 5:seq(, which pastes seq( to the current cursor location. 3. Press 1 ¥ ƒ [A] ¡ ¢ ƒ [A] ¢ 1 ¢ 8 ¢ 1 ¤ Í to enter the sequence. 4. Press ¿, and then press y ƒ to turn on alphalock. Press [S] [E] [Q], and then press ƒ to turn off alphalock. Press 1 to complete the list name. Chapter 11: Lists 246 5. Press Í to generate the list and store it in SEQ1. The list is displayed on the home screen. An ellipsis (...) indicates that the list continues beyond the viewing window. Press ~ repeatedly (or press and hold ~) to scroll the list and view all the list elements. 6. Press y 9 to display the LIST NAMES menu. Press 7 to select 7:seq( to paste ÙSEQ1 to the current cursor location. (If SEQ1 is not item 7 on your LIST NAMES menu, move the cursor to SEQ1 before you press Í.) 7. Press to display the MATH menu. Press 1 to select 1:4Frac, which pastes 4Frac to the current cursor location. 8. Press Í to show the sequence in fraction form. Press ~ repeatedly (or press and hold ~) to scroll the list and view all the list elements. Naming Lists
L1 L6 Using TI84 Plus List Names L1 through L6 The TI84 Plus has six list names in memory: L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, and L6. The list names L1 through L6 are on the keyboard above the numeric keys À through ¸. To paste one of these names to a valid screen, press y, and then press the appropriate key. L1 through L6 are stored in stat list editor columns 1 through 6 when you reset memory. Chapter 11: Lists 247 Creating a List Name on the Home Screen To create a list name on the home screen, follow these steps. 1. Press y E, enter one or more list elements, and then press y F. Separate list elements with commas. List elements can be real numbers, complex numbers, or expressions. 2. Press ¿. 3. Press ƒ [letter from A to Z or q] to enter the first letter of the name. 4. Enter zero to four letters, q, or numbers to complete the name. 5. Press Í. The list is displayed on the next line. The list name and its elements are stored in memory. The list name becomes an item on the LIST NAMES menu. Note: If you want to view a usercreated list in the stat list editor, you must store it in the stat list editor (Chapter 12). You also can create a list name in these four places. • At the Name= prompt in the stat list editor
248 Chapter 11: Lists • • • At an Xlist:, Ylist:, or Data List: prompt in the stat plot editor At a List:, List1:, List2:, Freq:, Freq1:, Freq2:, XList:, or YList: prompt in the inferential stat editors On the home screen using SetUpEditor You can create as many list names as your TI84 Plus memory has space to store. Storing and Displaying Lists
Storing Elements to a List You can store list elements in either of two ways. • Use braces and ¿ on the home screen. • Use the stat list editor (Chapter 12). The maximum dimension of a list is 999 elements.
Note: When you store a complex number to a list, the entire list is converted to a list of complex numbers. To convert the list to a list of real numbers, display the home screen, and then enter real(listname)!listname. Chapter 11: Lists 249 Displaying a List on the Home Screen To display the elements of a list on the home screen, enter the name of the list (preceded by Ù, if necessary, and then press Í. An ellipsis indicates that the list continues beyond the viewing window. Press ~ repeatedly (or press and hold ~) to scroll the list and view all the list elements. Copying One List to Another To copy a list, store it to another list. Accessing a List Element You can store a value to or recall a value from a specific list element. You can store to any element within the current list dimension or one element beyond.
listname(element) Chapter 11: Lists 250 Deleting a List from Memory To delete lists from memory, including L1 through L6, use the MEMORY MANAGEMENT/DELETE secondary menu (Chapter 18). Resetting memory restores L1 through L6. Removing a list from the stat list editor does not delete it from memory. Using Lists in Graphing You can use lists to graph a family of curves (Chapter 3). Entering List Names
Using the LIST NAMES Menu To display the LIST NAMES menu, press y 9. Each item is a usercreated list name except for L1 through L6. LIST NAMES menu items are sorted automatically in alphanumerical order. Only the first 10 items are labeled, using 1 through 9, then 0. To jump to the first list name that begins with a particular alpha character or q, press ƒ [letter from A to Z or q]. Chapter 11: Lists 251 Note: From the top of a menu, press } to move to the bottom. From the bottom, press † to move to the top. When you select a list name from the LIST NAMES menu, the list name is pasted to the current cursor location. • The list name symbol Ù precedes a list name when the name is pasted where nonlist name data also is valid, such as the home screen. • The Ù symbol does not precede a list name when the name is pasted where a list name is the only valid input, such as the stat list editor’s Name= prompt or the stat plot editor’s XList: and YList: prompts. Entering a UserCreated List Name Directly To enter an existing list name directly, follow these steps. 1. Press y 9 ~ to display the LIST OPS menu. Chapter 11: Lists 252 2. Select B:Ù, which pastes Ù to the current cursor location. Ù is not always necessary.
Note: You also can paste Ù to the current cursor location from the CATALOG. 3. Enter the characters that comprise the list name. Attaching Formulas to List Names
Attaching a Formula to a List Name You can attach a formula to a list name so that each list element is a result of the formula. When executed, the attached formula must resolve to a list. When anything in the attached formula changes, the list to which the formula is attached is updated automatically. • • When you edit an element of a list that is referenced in the formula, the corresponding element in the list to which the formula is attached is updated. When you edit the formula itself, all elements in the list to which the formula is attached are updated. Chapter 11: Lists 253 For example, the first screen below shows that elements are stored to L3, and the formula L3+10 is attached to the list name ÙADD10. The quotation marks designate the formula to be attached to ÙADD10. Each element of ÙADD10 is the sum of an element in L3 and 10. The next screen shows another list, L4. The elements of L4 are the sum of the same formula that is attached to L3. However, quotation marks are not entered, so the formula is not attached to L4. On the next line, L6!L3(1):L3 changes the first element in L3 to L6, and then redisplays
L3. The last screen shows that editing L3 updated ÙADD10, but did not change L4. This is because the formula L3+10 is attached to ÙADD10, but it is not attached to L4. Note: To view a formula that is attached to a list name, use the stat list editor (Chapter 12). Chapter 11: Lists 254 Attaching a Formula to a List on the Home Screen or in a Program To attach a formula to a list name from a blank line on the home screen or from a program, follow these steps. 1. Press ƒ [ã], enter the formula (which must resolve to a list), and press ƒ [ã] again.
Note: When you include more than one list name in a formula, each list must have the same dimension. 2. Press ¿. 3. Enter the name of the list to which you want to attach the formula. • • • Press y, and then enter a TI84 Plus list name L1 through L6. Press y 9 and select a user.created list name from the LIST NAMES menu. Enter a user.created list name directly using Ù. 4. Press Í. Note: The stat list editor displays a formulalock symbol next to each list name that has an attached formula. Chapter 12 describes how to use the stat list editor to attach formulas to lists, edit attached formulas, and detach formulas from lists. Chapter 11: Lists 255 Detaching a Formula from a List You can detach (clear) an attached formula from a list in several ways. For example: • • • • Enter ã ã !listname on the home screen. Edit any element of a list to which a formula is attached. Use the stat list editor (Chapter 12). Use ClrList or ClrAllList to detach a formula from a list (Chapter 18). Using Lists in Expressions
Using a List in an Expression You can use lists in an expression in any of three ways. When you press Í, any expression is evaluated for each list element, and a list is displayed. • Use L1–L6 or any usercreated list name in an expression. • Enter the list elements directly. Chapter 11: Lists 256 • Use y K to recall the contents of the list into an expression at the cursor location (Chapter 1). Note: You must paste usercreated list names to the Rcl prompt by selecting them from the LIST NAMES menu. You cannot enter them directly using Ù. Using Lists with Math Functions You can use a list to input several values for some math functions. Other chapters and Appendix A specify whether a list is valid. The function is evaluated for each list element, and a list is displayed. • When you use a list with a function, the function must be valid for every element in the list. In graphing, an invalid element, such as L1 in ‡({1,0,L1}), is ignored. This returns an error. This graphs X…‡(1) and X…‡(0), but skips
X…‡(L1). • When you use two lists with a twoargument function, the dimension of each list must be the same. The function is evaluated for corresponding elements. Chapter 11: Lists 257 • When you use a list and a value with a twoargument function, the value is used with each element in the list. LIST OPS Menu
LIST OPS Menu To display the LIST OPS menu, press y 9 ~. NAMES OPS MATH 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: SortA( SortD( dim( Fill( seq( cumSum( @List(
Sorts lists in ascending order. Sorts lists in descending order. Sets the list dimension. Fills all elements with a constant. Creates a sequence. Returns a list of cumulative sums. Returns difference of successive elements. Chapter 11: Lists 258 NAMES OPS MATH 8: 9: 0: A: B: Select( augment(
Selects specific data points. Concatenates two lists. List4matr( Stores a list to a matrix. Matr4list( Stores a matrix to a list. Ù
Designates the listname data type. SortA(, SortD(
SortA( (sort ascending) sorts list elements from low to high values. SortD( (sort descending) sorts list elements from high to low values. Complex lists are sorted based on magnitude (modulus). With one list, SortA( and SortD( sort the elements of listname and update the list in memory.
SortA(listname) SortD(listname) With two or more lists, SortA( and SortD( sort keylistname, and then sort each dependlist by placing its elements in the same order as the corresponding elements in keylistname. All lists must have the same dimension. Chapter 11: Lists 259 SortA(keylistname,dependlist1[,dependlist2,...,dependlist n]) SortD(keylistname,dependlist1[,dependlist2,...,dependlist n]) Note: • In the example, 5 is the first element in L4, and 1 is the first element in L5. After SortA(L4,L5), 5 becomes the second element of L4, and likewise, 1 becomes the second element of L5.
SortA( and SortD( are the same as SortA( and SortD( on the STAT EDIT menu (Chapter 12). • Using dim( to Find List Dimensions
dim( (dimension) returns the length (number of elements) of list. dim(list) Chapter 11: Lists 260 Using dim( to Create a List You can use dim( with ¿ to create a new listname with dimension length from 1 to 999. The elements are zeros.
length!dim(listname) Using dim( to Redimension a List You can use dim with ¿ to redimension an existing listname to dimension length from 1 to 999. • • • The elements in the old listname that are within the new dimension are not changed. Extra list elements are filled by 0. Elements in the old list that are outside the new dimension are deleted. length!dim(listname) Chapter 11: Lists 261 Fill(
Fill( replaces each element in listname with value. Fill(value,listname) Note: dim( and Fill( are the same as dim( and Fill( on the MATRX MATH menu (Chapter 10). seq(
seq( (sequence) returns a list in which each element is the result of the evaluation of expression with regard to variable for the values ranging from begin to end at steps of increment. variable need not be defined in memory. increment can be negative; the default value for increment is 1. seq( is not valid within expression. Complex lists are not valid. seq(expression,variable,begin,end[,increment]) Chapter 11: Lists 262 cumSum(
cumSum( (cumulative sum) returns the cumulative sums of the elements in list, starting with the first element. list elements can be real or complex numbers. cumSum(list) @List( @List( returns a list containing the differences between consecutive elements in list. @List subtracts the first element in list from the second element, subtracts the second element from the third, and so on. The list of differences is always one element shorter than the original list. list elements can be a real or complex numbers. @List(list) Select(
Select( selects one or more specific data points from a scatter plot or xyLine plot (only), and then stores the selected data points to two new lists, xlistname and ylistname. For Chapter 11: Lists 263 example, you can use Select( to select and then analyze a portion of plotted CBL 2™/CBL™ or CBR™ data.
Select(xlistname,ylistname) Note: Before you use Select(, you must have selected (turned on) a scatter plot or xyLine plot. Also, the plot must be displayed in the current viewing window. Before Using Select( Before using Select(, follow these steps. 1. Create two list names and enter the data. 2. Turn on a stat plot, select " (scatter plot) or Ó (xyLine), and enter the two list names for Xlist: and Ylist: (Chapter 12). 3. Use ZoomStat to plot the data (Chapter 3). Using Select( to Select Data Points from a Plot To select data points from a scatter plot or xyLine plot, follow these steps. 1. Press y 9 ~ 8 to select 8:Select( from the LIST OPS menu. Select( is pasted to the home screen. Chapter 11: Lists 264 2. Enter xlistname, press ¢, enter ylistname, and then press ¤ to designate list names into which you want the selected data to be stored. 3. Press Í. The graph screen is displayed with Left Bound? in the bottomleft corner. 4. Press } or † (if more than one stat plot is selected) to move the cursor onto the stat plot from which you want to select data points. 5. Press  and ~ to move the cursor to the stat plot data point that you want as the left bound. 6. Press Í. A 4 indicator on the graph screen shows the left bound. Right Bound? is displayed in the bottomleft corner. Chapter 11: Lists 265 7. Press  or ~ to move the cursor to the stat plot point that you want for the right bound, and then press Í. The xvalues and yvalues of the selected points are stored in xlistname and ylistname. A new stat plot of xlistname and ylistname replaces the stat plot from which you selected data points. The list names are updated in the stat plot editor. Note: The two new lists (xlistname and ylistname) will include the points you select as left bound and right bound. Also, leftbound xvalue { rightbound xvalue must be true. Chapter 11: Lists 266 augment(
augment( concatenates the elements of listA and listB. The list elements can be real or complex numbers.
augment(listA,listB) List4matr(
List4matr( (lists stored to matrix) fills matrixname column by column with the elements from each list. If the dimensions of all lists are not equal, then List4matr( fills each extra matrixname row with 0. Complex lists are not valid. List4matr(list1,list2, ... ,list n,matrixname) Matr4list( Chapter 11: Lists 267 Matr4list( (matrix stored to lists) fills each listname with elements from each column in matrix. If the number of listname arguments exceeds the number of columns in matrix, then Matr4list( ignores extra listname arguments. Likewise, if the number of columns in matrix exceeds the number of listname arguments, then Matr4list( ignores extra matrix columns. Matr4list(matrix,listname1,listname2, . . . ,listname n) Matr4list( also fills a listname with elements from a specified column# in matrix. To fill a list with a specific column from matrix, you must enter a column# after matrix. Matr4list(matrix,column#,listname) Ù preceding one to five characters identifies those characters as a usercreated listname. listname may comprise letters, q, and numbers, but it must begin with a letter from A to Z or q. Ùlistname Chapter 11: Lists 268 Generally, Ù must precede a usercreated list name when you enter a usercreated list name where other input is valid, for example, on the home screen. Without the Ù, the TI84 Plus may misinterpret a usercreated list name as implied multiplication of two or more characters. Ù need not precede a usercreated list name where a list name is the only valid input, for example, at the Name= prompt in the stat list editor or the Xlist: and Ylist: prompts in the stat plot editor. If you enter Ù where it is not necessary, the TI84 Plus will ignore the entry. LIST MATH Menu
LIST MATH Menu To display the LIST MATH menu, press y 9 . NAMES OPS MATH 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: min( max( mean( median( sum( prod( stdDev(
Returns minimum element of a list. Returns maximum element of a list. Returns mean of a list. Returns median of a list. Returns sum of elements in a list. Returns product of elements in list. Returns standard deviation of a list. variance( Returns the variance of a list. Chapter 11: Lists 269 min(, max(
min( (minimum) and max( (maximum) return the smallest or largest element of listA. If two lists are compared, it returns a list of the smaller or larger of each pair of elements in listA and listB. For a complex list, the element with smallest or largest magnitude (modulus) is returned.
min(listA[,listB]) max(listA[,listB]) Note: min( and max( are the same as min( and max( on the MATH NUM menu. mean(, median(
mean( returns the mean value of list. median( returns the median value of list. The default value for freqlist is 1. Each freqlist element counts the number of consecutive occurrences of the corresponding element in list. Complex lists are not valid. mean(list[,freqlist]) median(list[,freqlist]) Chapter 11: Lists 270 sum(, prod(
sum( (summation) returns the sum of the elements in list. start and end are optional; they specify a range of elements. list elements can be real or complex numbers. prod( returns the product of all elements of list. start and end elements are optional; they specify a range of list elements. list elements can be real or complex numbers. sum(list[,start,end]) prod(list[,start,end]) Sums and Products of Numeric Sequences You can combine sum( or prod( with seq( to obtain:
upper upper G expression(x)
x=lower ∏ expression(x)
x=lower To evaluate G 2 (N–1) from N=1 to 4: Chapter 11: Lists 271 stdDev(, variance(
stdDev( returns the standard deviation of the elements in list. The default value for freqlist is 1. Each freqlist element counts the number of consecutive occurrences of the corresponding element in list. Complex lists are not valid. • variance( returns the variance of the elements in list. The default value for freqlist is 1. Each freqlist element counts the number of consecutive occurrences of the corresponding element in list. Complex lists are not valid. variance(list[,freqlist]) stdDev(list[,freqlist]) Chapter 11: Lists 272 Chapter 12: Statistics
Getting Started: Pendulum Lengths and Periods
Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. A group of students is attempting to determine the mathematical relationship between the length of a pendulum and its period (one complete swing of a pendulum). The group makes a simple pendulum from string and washers and then suspends it from the ceiling. They record the pendulum’s period for each of 12 string lengths.*
Length (cm) 6.5 11.0 13.2 15.0 18.0 23.1 Time (sec) 0.51 0.68 0.73 0.79 0.88 0.99 Length (cm) 24.4 26.6 30.5 34.3 37.6 41.5 Time (sec) 1.01 1.08 1.13 1.26 1.28 1.32 *This example is quoted and adapted from Contemporary Precalculus Through Applications, by the North Carolina School of Science and Mathematics, by permission of Janson Publications, Inc., Dedham, MA. 1800322MATH. © 1992. All rights reserved. 1. Press z † † † Í to set Func graphing mode. Chapter 12: Statistics 273 2. Press … 5 to select 5:SetUpEditor. SetUpEditor is pasted to the home screen. Press Í. This removes lists from stat list editor columns 1 through 20, and then stores lists L1 through L6 in columns 1 through 6.
Note: Removing lists from the stat list editor does not delete them from memory. 3. Press … 1 to select 1:Edit from the STAT EDIT menu. The stat list editor is displayed. If elements are stored in L1 and L2, press } to move the cursor onto L1, and then press ‘ Í ~ } ‘ Í to clear both lists. Press  to move the rectangular cursor back to the first row in L1. 4. Press 6 Ë 5 Í to store the first pendulum string length (6.5 cm) in L1. The rectangular cursor moves to the next row. Repeat this step to enter each of the 12 string length values in the table. 5. Press ~ to move the rectangular cursor to the first row in L2. Press Ë 51 Í to store the first time measurement (.51 sec) in L2. The rectangular cursor moves to the next row. Repeat this step to enter each of the 12 time values in the table. Chapter 12: Statistics 274 6. Press o to display the Y= editor. If necessary, press ‘ to clear the function Y1. As necessary, press }, Í, and ~ to turn off Plot1, Plot2, and Plot3 from the top line of the Y= editor (Chapter 3). As necessary, press †, , and Í to deselect functions. 7. Press y , 1 to select 1:Plot1 from the STAT PLOTS menu. The stat plot editor is displayed for plot 1. 8. Press Í to select On, which turns on plot 1. Press † Í to select " (scatter plot). Press † y d to specify Xlist:L1 for plot 1. Press † y e to specify Ylist:L2 for plot 1. Press † ~ Í to select + as the Mark for each data point on the scatter plot. 9. Press q 9 to select 9:ZoomStat from the ZOOM menu. The window variables are adjusted automatically, and plot 1 is displayed. This is a scatter plot of the timeversuslength data. Chapter 12: Statistics 275 Since the scatter plot of timeversuslength data appears to be approximately linear, fit a line to the data. 10. Press … ~ 4 to select 4:LinReg(ax+b) (linear regression model) from the STAT CALC menu. LinReg(ax+b) is pasted to the home screen. 11. Press y d ¢ y e ¢. Press ~ 1 to display the VARS YVARS FUNCTION secondary menu, and then press 1 to select 1:Y1. L1, L2, and Y1 are pasted to the home screen as arguments to LinReg(ax+b). 12. Press Í to execute LinReg(ax+b). The linear regression for the data in L1 and L2 is calculated. Values for a and b are displayed on the home screen. The linear regression equation is stored in Y1. Residuals are calculated and stored automatically in the list name RESID, which becomes an item on the LIST NAMES menu. 13. Press s. The regression line and the scatter plot are displayed. Chapter 12: Statistics 276 The regression line appears to fit the central portion of the scatter plot well. However, a residual plot may provide more information about this fit. 14. Press … 1 to select 1:Edit. The stat list editor is displayed. Press ~ and } to move the cursor onto L3. Press y 6. An unnamed column is displayed in column 3; L3, L4, L5, and L6 shift right one column. The Name= prompt is displayed in the entry line, and alphalock is on. 15. Press y 9 to display the LIST NAMES menu. If necessary, press † to move the cursor onto the list name RESID. 16. Press Í to select RESID and paste it to the stat list editor’s Name= prompt. 17. Press Í. RESID is stored in column 3 of the stat list editor. Press † repeatedly to examine the residuals. Chapter 12: Statistics 277 Notice that the first three residuals are negative. They correspond to the shortest pendulum string lengths in L1. The next five residuals are positive, and three of the last four are negative. The latter correspond to the longer string lengths in L1. Plotting the residuals will show this pattern more clearly. 18. Press y , 2 to select 2:Plot2 from the STAT PLOTS menu. The stat plot editor is displayed for plot 2. 19. Press Í to select On, which turns on plot 2. Press † Í to select " (scatter plot). Press † y d to specify Xlist:L1 for plot 2. Press † ãRä ãEä ãSä ãIä ãDä (alphalock is on) to specify Ylist:RESID for plot 2. Press † Í to select › as the mark for each data point on the scatter plot. 20. Press o to display the Y= editor. Press  to move the cursor onto the = sign, and then press Í to deselect Y1. Press } Í to turn off plot 1. 21. Press q 9 to select 9:ZoomStat from the ZOOM menu. The window variables are adjusted automatically, and plot 2 is displayed. This is a scatter plot of the residuals. Chapter 12: Statistics 278 Notice the pattern of the residuals: a group of negative residuals, then a group of positive residuals, and then another group of negative residuals. The residual pattern indicates a curvature associated with this data set for which the linear model did not account. The residual plot emphasizes a downward curvature, so a model that curves down with the data would be more accurate. Perhaps a function such as square root would fit. Try a power regression to fit a function of the form y = a … xb. 22. Press o to display the Y= editor. Press ‘ to clear the linear regression equation from Y1. Press } Í to turn on plot 1. Press ~ Í to turn off plot 2. 23. Press q 9 to select 9:ZoomStat from the ZOOM menu. The window variables are adjusted automatically, and the original scatter plot of timeversuslength data (plot 1) is displayed. 24. Press … ~ ƒ ãAä to select A:PwrReg from the STAT CALC menu. PwrReg is pasted to the home screen. Press y d ¢ y e ¢. Press ~ 1 to display the VARS YVARS FUNCTION secondary menu, and then press 1 to select 1:Y1. L1, L2, and Y1 are pasted to the home screen as arguments to PwrReg. Chapter 12: Statistics 279 25. Press Í to calculate the power regression. Values for a and b are displayed on the home screen. The power regression equation is stored in Y1. Residuals are calculated and stored automatically in the list name RESID. 26. Press s. The regression line and the scatter plot are displayed. The new function y=.192x.522 appears to fit the data well. To get more information, examine a residual plot. 27. Press o to display the Y= editor. Press  Í to deselect Y1. Press } Í to turn off plot 1. Press ~ Í to turn on plot 2.
Note: Step 19 defined plot 2 to plot residuals (RESID) versus string length (L1). 28. Press q 9 to select 9:ZoomStat from the ZOOM menu. The window variables are adjusted automatically, and plot 2 is displayed. This is a scatter plot of the residuals. Chapter 12: Statistics 280 The new residual plot shows that the residuals are random in sign, with the residuals increasing in magnitude as the string length increases. To see the magnitudes of the residuals, continue with these steps. 29. Press r. Press ~ and  to trace the data. Observe the values for Y at each point. With this model, the largest positive residual is about 0.041 and the smallest negative residual is about L0.027. All other residuals are less than 0.02 in magnitude. Now that you have a good model for the relationship between length and period, you can use the model to predict the period for a given string length. To predict the periods for a pendulum with string lengths of 20 cm and 50 cm, continue with these steps. 30. Press ~ 1 to display the VARS YVARS FUNCTION secondary menu, and then press 1 to select 1:Y1. Y1 is pasted to the home screen. Chapter 12: Statistics 281 31. Press £ 20 ¤ to enter a string length of 20 cm. Press Í to calculate the predicted time of about 0.92 seconds. Based on the residual analysis, we would expect the prediction of about 0.92 seconds to be within about 0.02 seconds of the actual value. 32. Press y [ to recall the Last Entry. Press    5 to change the string length to 50 cm. 33. Press Í to calculate the predicted time of about 1.48 seconds. Since a string length of 50 cm exceeds the lengths in the data set, and since residuals appear to be increasing as string length increases, we would expect more error with this estimate.
Note: You also can make predictions using the table with the TABLE SETUP settings Indpnt:Ask and Depend:Auto (Chapter 7). Setting Up Statistical Analyses
Using Lists to Store Data Data for statistical analyses is stored in lists, which you can create and edit using the stat list editor. The TI84 Plus has six list variables in memory, L1 through L6, to which you Chapter 12: Statistics 282 can store data for statistical calculations. Also, you can store data to list names that you create (Chapter 11). Setting Up a Statistical Analysis To set up a statistical analysis, follow these steps. Read the chapter for details. 1. Enter the statistical data into one or more lists. 2. Plot the data. 3. Calculate the statistical variables or fit a model to the data. 4. Graph the regression equation for the plotted data. 5. Graph the residuals list for the given regression model. Displaying the Stat List Editor The stat list editor is a table where you can store, edit, and view up to 20 lists that are in memory. Also, you can create list names from the stat list editor. To display the stat list editor, press …, and then select 1:Edit from the STAT EDIT menu. Chapter 12: Statistics 283 The top line displays list names. L1 through L6 are stored in columns 1 through 6 after a memory reset. The number of the current column is displayed in the topright corner. The bottom line is the entry line. All data entry occurs on this line. The characteristics of this line change according to the current context. The center area displays up to seven elements of up to three lists; it abbreviates values when necessary. The entry line displays the full value of the current element. Using the Stat List Editor
Entering a List Name in the Stat List Editor To enter a list name in the stat list editor, follow these steps. 1. Display the Name= prompt in the entry line in either of two ways. • Move the cursor onto the list name in the column where you want to insert a list, and then press y 6. An unnamed column is displayed and the remaining lists shift right one column. Press } until the cursor is on the top line, and then press ~ until you reach the unnamed column. • Note: If list names are stored to all 20 columns, you must remove a list name to make room for an unnamed column. The Name= prompt is displayed and alphalock is on. Chapter 12: Statistics 284 2. Enter a valid list name in any of four ways. • • • • Select a name from the LIST NAMES menu (Chapter 11). Enter L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, or L6 from the keyboard. Enter an existing usercreated list name directly from the keyboard. Enter a new usercreated list name. 3. Press Í or † to store the list name and its elements, if any, in the current column of the stat list editor. Chapter 12: Statistics 285 To begin entering, scrolling, or editing list elements, press †. The rectangular cursor is displayed.
Note: If the list name you entered in step 2 already was stored in another stat list editor column, then the list and its elements, if any, move to the current column from the previous column. Remaining list names shift accordingly. Creating a Name in the Stat List Editor To create a name in the stat list editor, follow these steps. 1. Display the Name= prompt. 2. Press [letter from A to Z or q] to enter the first letter of the name. The first character cannot be a number. 3. Enter zero to four letters, q, or numbers to complete the new usercreated list name. List names can be one to five characters long. 4. Press Í or † to store the list name in the current column of the stat list editor. The list name becomes an item on the LIST NAMES menu (Chapter 11). Chapter 12: Statistics 286 Removing a List from the Stat List Editor To remove a list from the stat list editor, move the cursor onto the list name and then press {. The list is not deleted from memory; it is only removed from the stat list editor.
Notes: • To delete a list name from memory, use the MEMORY MANAGEMENT/DELETE secondary menu (Chapter 18). If you archive a list, it will be removed from the stat list editor. • L1 L6 Removing All Lists and Restoring L1 through L6 You can remove all usercreated lists from the stat list editor and restore list names L1 through L6 to columns 1 through 6 in either of two ways. • • Use SetUpEditor with no arguments. Reset all memory (Chapter 18). Clearing All Elements from a List You can clear all elements from a list in any of five ways. • • • Use ClrList to clear specified lists. In the stat list editor, press } to move the cursor onto a list name, and then press ‘ Í. In the stat list editor, move the cursor onto each element, and then press { one by one.
287 Chapter 12: Statistics • • On the home screen or in the program editor, enter 0!dim(listname) to set the dimension of listname to 0 (Chapter 11). Use ClrAllLists to clear all lists in memory (Chapter 18). Editing a List Element To edit a list element, follow these steps. 1. Move the rectangular cursor onto the element you want to edit. 2. Press Í to move the cursor to the entry line.
Note: If you want to replace the current value, you can enter a new value without first pressing Í. When you enter the first character, the current value is cleared automatically. • • Press one or more keys to enter the new value. When you enter the first character, the current value is cleared automatically. 3. Edit the element in the entry line. Press ~ to move the cursor to the character before which you want to insert, press y 6, and then enter one or more characters. Press ~ to move the cursor to a character you want to delete, and then press { to delete the character. • To cancel any editing and restore the original element at the rectangular cursor, press ‘ Í. Chapter 12: Statistics 288 Note: You can enter expressions and variables for elements. 4. Press Í, }, or † to update the list. If you entered an expression, it is evaluated. If you entered only a variable, the stored value is displayed as a list element. When you edit a list element in the stat list editor, the list is updated in memory immediately. Attaching Formulas to List Names
Attaching a Formula to a List Name in Stat List Editor You can attach a formula to a list name in the stat list editor, and then display and edit the calculated list elements. When executed, the attached formula must resolve to a list. Chapter 11 describes in detail the concept of attaching formulas to list names. To attach a formula to a list name that is stored in the stat list editor, follow these steps.
Chapter 12: Statistics 289 1. Press … Í to display the stat list editor. 2. Press } to move the cursor to the top line. 3. Press  or ~, if necessary, to move the cursor onto the list name to which you want to attach the formula.
Note: If a formula in quotation marks is displayed on the entry line, then a formula is already attached to the list name. To edit the formula, press Í, and then edit the formula. 4. Press ƒ ããä, enter the formula, and press ƒ ããä.
Note: If you do not use quotation marks, the TI84 Plus calculates and displays the same initial list of answers, but does not attach the formula for future calculations. Note: Any usercreated list name referenced in a formula must be preceded by an Ù symbol (Chapter 11). 5. Press Í. The TI84 Plus calculates each list element and stores it to the list name to which the formula is attached. A lock symbol is displayed in the stat list editor, next to the list name to which the formula is attached. Chapter 12: Statistics 290 lock symbol Using the Stat List Editor When FormulaGenerated Lists Are Displayed When you edit an element of a list referenced in an attached formula, the TI84 Plus updates the corresponding element in the list to which the formula is attached (Chapter 11). When a list with a formula attached is displayed in the stat list editor and you edit or enter elements of another displayed list, then the TI84 Plus takes slightly longer to accept each edit or entry than when no lists with formulas attached are in view.
Note: To speed editing time, scroll horizontally until no lists with formulas are displayed, or rearrange the stat list editor so that no lists with formulas are displayed. Chapter 12: Statistics 291 Handling Errors Resulting from Attached Formulas On the home screen, you can attach to a list a formula that references another list with dimension 0 (Chapter 11). However, you cannot display the formulagenerated list in the stat list editor or on the home screen until you enter at least one element to the list that the formula references. All elements of a list referenced by an attached formula must be valid for the attached formula. For example, if Real number mode is set and the attached formula is log(L1), then each element of L1 must be greater than 0, since the logarithm of a negative number returns a complex result.
Notes: • If an error menu is returned when you attempt to display a formulagenerated list in the stat list editor, you can select 2:Goto, write down the formula that is attached to the list, and then press ‘ Í to detach (clear) the formula. You then can use the stat list editor to find the source of the error. After making the appropriate changes, you can reattach the formula to a list. If you do not want to clear the formula, you can select 1:Quit, display the referenced list on the home screen, and find and edit the source of the error. To edit an element of a list on the home screen, store the new value to listname(element#) (Chapter 11). • Detaching Formulas from List Names
Detaching a Formula from a List Name You can detach (clear) a formula from a list name in several ways. Chapter 12: Statistics 292 For example: • In the stat list editor, move the cursor onto the name of the list to which a formula is attached. Press Í ‘ Í. All list elements remain, but the formula is detached and the lock symbol disappears. In the stat list editor, move the cursor onto an element of the list to which a formula is attached. Press Í, edit the element, and then press Í. The element changes, the formula is detached, and the lock symbol disappears. All other list elements remain. Use ClrList. All elements of one or more specified lists are cleared, each formula is detached, and each lock symbol disappears. All list names remain. Use ClrAllLists (Chapter 18). All elements of all lists in memory are cleared, all formulas are detached from all list names, and all lock symbols disappear. All list names remain. • • • Editing an Element of a FormulaGenerated List As described above, one way to detach a formula from a list name is to edit an element of the list to which the formula is attached. The TI84 Plus protects against inadvertently detaching the formula from the list name by editing an element of the formulagenerated list. Because of the protection feature, you must press Í before you can edit an element of a formulagenerated list. The protection feature does not allow you to delete an element of a list to which a formula is attached. To delete an element of a list to which a formula is attached, you must first detach the formula in any of the ways described above. Chapter 12: Statistics 293 Switching Stat List Editor Contexts
Stat List Editor Contexts The stat list editor has four contexts. • • • • Viewelements context Viewnames context Editelements context Entername context The stat list editor is first displayed in viewelements context. To switch through the four contexts, select 1:Edit from the STAT EDIT menu and follow these steps. 1. Press } to move the cursor onto a list name. You are now in viewnames context. Press ~ and  to view list names stored in other stat list editor columns. 2. Press Í. You are now in editelements context. You may edit any element in a list. All elements of the current list are displayed in braces ( { } )in the entry line. Press ~ and  to view more list elements. 3. Press Í again. You are now in viewelements context. Press ~, , †, and } to view other list elements. The current element’s full value is displayed in the entry line. Chapter 12: Statistics 294 4. Press Í again. You are now in editelements context. You may edit the current element in the entry line. 5. Press } until the cursor is on a list name, then press y 6. You are now in entername context. 6. Press ‘. You are now in viewnames context. 7. Press †. You are now back in viewelements context. Stat List Editor Contexts
ViewElements Context In viewelements context, the entry line displays the list name, the current element’s place in that list, and the full value of the current element, up to 12 characters at a time. An ellipsis (...) indicates that the element continues beyond 12 characters. Chapter 12: Statistics 295 To page down the list six elements, press ƒ †. To page up six elements, press ƒ }. To delete a list element, press {. Remaining elements shift up one row. To insert a new element, press y 6. 0 is the default value for a new element. EditElements Context In editelements context, the data displayed in the entry line depends on the previous context. • When you switch to editelements context from viewelements context, the full value of the current element is displayed. You can edit the value of this element, and then press † and } to edit other list elements. Chapter 12: Statistics 296 • When you switch to editelements context from viewnames context, the full values of all elements in the list are displayed. An ellipsis indicates that list elements continue beyond the screen. You can press ~ and  to edit any element in the list. Note: In editelements context, you can attach a formula to a list name only if you switched to it from viewnames context. ViewNames Context In viewnames context, the entry line displays the list name and the list elements. To remove a list from the stat list editor, press {. Remaining lists shift to the left one column. The list is not deleted from memory. To insert a name in the current column, press y 6. Remaining columns shift to the right one column. Chapter 12: Statistics 297 EnterName Context In entername context, the Name= prompt is displayed in the entry line, and alphalock is on. At the Name= prompt, you can create a new list name, paste a list name from L1 to L6 from the keyboard, or paste an existing list name from the LIST NAMES menu (Chapter 11). The Ù symbol is not required at the Name= prompt. To leave entername context without entering a list name, press ‘. The stat list editor switches to viewnames context. Chapter 12: Statistics 298 STAT EDIT Menu
STAT EDIT Menu To display the STAT EDIT menu, press …. EDIT CALC TESTS
Displays the stat list editor. Sorts a list in ascending order. Sorts a list in descending order. Deletes all elements of a list. Stores specified lists in the stat list editor. 1: Edit... 2: SortA( 3: SortD( 4: ClrList 5: SetUpEditor Note: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics describes the STAT TESTS menu items. SortA(, SortD(
SortA( (sort ascending) sorts list elements from low to high values. SortD( (sort descending) sorts list elements from high to low values. Complex lists are sorted based on magnitude (modulus). SortA( and SortD( each can sort in either of two ways. • • With one listname, SortA( and SortD( sort the elements in listname and update the list in memory. With two or more lists, SortA( and SortD( sort keylistname, and then sort each dependlist by placing its elements in the same order as the corresponding elements in Chapter 12: Statistics 299 keylistname. This lets you sort twovariable data on X and keep the data pairs together. All lists must have the same dimension. The sorted lists are updated in memory.
SortA(listname) SortD(listname) SortA(keylistname,dependlist1[,dependlist2,...,dependlist n]) SortD(keylistname,dependlist1[,dependlist2,...,dependlist n]) Note: SortA( and SortD( are the same as SortA( and SortD( on the LIST OPS menu. ClrList
ClrList clears (deletes) from memory the elements of one or more listnames. ClrList also detaches any formula attached to a listname. ClrList listname1,listname2,...,listname n Note: To clear from memory all elements of all list names, use ClrAllLists (Chapter 18). Chapter 12: Statistics 300 SetUpEditor With SetUpEditor you can set up the stat list editor to display one or more listnames in the order that you specify. You can specify zero to 20 listnames. Additionally, if you want to use listnames which happen to be archived, the SetUp Editor will automatically unarchive the listnames and place them in the stat list editor at the same time.
SetUpEditor [listname1,listname2,...,listname n] SetUpEditor with one to 20 listnames removes all list names from the stat list editor and then stores listnames in the stat list editor columns in the specified order, beginning in column 1. If you enter a listname that is not stored in memory already, then listname is created and stored in memory; it becomes an item on the LIST NAMES menu. Chapter 12: Statistics 301 L1 L6 Restoring L1 through L6 to the Stat List Editor
SetUpEditor with no listnames removes all list names from the stat list editor and restores list names L1 through L6 in the stat list editor columns 1 through 6. Regression Model Features
Regression Model Features
STAT CALC menu items 3 through C are regression models. The automatic residual list and automatic regression equation features apply to all regression models. Diagnostics display mode applies to some regression models. Automatic Residual List When you execute a regression model, the automatic residual list feature computes and stores the residuals to the list name RESID. RESID becomes an item on the LIST NAMES menu (Chapter 11). Chapter 12: Statistics 302 The TI84 Plus uses the formula below to compute RESID list elements. The next section describes the variable RegEQ.
RESID = Ylistname N RegEQ(Xlistname) Automatic Regression Equation Each regression model has an optional argument, regequ, for which you can specify a Y= variable such as Y1. Upon execution, the regression equation is stored automatically to the specified Y= variable and the Y= function is selected. Regardless of whether you specify a Y= variable for regequ, the regression equation always is stored to the TI84 Plus variable RegEQ, which is item 1 on the VARS Statistics EQ secondary menu. Chapter 12: Statistics 303 Note: For the regression equation, you can use the fixeddecimal mode setting to control the number of digits stored after the decimal point (Chapter 1). However, limiting the number of digits to a small number could affect the accuracy of the fit. Diagnostics Display Mode When you execute some regression models, the TI84 Plus computes and stores diagnostics values for r (correlation coefficient) and r2 (coefficient of determination) or for R2 (coefficient of determination).
r and r2 are computed and stored for these regression models. LinReg(ax+b) LinReg(a+bx) LnReg ExpReg PwrReg R2 is computed and stored for these regression models. QuadReg CubicReg QuartReg The r and r2 that are computed for LnReg, ExpReg, and PwrReg are based on the linearly transformed data. For example, for ExpReg (y=ab^x), r and r2 are computed on ln y=ln a+x(ln b). Chapter 12: Statistics 304 By default, these values are not displayed with the results of a regression model when you execute it. However, you can set the diagnostics display mode by executing the DiagnosticOn or DiagnosticOff instruction. Each instruction is in the CATALOG (Chapter 15). Note: To set DiagnosticOn or DiagnosticOff from the home screen, press y N, and then select the instruction for the mode you want. The instruction is pasted to the home screen. Press Í to set the mode. When DiagnosticOn is set, diagnostics are displayed with the results when you execute a regression model. When DiagnosticOff is set, diagnostics are not displayed with the results when you execute a regression model. Chapter 12: Statistics 305 STAT CALC Menu
STAT CALC Menu To display the STAT CALC menu, press … ~. EDIT CALC TESTS
Calculates 1variable statistics. Calculates 2variable statistics. Calculates a medianmedian line. Fits a linear model to data. Fits a quadratic model to data. Fits a cubic model to data. Fits a quartic model to data. Fits a linear model to data. Fits a logarithmic model to data. Fits an exponential model to data. Fits a power model to data. Fits a logistic model to data. Fits a sinusoidal model to data. Fits a linear equation interactively to a scatter plot. 1: 1Var Stats 2: 2Var Stats 3: MedMed 4: LinReg(ax+b) 5: QuadReg 6: CubicReg 7: QuartReg 8: LinReg(a+bx) 9: LnReg 0: ExpReg A: PwrReg B: Logistic C: SinReg D: Manual Linear Fit Chapter 12: Statistics 306 For each STAT CALC menu item, if neither Xlistname nor Ylistname is specified, then the default list names are L1 and L2. If you do not specify freqlist, then the default is 1 occurrence of each list element. Frequency of Occurrence for Data Points For most STAT CALC menu items, you can specify a list of data occurrences, or frequencies (freqlist). Each element in freqlist indicates how many times the corresponding data point or data pair occurs in the data set you are analyzing. For example, if L1={15,12,9,14} and ÙFREQ={1,4,1,3}, then the TI84 Plus interprets the instruction 1Var Stats L1, ÙFREQ to mean that 15 occurs once, 12 occurs four times, 9 occurs once, and 14 occurs three times. Each element in freqlist must be ‚ 0, and at least one element must be > 0. Noninteger freqlist elements are valid. This is useful when entering frequencies expressed as percentages or parts that add up to 1. However, if freqlist contains noninteger frequencies, Sx and Sy are undefined; values are not displayed for Sx and Sy in the statistical results. 1Var Stats
1Var Stats (onevariable statistics) analyzes data with one measured variable. Each element in freqlist is the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data point in Xlistname. freqlist elements must be real numbers > 0. 1Var Stats [Xlistname,freqlist] Chapter 12: Statistics 307 2Var Stats
2Var Stats (twovariable statistics) analyzes paired data. Xlistname is the independent variable. Ylistname is the dependent variable. Each element in freqlist is the frequency of occurrence for each data pair (Xlistname,Ylistname). 2Var Stats [Xlistname,Ylistname,freqlist] MedMed (ax+b)
MedMed (medianmedian) fits the model equation y=ax+b to the data using the median median line (resistant line) technique, calculating the summary points x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, and y3. MedMed displays values for a (slope) and b (yintercept).
MedMed [Xlistname,Ylistname,freqlist,regequ] LinReg (ax+b)
LinReg(ax+b) (linear regression) fits the model equation y=ax+b to the data using a leastsquares fit. It displays values for a (slope) and b (yintercept); when DiagnosticOn is set, it also displays values for r2 and r. Chapter 12: Statistics 308 LinReg(ax+b) [Xlistname,Ylistname,freqlist,regequ] QuadReg (ax2+bx+c)
QuadReg (quadratic regression) fits the seconddegree polynomial y=ax2+bx+c to the data. It displays values for a, b, and c; when DiagnosticOn is set, it also displays a value for R2. For three data points, the equation is a polynomial fit; for four or more, it is a polynomial regression. At least three data points are required.
QuadReg [Xlistname,Ylistname,freqlist,regequ] CubicReg—(ax +bx +cx CubicReg—(ax 3+bx 2+cx +d)
CubicReg (cubic regression) fits the thirddegree polynomial y=ax 3+bx 2+cx+d to the data. It displays values for a, b, c, and d; when DiagnosticOn is set, it also displays a value for R2. For four points, the equation is a polynomial fit; for five or more, it is a polynomial regression. At least four points are required.
CubicReg [Xlistname,Ylistname,freqlist,regequ] QuartReg—(ax +bx +cx QuartReg—(ax 4+bx 3+cx 2+ dx+e)
QuartReg (quartic regression) fits the fourthdegree polynomial y=ax 4+bx 3+cx 2+dx+e to the data. It displays values for a, b, c, d, and e; when DiagnosticOn is set, it also displays a value for R2. For five points, the equation is a polynomial fit; for six or more, it is a polynomial regression. At least five points are required. Chapter 12: Statistics 309 QuartReg [Xlistname,Ylistname,freqlist,regequ] LinReg—(a+bx)
LinReg(a+bx) (linear regression) fits the model equation y=a+bx to the data using a leastsquares fit. It displays values for a (yintercept) and b (slope); when DiagnosticOn is set, it also displays values for r2 and r.
LinReg(a+bx) [Xlistname,Ylistname,freqlist,regequ] LnReg—(a+b ln(x))
LnReg (logarithmic regression) fits the model equation y=a+b ln(x) to the data using a leastsquares fit and transformed values ln(x) and y. It displays values for a and b; when DiagnosticOn is set, it also displays values for r2 and r. LnReg [Xlistname,Ylistname,freqlist,regequ] ExpReg—(ab ExpReg—(ab x)
ExpReg (exponential regression) fits the model equation y=abx to the data using a leastsquares fit and transformed values x and ln(y). It displays values for a and b; when DiagnosticOn is set, it also displays values for r2 and r. ExpReg [Xlistname,Ylistname,freqlist,regequ] PwrReg—(axb)
Chapter 12: Statistics 310 PwrReg (power regression) fits the model equation y=axb to the data using a leastsquares fit and transformed values ln(x) and ln(y). It displays values for a and b; when DiagnosticOn is set, it also displays values for r2 and r. PwrReg [Xlistname,Ylistname,freqlist,regequ] Logistic—c/ Logistic—c/ (1+a…ebx)
Logistic fits the model equation y=c/(1+a…eLbx) to the data using an iterative leastsquares fit. It displays values for a, b, and c. Logistic [Xlistname,Ylistname,freqlist,regequ] SinReg—a sin(bx+c)+d
SinReg (sinusoidal regression) fits the model equation y=a sin(bx+c)+d to the data using an iterative leastsquares fit. It displays values for a, b, c, and d. At least four data points are required. At least two data points per cycle are required in order to avoid aliased frequency estimates. SinReg [iterations,Xlistname,Ylistname,period,regequ] iterations is the maximum number of times the algorithm will iterate to find a solution. The value for iterations can be an integer ‚ 1 and 16; if not specified, the default is 3. The algorithm may find a solution before iterations is reached. Typically, larger values for iterations result in longer execution times and better accuracy for SinReg, and vice versa. A period guess is optional. If you do not specify period, the difference between time values in Xlistname must be equal and the time values must be ordered in ascending sequential
Chapter 12: Statistics 311 order. If you specify period, the algorithm may find a solution more quickly, or it may find a solution when it would not have found one if you had omitted a value for period. If you specify period, the differences between time values in Xlistname can be unequal.
Note: The output of SinReg is always in radians, regardless of the Radian/Degree mode setting. SinReg Example: Daylight Hours in Alaska for One Year Compute the regression model for the number of hours of daylight in Alaska during one year. 1 period Chapter 12: Statistics 312 With noisy data, you will achieve better convergence results when you specify an accurate estimate for period. You can obtain a period guess in either of two ways. • Plot the data and trace to determine the xdistance between the beginning and end of one complete period, or cycle. The illustration above and to the right graphically depicts a complete period, or cycle. Plot the data and trace to determine the xdistance between the beginning and end of N complete periods, or cycles. Then divide the total distance by N. • After your first attempt to use SinReg and the default value for iterations to fit the data, you may find the fit to be approximately correct, but not optimal. For an optimal fit, execute SinReg 16,Xlistname,Ylistname,2p/b where b is the value obtained from the previous SinReg execution. Manual Linear Fit Manual Linear Fit allows you to visually fit a linear function to a scatter plot. Manual Linear Fit is an option in the … / menu. After entering List data and viewing the StatPlot, select the ManualFit function. 1. Press … to display the Stat menu. Press ~ to select CALC. Press † several times to scroll down to select D:ManualFit. Press Í. This displays a freefloating cursor at the center of the display screen Chapter 12: Statistics 313 2. Press the cursor navigation keys (} †  ~ ) to move the cursor to the desired location. Press Í to select the first point. 3. Press the cursor navigation keys (} †  ~ ) to move the cursor to the second location. Press Í. This displays a line containing the two points selected. The linear function is displayed. The ManualFit Line equation displays in the form of Y=mX+b. The current value of the first parameter (m) is highlighted in the symbolic expression.
Modify parameter values Press the cursor navigation keys (  ~ ) to move from the first parameter (m) or (b) the second parameter. You can press Í and type a new parameter value. Press Í to display the new parameter value. When you edit the value of the selected parameter, the edit can include insert, delete, type over, or mathematical expression. The screen dynamically displays the revised parameter value. Press Í to complete the modification of the selected parameter, save the value, and refresh the displayed graph. The system displays the revised parameter value in the symbolic expression Y=mX+B, and refreshes the graph with the updated ManualFit Line. Chapter 12: Statistics 314 Select y 5 to finish the Manual Fit function. The calculator stores the current mX+b expression into Y1 and makes that function active for graphing. You can also select ManualFit while on the Home screen. You can then enter a different YVar such as Y4 and then press Í. This takes you to the Graph screen and then pastes the ManualFit equation in the specified YVar. In this example, Y4. Statistical Variables
The statistical variables are calculated and stored as indicated below. To access these variables for use in expressions, press , and select 5:Statistics. Then select the VARS menu shown in the column below under VARS menu. If you edit a list or change the type of analysis, all statistical variables are cleared.
1Var Stats 2Var Stats VARS menu XY Variables mean of x values sum of x values sum of x2 values sample standard deviation of x population standard deviation of x number of data points mean of y values sum of y values sum of y2 values sample standard deviation of y Other v Gx Gx2
Sx v Gx Gx2
Sx G G
XY XY XY XY sx
n sx
n w Gy Gy2
Sy G G
XY Chapter 12: Statistics 315 Variables population standard deviation of y sum of x … y minimum of x values maximum of x values minimum of y values maximum of y values 1st quartile median 3rd quartile regression/fit coefficients polynomial, Logistic, and SinReg coefficients correlation coefficient coefficient of determination regression equation summary points (MedMed only) 1Var Stats 2Var Stats Other VARS menu XY sy Gxy
minX maxX minX maxX minY maxY Q1 Med Q3 a, b a, b, c, d, e r r2 , R 2 RegEQ x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3 G
XY XY XY XY PTS PTS PTS EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ PTS and Q1 and Q3 The first quartile (Q1) is the median of points between minX and Med (median). The third quartile (Q3) is the median of points between Med and maxX.
Chapter 12: Statistics 316 Statistical Analysis in a Program
Entering Stat Data You can enter statistical data, calculate statistical results, and fit models to data from a program. You can enter statistical data into lists directly within the program (Chapter 11). Statistical Calculations To perform a statistical calculation from a program, follow these steps. 1. On a blank line in the program editor, select the type of calculation from the STAT CALC menu. 2. Enter the names of the lists to use in the calculation. Separate the list names with a comma. 3. Enter a comma and then the name of a Y= variable, if you want to store the regression equation to a Y= variable. Chapter 12: Statistics 317 Statistical Plotting
Steps for Plotting Statistical Data in Lists You can plot statistical data that is stored in lists. The six types of plots available are scatter plot, xyLine, histogram, modified box plot, regular box plot, and normal probability plot. You can define up to three plots. To plot statistical data in lists, follow these steps. 1. Store the stat data in one or more lists. 2. Select or deselect Y= functions as appropriate. 3. Define the stat plot. 4. Turn on the plots you want to display. 5. Define the viewing window. 6. Display and explore the graph. Chapter 12: Statistics 318 Scatter
Scatter (")plots plot the data points from Xlist and Ylist as coordinate pairs, showing each point as a box ( › ), cross ( + ), or dot ( ¦ ). Xlist and Ylist must be the same length. You can use the same list for Xlist and Ylist. xyLine
xyLine (Ó)is a scatter plot in which the data points are plotted and connected in order of appearance in Xlist and Ylist. You may want to use SortA( or SortD( to sort the lists before you plot them. Chapter 12: Statistics 319 Histogram
Histogram (Ò) plots onevariable data. The Xscl window variable value determines the width of each bar, beginning at Xmin. ZoomStat adjusts Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, and Ymax to include all values, and also adjusts Xscl. The inequality (Xmax N Xmin) à Xscl 47 must be true. A value that occurs on the edge of a bar is counted in the bar to the right. ModBoxplot
ModBoxplot (Õ) (modified box plot) plots onevariable data, like the regular box plot, except points that are 1.5 … Interquartile Range beyond the quartiles. (The Interquartile Range is defined as the difference between the third quartile Q3 and the first quartile Q1.) These points are plotted individually beyond the whisker, using the Mark (› or + or ¦) you select. You can trace these points, which are called outliers. The prompt for outlier points is x=, except when the outlier is the maximum point (maxX) or the minimum point (minX). When outliers exist, the end of each whisker will display x=. When no outliers exist, minX and maxX are the prompts for the end of each whisker. Q1, Med (median), and Q3 define the box. Box plots are plotted with respect to Xmin and Xmax, but ignore Ymin and Ymax. When two box plots are plotted, the first one plots at the top of the screen and the second plots Chapter 12: Statistics 320 in the middle. When three are plotted, the first one plots at the top, the second in the middle, and the third at the bottom. Boxplot
Boxplot (Ö)(regular box plot) plots onevariable data. The whiskers on the plot extend from the minimum data point in the set (minX) to the first quartile (Q1) and from the third quartile (Q3) to the maximum point (maxX). The box is defined by Q1, Med (median), and Q3. Box plots are plotted with respect to Xmin and Xmax, but ignore Ymin and Ymax. When two box plots are plotted, the first one plots at the top of the screen and the second plots in the middle. When three are plotted, the first one plots at the top, the second in the middle, and the third at the bottom. Chapter 12: Statistics 321 NormProbPlot
NormProbPlot (Ô) (normal probability plot) plots each observation X in Data List versus the corresponding quantile z of the standard normal distribution. If the plotted points lie close to a straight line, then the plot indicates that the data are normal. Enter a valid list name in the Data List field. Select X or Y for the Data Axis setting. • • If you select X, the TI84 Plus plots the data on the xaxis and the zvalues on the yaxis. If you select Y, the TI84 Plus plots the data on the yaxis and the zvalues on the xaxis. Defining the Plots To define a plot, follow these steps. Chapter 12: Statistics 322 1. Press y ,. The STAT PLOTS menu is displayed with the current plot definitions. 2. Select the plot you want to use. The stat plot editor is displayed for the plot you selected. 3. Press Í to select On if you want to plot the statistical data immediately. The definition is stored whether you select On or Off. 4. Select the type of plot. Each type prompts for the options checked in this table.
Data List Data Axis Plot Type XList YList Mark Freq " Scatter Ó xyLine Ò Histogram _ _ _ _ _ œ _ _ œ œ œ _ œ œ œ œ œ œ Chapter 12: Statistics 323 Plot Type XList YList Mark Freq Data List Data Axis Õ ModBoxplot Ö Boxplot Ô NormProbPlot _ _ œ œ œ œ _ œ _ _ _ œ œ œ _ œ œ _ 5. Enter list names or select options for the plot type. • • • • • •
Xlist (list name containing independent data) Ylist (list name containing dependent data) Mark (› or + or ¦) Freq (frequency list for Xlist elements; default is 1) Data List (list name for NormProbPlot) Data Axis (axis on which to plot Data List) Displaying Other Stat Plot Editors Each stat plot has a unique stat plot editor. The name of the current stat plot (Plot1, Plot2, or Plot3) is highlighted in the top line of the stat plot editor. To display the stat plot editor for a different plot, press } and ~ to move the cursor onto the name in the top line, and then press Í. The stat plot editor for the selected plot is displayed, and the selected name remains highlighted. Chapter 12: Statistics 324 Turning On and Turning Off Stat Plots
PlotsOn and PlotsOff allow you to turn on or turn off stat plots from the home screen or a program. With no plot number, PlotsOn turns on all plots and PlotsOff turns off all plots. With one or more plot numbers (1, 2, and 3), PlotsOn turns on specified plots, and PlotsOff turns off specified plots. PlotsOff [1,2,3] PlotsOn [1,2,3] Note: You also can turn on and turn off stat plots in the top line of the Y= editor (Chapter 3). Chapter 12: Statistics 325 Defining the Viewing Window Stat plots are displayed on the current graph. To define the viewing window, press p and enter values for the window variables. ZoomStat redefines the viewing window to display all statistical data points. Tracing a Stat Plot When you trace a scatter plot or xyLine, tracing begins at the first element in the lists. When you trace a histogram, the cursor moves from the top center of one column to the top center of the next, starting at the first column. When you trace a box plot, tracing begins at Med (the median). Press  to trace to Q1 and minX. Press ~ to trace to Q3 and maxX. When you press } or † to move to another plot or to another Y= function, tracing moves to the current or beginning point on that plot (not the nearest pixel). The ExprOn/ExprOff format setting applies to stat plots (Chapter 3). When ExprOn is selected, the plot number and plotted data lists are displayed in the topleft corner. Statistical Plotting in a Program
Defining a Stat Plot in a Program To display a stat plot from a program, define the plot, and then display the graph. Chapter 12: Statistics 326 To define a stat plot from a program, begin on a blank line in the program editor and enter data into one or more lists; then, follow these steps. 1. Press y , to display the STAT PLOTS menu. 2. Select the plot to define, which pastes Plot1(, Plot2(, or Plot3( to the cursor location. 3. Press y , ~ to display the STAT TYPE menu. 4. Select the type of plot, which pastes the name of the plot type to the cursor location. Chapter 12: Statistics 327 5. Press ¢. Enter the list names, separated by commas. 6. Press ¢ y ,  to display the STAT PLOT MARK menu. (This step is not necessary if you selected 3:Histogram or 5:Boxplot in step 4.) Select the type of mark (› or + or ¦) for each data point. The selected mark symbol is pasted to the cursor location. 7. Press ¤ Í to complete the command line. Displaying a Stat Plot from a Program To display a plot from a program, use the DispGraph instruction (Chapter 16) or any of the ZOOM instructions (Chapter 3). Chapter 12: Statistics 328 Chapter 12: Statistics 329 Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions
Getting Started: Mean Height of a Population
Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. Suppose you want to estimate the mean height of a population of women given the random sample below. Because heights among a biological population tend to be normally distributed, a t distribution confidence interval can be used when estimating the mean. The 10 height values below are the first 10 of 90 values, randomly generated from a normally distributed population with an assumed mean of 165.1 centimeters and a standard deviation of 6.35 centimeters (randNorm(165.1,6.35,90) with a seed of 789). Height (in centimeters) of Each of 10 Women 169.43 168.33 159.55 169.97 159.79 181.42 171.17 162.04 167.15 159.53 1. Press … Í to display the stat list editor. Press } to move the cursor onto L1, and then press y 6. The Name= prompt is displayed on the bottom line. The Ø cursor indicates that alphalock is on. The existing list name columns shift to the right.
Note: Your stat editor may not look like the one pictured here, depending on the lists you have already stored. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 330 2. Enter [H] [G] [H] [T] at the Name= prompt, and then press Í. The list to which you will store the women’s height data is created. Press † to move the cursor onto the first row of the list. HGHT(1)= is displayed on the bottom line. 3. Press 169 Ë 43 to enter the first height value. As you enter it, it is displayed on the bottom line. Press Í. The value is displayed in the first row, and the rectangular cursor moves to the next row. Enter the other nine height values the same way. 4. Press …  to display the STAT TESTS menu, and then press † until 8:TInterval is highlighted. 5. Press Í to select 8:TInterval. The inferential stat editor for TInterval is displayed. If Data is not selected for Inpt:, press  Í to select Data. Press † and [H] [G] [H] [T] at the List: prompt (alphalock is on). Press † † Ë 99 to enter a 99 percent confidence level at the CLevel: prompt. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 331 6. Press † to move the cursor onto Calculate, and then press Í. The confidence interval is calculated, and the TInterval results are displayed on the home screen. Interpret the results. The first line, (159.74,173.94), shows that the 99 percent confidence interval for the population mean is between about 159.74 centimeters and 173.94 centimeters. This is about a 14.2 centimeters spread. The .99 confidence level indicates that in a very large number of samples, we expect 99 percent of the intervals calculated to contain the population mean. The actual mean of the population sampled is 165.1 centimeters, which is in the calculated interval. The second line gives the mean height of the sample v used to compute this interval. The third line gives the sample standard deviation Sx. The bottom line gives the sample size n. To obtain a more precise bound on the population mean m of women’s heights, increase the sample size to 90. Use a sample mean v of 163.8 and sample standard deviation Sx Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 332 of 7.1 calculated from the larger random sample. This time, use the Stats (summary statistics) input option. 7. Press …  8 to display the inferential stat editor for TInterval. Press ~ Í to select Inpt:Stats. The editor changes so that you can enter summary statistics as input. 8. Press † 163 Ë 8 Í to store 163.8 to v. Press 7 Ë 1 Í to store 7.1 to Sx. Press 90 Í to store 90 to n. 9. Press † to move the cursor onto Calculate, and then press Í to calculate the new 99 percent confidence interval. The results are displayed on the home screen. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 333 If the height distribution among a population of women is normally distributed with a mean m of 165.1 centimeters and a standard deviation s of 6.35 centimeters, what height is exceeded by only 5 percent of the women (the 95th percentile)? 10. Press ‘ to clear the home screen. Press y = to display the DISTR (distributions) menu. 11. Press 3 to paste invNorm( to the home screen. Press Ë 95 ¢ 165 Ë 1 ¢ 6 Ë 35 ¤ Í. .95 is the area, 165.1 is m, and 6.35 is s. The result is displayed on the home screen; it shows that five percent of the women are taller than 175.5 centimeters. Now graph and shade the top 5 percent of the population. 12. Press p and set the window variables to these values.
Xmin=145 Xmax=185 Xscl=5 Ymin=L.02 Ymax=.08 Yscl=0 Xres=1 Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 334 13. Press y = ~ to display the DISTR DRAW menu. 14. Press Í to paste ShadeNorm( to the home screen. Press y Z ¢ 1 y D 99 ¢ 165 Ë 1 ¢ 6 Ë 35 ¤. bound. 1â99 is the upper bound. The normal curve is defined by a mean m of 165.1 and a standard deviation s of 6.35. 15. Press Í to plot and shade the normal curve.
Area is the area above the 95th percentile. low is the lower bound. up is the upper bound. Ans (175.5448205 from step 11) is the lower Inferential Stat Editors
Displaying the Inferential Stat Editors When you select a hypothesis test or confidence interval instruction from the home screen, the appropriate inferential statistics editor is displayed. The editors vary Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 335 according to each test or interval’s input requirements. Below is the inferential stat editor for TTest. Note: When you select the ANOVA( instruction, it is pasted to the home screen. ANOVA( does not have an editor screen. Using an Inferential Stat Editor To use an inferential stat editor, follow these steps. 1. Select a hypothesis test or confidence interval from the STAT TESTS menu. The appropriate editor is displayed. 2. Select Data or Stats input, if the selection is available. The appropriate editor is displayed. 3. Enter real numbers, list names, or expressions for each argument in the editor. 4. Select the alternative hypothesis (ƒÄ, <, or >) against which to test, if the selection is available. 5. Select No or Yes for the Pooled option, if the selection is available. 6. Select Calculate or Draw (when Draw is available) to execute the instruction. • • When you select Calculate, the results are displayed on the home screen. When you select Draw, the results are displayed in a graph.
336 Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions This chapter describes the selections in the above steps for each hypothesis test and confidence interval instruction.
Select Data or Stats input Enter values for arguments Select an alternative hypothesis Select Calculate or Draw output Selecting Data or Stats Most inferential stat editors prompt you to select one of two types of input. (1PropZInt and 2PropZTest, 1PropZInt and 2PropZInt, c2Test, c2GOFTest, LinRegTInt, and LinRegTTest do not.) • • Select Data to enter the data lists as input. Select Stats to enter summary statistics, such as v, Sx, and n, as input. To select Data or Stats, move the cursor to either Data or Stats, and then press Í. Entering the Values for Arguments Inferential stat editors require a value for every argument. If you do not know what a particular argument symbol represents, see the Inferential Statistics Input Descriptions tables. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 337 When you enter values in any inferential stat editor, the TI84 Plus stores them in memory so that you can run many tests or intervals without having to reenter every value. >) Selecting an Alternative Hypothesis (Äƒ < >) Most of the inferential stat editors for the hypothesis tests prompt you to select one of three alternative hypotheses. • • • The first is a ƒ alternative hypothesis, such as mƒm0 for the ZTest. The second is a < alternative hypothesis, such as m1<m2 for the 2SampTTest. The third is a > alternative hypothesis, such as p1>p2 for the 2PropZTest. To select an alternative hypothesis, move the cursor to the appropriate alternative, and then press Í. Selecting the Pooled Option
Pooled (2SampTTest and 2SampTInt only) specifies whether the variances are to be pooled for the calculation. • • Select No if you do not want the variances pooled. Population variances can be unequal. Select Yes if you want the variances pooled. Population variances are assumed to be equal. To select the Pooled option, move the cursor to Yes, and then press Í. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 338 Selecting Calculate or Draw for a Hypothesis Test After you have entered all arguments in an inferential stat editor for a hypothesis test, you must select whether you want to see the calculated results on the home screen (Calculate) or on the graph screen (Draw). • •
Calculate calculates the test results and displays the outputs on the home screen. Draw draws a graph of the test results and displays the test statistic and pvalue with the graph. The window variables are adjusted automatically to fit the graph. To select Calculate or Draw, move the cursor to either Calculate or Draw, and then press Í. The instruction is immediately executed. Selecting Calculate for a Confidence Interval After you have entered all arguments in an inferential stat editor for a confidence interval, select Calculate to display the results. The Draw option is not available. When you press Í, Calculate calculates the confidence interval results and displays the outputs on the home screen. Bypassing the Inferential Stat Editors To paste a hypothesis test or confidence interval instruction to the home screen without displaying the corresponding inferential stat editor, select the instruction you want from the CATALOG menu. Appendix A describes the input syntax for each hypothesis test and confidence interval instruction. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 339 Note: You can paste a hypothesis test or confidence interval instruction to a command line in a program. From within the program editor, select the instruction from either the
CATALOG (Chapter 15) or the STAT TESTS menu. STAT TESTS Menu
STAT TESTS Menu To display the STAT TESTS menu, press … . When you select an inferential statistics instruction, the appropriate inferential stat editor is displayed. Most STAT TESTS instructions store some output variables to memory. For a list of these variables, see the Test and Interval Output Variables table. EDIT CALC TESTS 1: ZTest... 2: TTest... 3: 2SampZTest... 4: 2SampTTest... 5: 1PropZTest... 6: 2PropZTest... 7: ZInterval... 8: TInterval... 9: 2SampZInt...
Test for 1 m, known s Test for 1 m, unknown s Test comparing 2 m’s, known s’s Test comparing 2 m’s, unknown s’s Test for 1 proportion Test comparing 2 proportions Confidence interval for 1 m, known s Confidence interval for 1 m, unknown s Confidence interval for difference of 2 m’s, known s’s Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 340 EDIT CALC TESTS 0: 2SampTInt... A: 1PropZInt... B: 2PropZInt... C: c2Test... D: c2GOF Test... E: 2SampÛTest... F: LinRegTTest... G: LinRegTInt... H: ANOVA(
Confidence interval for difference of 2 m’s, unknown s’s Confidence interval for 1 proportion Confidence interval for difference of 2 proportions Chisquare test for 2way tables Chisquare Goodness of Fit test Test comparing 2 s’s t test for regression slope and r Confidence interval for linear regression slope coefficient b Oneway analysis of variance Note: When a new test or interval is computed, all previous output variables are invalidated. Inferential Stat Editors for the STAT TESTS Instructions In this chapter, the description of each STAT TESTS instruction shows the unique inferential stat editor for that instruction with example arguments. • • Descriptions of instructions that offer the Data/Stats input choice show both types of input screens. Descriptions of instructions that do not offer the Data/Stats input choice show only one input screen. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 341 The description then shows the unique output screen for that instruction with the example results. • • Descriptions of instructions that offer the Calculate/Draw output choice show both types of screens: calculated and graphic results. Descriptions of instructions that offer only the Calculate output choice show the calculated results on the home screen. ZTest
ZTest (onesample z test; item 1) performs a hypothesis test for a single unknown population mean m when the population standard deviation s is known. It tests the null hypothesis H0: m= m0 against one of the alternatives below. • • • Ha: mƒm0 (m:ƒm0) Ha: m<m0 (m:<m0) Ha: m> m0 (m:>m0) In the example: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 342 L1={299.4 297.7 301 298.9 300.2 297} Data Input: Stats Calculated results: Drawn results: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 343 Note: All STAT TESTS examples assume a fixeddecimal mode setting of 4 (Chapter 1). If you set the decimal mode to Float or a different fixeddecimal setting, your output may differ from the output in the examples. TTest
TTest (onesample t test; item 2) performs a hypothesis test for a single unknown population mean m when the population standard deviation s is unknown. It tests the null hypothesis H0: m=m0 against one of the alternatives below. • • • Ha: mƒm0 (m:ƒm0) Ha: m<m0 (m:<m0) Ha: m> m0 (m:>m0) In the example:
TEST={91.9 97.8 111.4 122.3 105.4 95} Data Input: Stats Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 344 Data Calculated results: Stats Drawn results: 2SampZTest
2SampZTest (twosample z test; item 3) tests the equality of the means of two populations (m1 a nd m2) based on independent samples when both population standard deviations (s1 and s2) are known. The null hypothesis H0: m1= m2 is tested against one of the alternatives below. • • • Ha: m1ƒm2 (m1:ƒm2) Ha: m1< m2 (m1:<m2) Ha: m1> m2 (m1:>m2) Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 345 In the example:
LISTA={154 109 137 115 140} LISTB={108 115 126 92 146} Data Input: Stats Calculated results: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 346 Data Stats Drawn results: 2SampTTest
2SampTTest (twosample t test; item 4) tests the equality of the means of two populations (m1 a nd m2) based on independent samples when neither population standard deviation (s1 or s2) is known. The null hypothesis H0: m1= m2 is tested against one of the alternatives below. • • • Ha: m1ƒm2 (m1:ƒm2) Ha: m1< m2 (m1:<m2) Ha: m1> m2 (m1:>m2) In the example: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 347 SAMP1={12.207 16.869 25.05 22.429 8.456 10.589} SAMP2={11.074 9.686 12.064 9.351 8.182 6.642} Data Input: Stats Calculated results: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 348 Data Drawn results: Stats 1PropZTest
1PropZTest (oneproportion z test; item 5) computes a test for an unknown proportion of successes (prop). It takes as input the count of successes in the sample x and the count of observations in the sample n. 1PropZTest tests the null hypothesis H0: prop=p0 against one of the alternatives below. • • • Ha: propƒp 0 (prop:ƒp0) Ha: prop<p0 (prop:<p0) Ha: prop>p 0 (prop:>p0)
Input: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 349 Calculated results: Drawn results: 2PropZTest
2PropZTest (twoproportion z test; item 6) computes a test to compare the proportion of successes (p1 and p2) from two populations. It takes as input the count of successes in each sample (x1 and x2) and the count of observations in each sample (n1 and n2). 2PropZTest tests the null hypothesis H0: p1=p2 (using the pooled sample proportion Ç) against one of the alternatives below. • • Ha: p1ƒp2 (p1:ƒp2) Ha: p1<p2 (p1:<p2) Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 350 • Ha: p1>p2 (p1:>p2)
Input: Calculated results: Drawn results: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 351 ZInterval
ZInterval (onesample z confidence interval; item 7) computes a confidence interval for an unknown population mean m when the population standard deviation s is known. The computed confidence interval depends on the userspecified confidence level. In the example:
L1={299.4 297.7 301 298.9 300.2 297} Data Input: Stats Calculated results: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 352 TInterval
TInterval (onesample t confidence interval; item 8) computes a confidence interval for an unknown population mean m when the population standard deviation s is unknown. The computed confidence interval depends on the userspecified confidence level. In the example:
L6={1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9} Data Input: Stats Calculated results: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 353 2SampZInt
2SampZInt (twosample z confidence interval; item 9) computes a confidence interval for the difference between two population means ( m1Nm2) when both population standard deviations ( s1 and s2) are known. The computed confidence interval depends on the userspecified confidence level. In the example:
LISTC={154 109 137 115 140} LISTD={108 115 126 92 146} Data Input: Stats Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 354 Data Calculated results: Stats 2SampTInt
2SampTInt (twosample t confidence interval; item 0) computes a confidence interval for the difference between two population means (m1Nm2) when both population standard deviations (s1 and s2) are unknown. The computed confidence interval depends on the userspecified confidence level. In the example: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 355 SAMP1={12.207 16.869 25.05 22.429 8.456 10.589} SAMP2={11.074 9.686 12.064 9.351 8.182 6.642} Data Input: Stats Calculated results: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 356 1PropZInt
1PropZInt (oneproportion z confidence interval; item A) computes a confidence interval for an unknown proportion of successes. It takes as input the count of successes in the sample x and the count of observations in the sample n. The computed confidence interval depends on the userspecified confidence level.
Input: Calculated results: 2PropZInt
2PropZInt (twoproportion z confidence interval; item B) computes a confidence interval for the difference between the proportion of successes in two populations (p1Np2). It takes as input the count of successes in each sample (x1 and x2) and the count of Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 357 observations in each sample (n1 and n2). The computed confidence interval depends on the userspecified confidence level.
Input: Calculated results: c2Test c2Test (chisquare test; item C) computes a chisquare test for association on the twoway table of counts in the specified Observed matrix. The null hypothesis H 0 for a twoway table is: no association exists between row variables and column variables. The alternative hypothesis is: the variables are related. Before computing a c2Test, enter the observed counts in a matrix. Enter that matrix variable name at the Observed: prompt in the c2.Test editor; default=[A]. At the Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 358 Expected: prompt, enter the matrix variable name to which you want the computed expected counts to be stored; default=[B]. Matrix editor: Note: Press y ú ~ ~ 1 to select 1:[A] from the MATRX EDIT menu. Input: Note: Press y ú †] Í to display matrix [B]. Calculated results: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 359 Drawn results: c2GOFTest c2GOFTest (Chi Square Goodness of Fit; item D) performs a test to confirm that sample data is from a population that conforms to a specified distribution. For example, c2 GOF can confirm that the sample data came from a normal distribution. In the example:
list 1={16,25,22,8,10} list 2={16.2,21.6,16.2,14.4,12.6} The Chisquare Goodness of Fit input screen: Note: Press … ~ ~ to select TESTS. Press † several times to select D:X2GOFTest... Press Í. To enter data for df (degree of freedom), press † † †. Type 4. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 360 Calculated results: Drawn results: 2SampFTest
2SampÜTest (twosample Ütest; item E) computes an Ütest to compare two normal population standard deviations (s1 a nd s2). The population means and standard deviations are all unknown. 2SampÜTest, which uses the ratio of sample variances Sx12/Sx22, tests the null hypothesis H0: s1= s2 against one of the alternatives below. • • • Ha: s1ƒs2 (s1:ƒs2) Ha: s1<s2 (s1:<s2) Ha: s1>s2 (s1:>s2) Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 361 In the example:
SAMP4={ SAMP5={ 7 L1 L4 12 18 L1 Data 17 L3 L3
3 L5 L5 1 5 10 2 11 L11
Stats L2} L1 L3} Input: Calculated results: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 362 Data Drawn results: Stats LinRegTTest
LinRegTTest (linear regression t test; item F) computes a linear regression on the given data and a t test on the value of slope b and the correlation coefficient r for the equation y=a+bx. It tests the null hypothesis H0: b=0 (equivalently, r=0) against one of the alternatives below. • • • Ha: bƒ0 and rƒ0 (b & r:Äƒ0) Ha: b<0 and r<0 (b & r:<0) Ha: b>0 and r>0 (b & r:>0) The regression equation is automatically stored to RegEQ (VARS Statistics EQ secondary menu). If you enter a Y= variable name at the RegEQ: prompt, the calculated regression equation is automatically stored to the specified Y= equation. In the example below, the regression equation is stored to Y1, which is then selected (turned on). In the example:
L3={ L4={ 38 41 56 63 59 70 64 72 74} 84} Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 363 Input: Calculated results: When LinRegTTest is executed, the list of residuals is created and stored to the list name RESID automatically. RESID is placed on the LIST NAMES menu.
Note: For the regression equation, you can use the fixdecimal mode setting to control the number of digits stored after the decimal point (Chapter 1). However, limiting the number of digits to a small number could affect the accuracy of the fit. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 364 LinRegTInt LinRegTInt computes a linear regression T confidence interval for the slope coefficient b. If the confidence interval contains 0, this is insufficient evidence to indicate that the data exhibits a linear relationship. In the example:
list 1={4, 5, 6, 7, 8} list 2={1, 2, 3, 3.5, 4.5} LinRegTInt input screen: Note: Press … ~ ~ to select TESTS. Press † several times to select G:LinRegTint... Press Í. Press † several times to select Calculate. Press Í. Calculated results: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 365 Xlist, Ylist is the list of independent and dependent variables. The list containing the Freq (frequency) values for the data is stored in List. The default is 1. All elements must be real numbers. Each element in the Freq list is the frequency of occurence for each corresponding data point in the input list specified in the List fields. RegEQ (optional) is the designated Yn variable for storing the regression equation. StoreRegEqn (optional) is the designated variable for storing the regression equation. The C level is the Confidence level probability with default = .95. ANOVA(
ANOVA( (oneway analysis of variance; item H) computes a oneway analysis of variance for comparing the means of two to 20 populations. The ANOVA procedure for comparing these means involves analysis of the variation in the sample data. The null hypothesis H0: m1= m2=...= mk is tested against the alternative Ha: not all m1...mk are equal.
ANOVA(list1,list2[,...,list20]) In the example:
L1={7 4 6 6 5} L2={6 5 5 8 7} L3={4 7 6 7 6} Input: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 366 Calculated results: Note: SS is sum of squares and MS is mean square. Inferential Statistics Input Descriptions
The tables in this section describe the inferential statistics inputs discussed in this chapter. You enter values for these inputs in the inferential stat editors. The tables present the inputs in the same order that they appear in this chapter.
Input Description Hypothesized value of the population mean that you are testing. The known population standard deviation; must be a real number > 0. m0 s Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 367 Input List Freq Calculate/Draw Description The name of the list containing the data you are testing. The name of the list containing the frequency values for the data in List. Default=1. All elements must be integers  0. Determines the type of output to generate for tests and intervals. Calculate displays the output on the home screen. In tests, Draw draws a graph of the results. Summary statistics (mean, standard deviation, and sample size) for the onesample tests and intervals. The known population standard deviation from the first population for the twosample tests and intervals. Must be a real number > 0. The known population standard deviation from the second population for the twosample tests and intervals. Must be a real number > 0. The names of the lists containing the data you are testing for the twosample tests and intervals. Defaults are L1 and L2, respectively. The names of the lists containing the frequencies for the data in List1 and List2 for the twosample tests and intervals. Defaults=1. All elements must be integers  0. for sample one and sample two in the twosample tests and intervals. v, Sx, n s1 s2 List1, List2 Freq1, Freq2 v1, Sx1, n1, v2, Sx2, n2 Summary statistics (mean, standard deviation, and sample size) Pooled Specifies whether variances are to be pooled for 2SampTTest and 2SampTInt. No instructs the TI84 Plus not to pool the variances. Yes instructs the TI84 Plus to pool the variances. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 368 Input p0 x n x1 x2 n1 n2 CLevel Description The expected sample proportion for 1PropZTest. Must be a real number, such that 0 < p0 < 1. The count of successes in the sample for the 1PropZTest and 1PropZInt. Must be an integer  0. The count of observations in the sample for the 1PropZTest and 1PropZInt. Must be an integer > 0. The count of successes from sample one for the 2PropZTest and 2PropZInt. Must be an integer  0. The count of successes from sample two for the 2PropZTest and 2PropZInt. Must be an integer  0. The count of observations in sample one for the 2PropZTest and 2PropZInt. Must be an integer > 0. The count of observations in sample two for the 2PropZTest and 2PropZInt. Must be an integer > 0. The confidence level for the interval instructions. Must be ‚ 0 and < 100. If it is ‚ 1, it is assumed to be given as a percent and is divided by 100. Default=0.95. The matrix name that represents the columns and rows for the observed values of a twoway table of counts for the c2Test and Observed (Matrix) c2GOFTest. Observed must contain all integers  0. Matrix
dimensions must be at least 2×2. Expected (Matrix) The matrix name that specifies where the expected values should be stored. Expected is created upon successful completion of the c2Test and c2GOFTest. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 369 Input df Description df (degree of freedom) represents (number of sample categories)  (number of estimated parameters for the selected distribution + 1). The names of the lists containing the data for LinRegTTest and LinRegTInt. Defaults are L1 and L2, respectively. The dimensions of Xlist and Ylist must be the same. The prompt for the name of the Y= variable where the calculated regression equation is to be stored. If a Y= variable is specified, that equation is automatically selected (turned on). The default is to store the regression equation to the RegEQ variable only. Xlist, Ylist RegEQ Test and Interval Output Variables
The inferential statistics variables are calculated as indicated below. To access these variables for use in expressions, press 5 (5:Statistics), and then select the VARS menu listed in the last column below.
LinRegTTest, ANOVA p t, Ü df df VARS Menu TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST Variables pvalue test statistics degrees of freedom sample mean of x values for sample 1 and sample 2 sample standard deviation of x for sample 1 and sample 2 Tests p z, t, c2, Ü df Intervals v1, v2
Sx1, Sx2 v1, v2
Sx1, Sx2 Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 370 Variables number of data points for sample 1 and sample 2 pooled standard deviation estimated sample proportion estimated sample proportion for population 1 estimated sample proportion for population 2 confidence interval pair mean of x values sample standard deviation of x number of data points standard error about the line regression/fit coefficients correlation coefficient coefficient of determination regression equation Tests n1, n2 SxP Intervals n1, n2 SxP LinRegTTest, ANOVA VARS Menu TEST SxP TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST XY XY XY ‚Ç ‚Ç1 ‚Ç2 ‚Ç ‚Ç1 ‚Ç2
lower, upper v
Sx n v
Sx n s a, b r r2 RegEQ TEST EQ EQ EQ EQ Note: The variables listed above cannot be archived. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 371 Distribution Functions
DISTR menu To display the DISTR menu, press y =. DISTR DRAW 1: normalpdf( 2: normalcdf( 3: invNorm( 4: invT( 5: tpdf( 6: tcdf( 7: c2pdf( 8: c2cdf 9: Üpdf( 0: Ücdf( A: binompdf(
nn probability density function nn cumulative distribution function Inverse cumulative normal distribution Inverse cumulative Studentt distribution Studentt probability density Studentt distribution probability Chisquare probability density Chisquare distribution probability wÜprobability density wÜdistribution probability
Binomial probability Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 372 DISTR DRAW B: binomcdf( C: poissonpdf( D: poissoncdf( E: geometpdf( F: geometcdf(
Binomial cumulative density Poisson probability Poisson cumulative density Geometric probability Geometric cumulative density Note: L1â99 and 1â99 specify infinity. If you want to view the area left of upperbound, for example, specify lowerbound= L1â99. normalpdf(
normalpdf( computes the probability density function (pdf) for the normal distribution at a specified x value. The defaults are mean m=0 and standard deviation s=1. To plot the normal distribution, paste normalpdf( to the Y= editor. The probability density function (pdf) is:
(x – µ) – 1 2 2 σ ,σ > 0 f ( x ) =  e 2 πσ –
2 Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 373 normalpdf(x[,m,s]) Note: For this example, Xmin = 28 Xmax = 42 Ymin = 0 Ymax = .2 Xscl = 1 Yscl = .1 Note: For plotting the normal distribution, you can set window variables Xmin and Xmax so that the mean m falls between them, and then select 0:ZoomFit from the ZOOM menu. normalcdf(
normalcdf( computes the normal distribution probability between lowerbound and upperbound for the specified mean m and standard deviation s. The defaults are m=0 and s=1.
normalcdf(lowerbound,upperbound[,m,s]) Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 374 invNorm(
invNorm( computes the inverse cumulative normal distribution function for a given area under the normal distribution curve specified by mean m and standard deviation s. It calculates the x value associated with an area to the left of the x value. 0 area 1 must be true. The defaults are m=0 and s=1.
invNorm(area[,m,s]) invT(
invT( computes the inverse cumulative Studentt probability function specified by Degree of Freedom, df for a given Area under the curve.
invT(area,df) Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 375 tpdf(
tpdf( computes the probability density function (pdf) for the Studentt distribution at a specified x value. df (degrees of freedom) must be > 0. To plot the Studentt distribution, paste tpdf( to the Y= editor. The probability density function (pdf) is: Γ [ ( df + 1 ) /2 ] f ( x ) = Γ ( df ⁄ 2 )
tpdf(x,df) ( 1 + x / df ) π df 2 – ( df + 1 ) /2 Note: For this example, Xmin = L4.5 Xmax = 4.5 Ymin = 0 Ymax = .4 tcdf(
tcdf( computes the Studentt distribution probability between lowerbound and upperbound for the specified df (degrees of freedom), which must be > 0. tcdf(lowerbound,upperbound,df) Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 376 c2pdf( c2pdf( computes the probability density function (pdf) for the c2 (chisquare) distribution at a specified x value. df (degrees of freedom) must be an integer > 0. To plot the c2 distribution, paste c2pdf( to the Y= editor. The probability density function (pdf) is:
df /2 df ⁄ 2 – 1 – x /2 1 f ( x ) =  ( 1/2 ) x e ,x ≥ 0 Γ ( df ⁄ 2 ) c2pdf(x,df)
Note: For this example, Xmin = 0 Xmax = 30 Ymin = L.02 Ymax = .132 Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 377 c2cdf( c2cdf( computes the c2 (chisquare) distribution probability between lowerbound and upperbound for the specified df (degrees of freedom), which must be an integer > 0. c2cdf(lowerbound,upperbound,df) Fpdf( Üpdf( computes the probability density function (pdf) for the Ü distribution at a specified x value. numerator df (degrees of freedom) and denominator df must be integers > 0. To plot the Ü distribution, paste Üpdf( to the Y= editor. The probability density function (pdf) is:
– ( n + d ) /2 Γ [ ( n + d ) /2 ] n n /2 n /2 – 1 f ( x ) =  ⎛  ⎞ x ( 1 + nx / d ) ,x ≥ 0 Γ ( n /2 )Γ ( d /2 ) ⎝ d ⎠ where n = numerator degrees of freedom d = denominator degrees of freedom Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 378 Üpdf(x,numerator df,denominator df)
Note: For this example, Xmin = 0 Xmax = 5 Ymin = 0 Ymax = 1 Fcdf( Ücdf( computes the Ü distribution probability between lowerbound and upperbound for the specified numerator df (degrees of freedom) and denominator df. numerator df and denominator df must be integers > 0. Ücdf(lowerbound,upperbound,numerator df,denominator df) binompdf
binompdf( computes a probability at x for the discrete binomial distribution with the specified numtrials and probability of success (p) on each trial. x can be an integer or a list Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 379 of integers. 0p1 must be true. numtrials must be an integer > 0. If you do not specify x, a list of probabilities from 0 to numtrials is returned. The probability density function (pdf) is:
n–x nx f(x) = ⎛ ⎞ p (1 – p) ,x = 0,1,..., n ⎝x ⎠ where n = numtrials
binompdf(numtrials,p[,x]) binomcdf(
binomcdf( computes a cumulative probability at x for the discrete binomial distribution with the specified numtrials and probability of success (p) on each trial. x can be a real number or a list of real numbers. 0p1 must be true. numtrials must be an integer > 0. If you do not specify x, a list of cumulative probabilities is returned. binomcdf(numtrials,p[,x]) Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 380 poissonpdf(
poissonpdf( computes a probability at x for the discrete Poisson distribution with the specified mean m, which must be a real number > 0. x can be an integer or a list of integers. The probability density function (pdf) is: f ( x ) = e µ ⁄ x ! ,x = 0,1,2,...
poissonpdf(m,x) –µ x poissoncdf(
poissoncdf( computes a cumulative probability at x for the discrete Poisson distribution with the specified mean m, which must be a real number > 0. x can be a real number or a list of real numbers.
poissoncdf(m,x) geometpdf(
geometpdf( computes a probability at x, the number of the trial on which the first success occurs, for the discrete geometric distribution with the specified probability of success p. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 381 0p1 must be true. x can be an integer or a list of integers. The probability density function (pdf) is: f(x) = p(1 – p)
geometpdf(p,x)
x–1 ,x = 1,2,... geometcdf(
geometcdf( computes a cumulative probability at x, the number of the trial on which the first success occurs, for the discrete geometric distribution with the specified probability of success p. 0p1 must be true. x can be a real number or a list of real numbers. geometcdf(p,x) Distribution Shading
DISTR DRAW Menu To display the DISTR DRAW menu, press y = ~. DISTR DRAW instructions draw various types of density functions, shade the area specified by lowerbound and upperbound, and display the computed area value.
Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 382 To clear the drawings, select 1:ClrDraw from the DRAW menu (Chapter 8).
Note: Before you execute a DISTR DRAW instruction, you must set the window variables so that the desired distribution fits the screen. DISTR DRAW 1: ShadeNorm( 2: Shade_t( 3: Shade c2( 4: ShadeÜ(
Shades normal distribution. Shades Studentt distribution. Shades c2 distribution. Shades Üdistribution. Note: L1â99 and 1â99 specify infinity. If you want to view the area left of upperbound, for example, specify lowerbound=L1â99. ShadeNorm(
ShadeNorm( draws the normal density function specified by mean m and standard deviation s and shades the area between lowerbound and upperbound. The defaults are m=0 and s=1. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 383 ShadeNorm(lowerbound,upperbound[,m,s]) Note: For this example, Xmin = 55 Xmax = 72 Ymin = L.05 Ymax = .2 Shade_t(
Shade_t( draws the density function for the Studentt distribution specified by df (degrees of freedom) and shades the area between lowerbound and upperbound. Shade_t(lowerbound,upperbound,df) Note: For this example, Xmin = L3 Xmax = 3 Ymin = L.15 Ymax = .5 Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 384 Shadec2(
Shadec2( draws the density function for the c2 (chisquare) distribution specified by df (degrees of freedom) and shades the area between lowerbound and upperbound. Shadec2(lowerbound,upperbound,df) Note: For this example, Xmin = 0 Xmax = 35 Ymin = L.025 Ymax = .1 ShadeF(
ShadeÜ( draws the density function for the Ü distribution specified by numerator df (degrees of freedom) and denominator df and shades the area between lowerbound and upperbound. Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 385 ShadeÜ(lowerbound,upperbound,numerator df,denominator df) Note: For this example, Xmin = 0 Xmax = 5 Ymin = L.25 Ymax = .9 Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics and Distributions 386 Chapter 14: Applications
The Applications Menu
The TI84 Plus comes with Finance and EasyData App and several other applications already listed on the APPLICATIONS menu. Except for the Finance application, you can add and remove applications as space permits. The Finance application is built into the TI84 Plus code and cannot be deleted. You can buy additional TI84 Plus software applications that allow you to customize further your calculator’s functionality. The calculator reserves 1.54 M of space within ROM memory specifically for applications. Your TI84 Plus includes Flash applications in addition to the ones mentioned above. Press ŒÎ to see the complete list of applications that came with your calculator. Documentation for applications are on the Texas Instruments Web site at: education.ti.com/guides . Steps for Running the Finance Application Follow these basic steps when using the Finance application. 1. Press Œ Í to select the Finance application. Chapter 14: Applications 387 2. Select from list of functions. Getting Started: Financing a Car
Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. You have found a car you would like to buy. The car costs 9,000. You can afford payments of 250 per month for four years. What annual percentage rate (APR) will make it possible for you to afford the car? 1. Press z † ~ ~ ~ Í to set the fixeddecimal mode setting to 2. The TI84 Plus will display all numbers with two decimal places). 2. Press Œ Í to select 1:Finance from the APPLICATIONS menu. Chapter 14: Applications 388 3. Press Í to select 1:TVM Solver from the CALC VARS menu. The TVM Solver is displayed. Press 48 Í to store 48 months to Ú. Press † 9000 Í to store 9,000 to PV. Press Ì 250 Í to store L250 to PMT. (Negation indicates cash outflow.) Press 0 Í to store 0 to FV. Press 12 Í to store 12 payments per year to P/Y and 12 compounding periods per year to C/Y. Setting P/Y to 12 will compute an annual percentage rate (compounded monthly) for æ. Press † Í to select PMT:END, which indicates that payments are due at the end of each period. 4. Press } } } } } } to move the cursor to the prompt. Press ƒ \ to solve for æ. What APR should you look for? Getting Started: Computing Compound Interest
At what annual interest rate, compounded monthly, will 1,250 accumulate to 2,000 in 7 years? Chapter 14: Applications 389 Note: Because there are no payments when you solve compound interest problems, PMT must be set to 0 and P/Y must be set to 1. 1. Press Œ Í to select 1:Finance from the APPLICATIONS menu. 2. Press Í to select 1:TVM Solver from the CALC VARS menu. The TVM Solver is displayed. Press 7 to enter the number of periods in years. Press † † Ì 1250 to enter the present value as a cash outflow (investment). Press † 0 to specify no payments. Press † 2000 to enter the future value as a cash inflow (return). Press † 1 to enter payment periods per year. Press † 12 to set compounding periods per year to 12. 3. Press } } } } } to place the cursor on the æ prompt. 4. Press ƒ \ to solve for æ, the annual interest rate. Chapter 14: Applications 390 Using the TVM Solver
Using Using the TVM Solver The TVM Solver displays the timevalueofmoney (TVM) variables. Given four variable values, the TVM Solver solves for the fifth variable. The FINANCE VARS menu section describes the five TVM variables (Ú, æ, PV, PMT, and FV) and P/Y and C/Y.
PMT: END BEGIN in the TVM Solver corresponds to the FINANCE CALC menu items Pmt_End (payment at the end of each period) and Pmt_Bgn (payment at the beginning of each period). To solve for an unknown TVM variable, follow these steps. 1. Press Œ Í Í to display the TVM Solver. The screen below shows the default values with the fixeddecimal mode set to two decimal places. 2. Enter the known values for four TVM variables.
Note: Enter cash inflows as positive numbers and cash outflows as negative numbers. Chapter 14: Applications 391 3. Enter a value for P/Y, which automatically enters the same value for C/Y; if P/Y ƒ C/Y, enter a unique value for C/Y. 4. Select END or BEGIN to specify the payment method. 5. Place the cursor on the TVM variable for which you want to solve. 6. Press ƒ \. The answer is computed, displayed in the TVM Solver, and stored to the appropriate TVM variable. An indicator square in the left column designates the solution variable. Using the Financial Functions
Entering Cash Inflows and Cash Outflows When using the TI84 Plus financial functions, you must enter cash inflows (cash received) as positive numbers and cash outflows (cash paid) as negative numbers. The TI84 Plus follows this convention when computing and displaying answers. Chapter 14: Applications 392 FINANCE CALC Menu To display the FINANCE CALC menu, press ÎŒ Í. CALC VARS 1: TVM Solver... Displays the TVM Solver. 2: tvm_Pmt 3: tvm_¾æ 4: tvm_PV 5: tvm_òÚ 6: tvm_FV 7: npv( 8: irr( 9: bal( 0: GPrn( A: GInt( B: 4Nom( C: 4Eff( D: dbd( E: Pmt_End F: Pmt_Bgn
Computes the amount of each payment. Computes the interest rate per year. Computes the present value. Computes the number of payment periods. Computes the future value. Computes the net present value. Computes the internal rate of return. Computes the amortization sched. balance. Computes the amort. sched. princ. sum. Computes the amort. sched. interest sum. Computes the nominal interest rate. Computes the effective interest rate. Calculates the days between two dates. Selects ordinary annuity (end of period). Selects annuity due (beginning of period). Use these functions to set up and perform financial calculations on the home screen.
Chapter 14: Applications 393 TVM Solver TVM Solver displays the TVM Solver. Calculating Time Value of Money (TVM)
Calculating Time Value of Money Use timevalueofmoney (TVM) functions (menu items 2 through 6) to analyze financial instruments such as annuities, loans, mortgages, leases, and savings. Each TVM function takes zero to six arguments, which must be real numbers. The values that you specify as arguments for TVM functions are not stored to the TVM variables.
Note: To store a value to a TVM variable, use the TVM Solver or use ¿ and any TVM variable on the FINANCE VARS menu. If you enter less than six arguments, the TI84 Plus substitutes a previously stored TVM variable value for each unspecified argument. If you enter any arguments with a TVM function, you must place the argument or arguments in parentheses. tvm_Pmt
tvm_Pmt computes the amount of each payment. Chapter 14: Applications 394 tvm_Pmt[(òÚ,¾æ,PV,FV,P/Y,C/Y)] Note: In the example above, the values are stored to the TVM variables in the TVM Solver. Then the payment (tvm_Pmt) is computed on the home screen using the values in the TVM Solver. Next, the interest rate is changed to 9.5 to illustrate the effect on the payment amount. tvm_I%
tvm_æ computes the annual interest rate. tvm_¾æ [(Ú,PV,PMT,FV,P/Y,C/Y)] tvm_PV
tvm_PV computes the present value. Chapter 14: Applications 395 tvm_PV[(Ú,¾æ,PMT,FV,P/Y,C/Y)] tvm_N
tvm_Ú computes the number of payment periods. tvm_Ú[(æ¾,PV,PMT,FV,P/Y,C/Y)] tvm_FV
tvm_FV computes the future value. tvm_FV[(Ú,¾æ,PV,PMT,P/Y,C/Y)] Chapter 14: Applications 396 Calculating Cash Flows
Calculating a Cash Flow Use the cash flow functions (menu items 7 and 8) to analyze the value of money over equal time periods. You can enter unequal cash flows, which can be cash inflows or outflows. The syntax descriptions for npv( and irr( use these arguments. • • • •
interest rate is the rate by which to discount the cash flows (the cost of money) over one period. CF0 is the initial cash flow at time 0; it must be a real number. CFList is a list of cash flow amounts after the initial cash flow CF0. CFFreq is a list in which each element specifies the frequency of occurrence for a grouped (consecutive) cash flow amount, which is the corresponding element of CFList. The default is 1; if you enter values, they must be positive integers < 10,000. For example, express this uneven cash flow in lists.
2000 2000 2000 4000 4000 3000 CF0 = 2000 CFList = {2000,L3000,4000} CFFreq = {2,1,2} Chapter 14: Applications 397 npv(, irr(
npv( (net present value) is the sum of the present values for the cash inflows and outflows. A positive result for npv indicates a profitable investment. npv(interest rate,CF0,CFList[,CFFreq]) irr( (internal rate of return) is the interest rate at which the net present value of the cash flows is equal to zero.
irr(CF0,CFList[,CFFreq])
1000 0 5000 3000 2000 2500 Chapter 14: Applications 398 Calculating Amortization
Calculating an Amortization Schedule Use the amortization functions (menu items 9, 0, and A) to calculate balance, sum of principal, and sum of interest for an amortization schedule. bal(
bal( computes the balance for an amortization schedule using stored values for æ, PV, and PMT. npmt is the number of the payment at which you want to calculate a balance. It must be a positive integer < 10,000. roundvalue specifies the internal precision the calculator uses to calculate the balance; if you do not specify roundvalue, then the TI84 Plus uses the current Float/Fix decimalmode setting. bal(npmt[,roundvalue]) GPrn(, GInt( GPrn( computes the sum of the principal during a specified period for an amortization schedule using stored values for ¾æ, PV, and PMT. pmt1 is the starting payment. pmt2 is the ending payment in the range. pmt1 and pmt2 must be positive integers < 10,000. roundvalue specifies the internal precision the calculator uses to calculate the principal; if you do not specify roundvalue, the TI84 Plus uses the current Float/Fix decimalmode setting.
Chapter 14: Applications 399 Note: You must enter values for æ, PV, PMT, and before computing the principal. GPrn(pmt1,pmt2[,roundvalue]) GInt( computes the sum of the interest during a specified period for an amortization schedule using stored values for ¾æ, PV, and PMT. pmt1 is the starting payment. pmt2 is the ending payment in the range. pmt1 and pmt2 must be positive integers < 10,000. roundvalue specifies the internal precision the calculator uses to calculate the interest; if you do not specify roundvalue, the TI84 Plus uses the current Float/Fix decimalmode setting. GInt(pmt1,pmt2[,roundvalue]) Amortization Example: Calculating an Outstanding Loan Balance You want to buy a home with a 30year mortgage at 8 percent APR. Monthly payments are 800. Calculate the outstanding loan balance after each payment and display the results in a graph and in the table. 1. Press z. Press † ~ ~ ~ Í to set the fixeddecimal mode setting to 2. Press † † ~ Í to select Par graphing mode. Chapter 14: Applications 400 2. Press Î Œ Í Í to display the TVM Solver. 3. Press 360 to enter number of payments. Press † 8 to enter the interest rate. Press † † Ì 800 to enter the payment amount. Press † 0 to enter the future value of the mortgage. Press † 12 to enter the payments per year, which also sets the compounding periods per year to 12. Press † † Í to select PMT:END. 4. Press } } } } } to place the cursor on the PV prompt. Press ƒ \ to solve for the present value. 5. Press o to display the parametric Y= editor. Turn off all stat plots. Press „ to define X1T as T. Press † Œ Í 9 „ ¤ to define Y1T as bal(T). 6. Press p to display the window variables. Enter the values below.
Tmin=0 Xmin=0 Tmax=360 Xmax=360 Tstep=12 Xscl=50 Ymin=0 Ymax=125000 Yscl=10000 7. Press r to draw the graph and activate the trace cursor. Press ~ and  to explore the graph of the outstanding balance over time. Press a number and then press Í to view the balance at a specific time T. Chapter 14: Applications 401 8. Press y  and enter the values below.
TblStart=0 @Tbl=12 9. Press y 0 to display the table of outstanding balances (Y1T). 10. Press z † † † † † † † ~ ~ Í to select GT splitscreen mode, in which the graph and table are displayed simultaneously. Press r to display X1T (time) and Y1T (balance) in the table. Calculating Interest Conversion
Calculating an Interest Conversion Use the interest conversion functions (menu items B and C) to convert interest rates from an annual effective rate to a nominal rate (4Nom( ) or from a nominal rate to an annual effective rate (4Eff( ). 4Nom( Chapter 14: Applications 402 4Nom( computes the nominal interest rate. effective rate and compounding periods must be real numbers. compounding periods must be >0. 4Nom(effective rate,compounding periods) 4Eff( 4Eff( computes the effective interest rate. nominal rate and compounding periods must be real numbers. compounding periods must be >0. 4Eff(nominal rate,compounding periods) Finding Days between Dates/Defining Payment Method
dbd( Use the date function dbd( (menu item D) to calculate the number of days between two dates using the actualdaycount method. date1 and date2 can be numbers or lists of numbers within the range of the dates on the standard calendar.
Note: Dates must be between the years 1950 through 2049. Chapter 14: Applications 403 dbd(date1,date2) You can enter date1 and date2 in either of two formats. • • MM.DDYY (United States) DDMM.YY (Europe) The decimal placement differentiates the date formats. Defining the Payment Method
Pmt_End and Pmt_Bgn (menu items E and F) specify a transaction as an ordinary annuity or an annuity due. When you execute either command, the TVM Solver is updated. Pmt_End
Pmt_End (payment end) specifies an ordinary annuity, where payments occur at the end of each payment period. Most loans are in this category. Pmt_End is the default. Pmt_End On the TVM Solver’s PMT:END BEGIN line, select END to set PMT to ordinary annuity. Chapter 14: Applications 404 Pmt_Bgn
Pmt_Bgn (payment beginning) specifies an annuity due, where payments occur at the beginning of each payment period. Most leases are in this category.
Pmt_Bgn On the TVM Solver’s PMT:END BEGIN line, select BEGIN to set PMT to annuity due. Using the TVM Variables
FINANCE VARS Menu To display the FINANCE VARS menu, press Î Œ Í ~. You can use TVM variables in TVM functions and store values to them on the home screen. CALC VARS 1: Ú 2: æ 3: PV 4: PMT 5: FV 6: P/Y 7: C/Y
Total number of payment periods Annual interest rate Present value Payment amount Future value Number of payment periods per year Number of compounding periods/year Chapter 14: Applications 405 N, I%, PV, PMT, FV Ú, æ, PV, PMT, and FV are the five TVM variables. They represent the elements of common financial transactions, as described in the table above. æ is an annual interest rate that is converted to a perperiod rate based on the values of P/Y and C/Y. P/Y and C/Y
P/Y is the number of payment periods per year in a financial transaction. C/Y is the number of compounding periods per year in the same transaction. When you store a value to P/Y, the value for C/Y automatically changes to the same value. To store a unique value to C/Y, you must store the value to C/Y after you have stored a value to P/Y. The EasyData App
The EasyData App by Vernier Software and Technology allows you to view and analyze realworld data when the TI84 Plus is connected to data collection devices such as Texas Instruments CBR 2é, CBL 2é, Vernier LabProê, Vernier USB sensors, Vernier Go!éMotion, or Vernier Motion Detector Unit. The TI84 Plus comes with the EasyData App already installed.
Note: The App will only work with Vernier autoID sensors when using CBL 2é and Vernier LabProê. The EasyData app will autolaunch on your TI84 Plus if you plug in a USB sensor such as the CBR 2é or Vernier USB Temperature sensor. Chapter 14: Applications 406 Steps for Running the EasyData App Follow these basic steps when using the EasyData App.
Starting EasyData 1. Attach your data collection device to your TI84 Plus. Make sure the cables are firmly connected. 2. If the EasyData app has not autolaunched, press Œ and the } or † to select the EasyData App. 3. Press Í. The EasyData information screen is displayed for about three seconds followed by the main screen. Quitting EasyData 1. To quit EasyData, select Quit (press s). The Ready to quit? screen is displayed, which indicates that the collected data has been transferred to lists L1 through L4 on the TI84 Plus. 2. Press OK (press s) to quit. EasyData Settings
Changing EasyData settings EasyData displays the most commonly used settings before data collection begins. Chapter 14: Applications 407 To change a predefined setting: 1. From the main screen in the EasyData App, choose Setup and select 2: Time Graph. The current settings are displayed on the calculator.
Note: If using a motion detector, settings for 3: Distance Match and 4: Ball Bounce in the Setup menu are preset and cannot be changed. 2. Select Next (press q) to move to the setting you want to change. Press ‘ to clear a setting. 3. Repeat to cycle through the available options. When the option is correct, select Next to move to the next option. 4. To change a setting, enter 1 or 2 digits, and then select Next (press q). 5. When all the settings are correct, select OK (press s) to return to the main menu. 6. Select Start (press q) to begin collecting data.
Restoring EasyData to the default settings The default settings are appropriate for a wide variety of sampling situations. If you are unsure of the best settings, begin with the default settings, and then adjust the settings for your specific activity. To restore the default settings in EasyData while a data collection device is connected to the TI84 Plus, choose File and select 1:New. Chapter 14: Applications 408 Starting and Stopping Data Collection
Starting Data Collection To start sampling, select Start (press q). Sampling will automatically stop when the number of samples set in the Time Graph Settings menu is reached. The TI84 Plus will then display a graph of the sampled data.
Stopping Data Collection To stop sampling before it automatically stops, select Stop (press and hold q) at any time during the sampling process. When sampling stops, a graph of the sampled data is displayed. Saving Collected Data Collected data is automatically transferred to the TI84 Plus and stored in lists L1 through L4 when data collection is complete. When you exit the EasyData App, a prompt reminds you of the lists in which time, distance, velocity, and acceleration are stored. For more information about the EasyData app, refer to the Texas Instrument Web site at: education.ti.com/guides. Chapter 14: Applications 409 Chapter 14: Applications 410 Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions
Browsing the TI84 Plus CATALOG
What Is the CATALOG? The CATALOG is an alphabetical list of all functions and instructions on the TI84 Plus. You also can access each CATALOG item from a menu or the keyboard, except: • • • • The six string functions The six hyperbolic functions The solve( instruction without the equation solver editor (Chapter 2) The inferential stat functions without the inferential stat editors (Chapter 13) Note: The only CATALOG programming commands you can execute from the home screen are GetCalc(, Get(, and Send(. Selecting an Item from the CATALOG To select a CATALOG item, follow these steps. 1. Press y N to display the CATALOG. Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions 411 The 4 in the first column is the selection cursor. 2. Press † or } to scroll the CATALOG until the selection cursor points to the item you want. • • To jump to the first item beginning with a particular letter, press that letter; alphalock is on. Items that begin with a number are in alphabetical order according to the first letter after the number. For example, 2PropZTest( is among the items that begin with the letter P. Functions that appear as symbols, such as +, L1, <, and ‡(, follow the last item that begins with Z. To jump to the first symbol, !, press [q]. • 3. Press Í to paste the item to the current screen. Note: From the top of the CATALOG menu, press } to move to the bottom. From the bottom, press † to move to the top. Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions 412 Entering and Using Strings
What Is a String? A string is a sequence of characters that you enclose within quotation marks. On the TI84 Plus, a string has two primary applications. • • It defines text to be displayed in a program. It accepts input from the keyboard in a program. Characters are the units that you combine to form a string. • • Count each number, letter, and space as one character. Count each instruction or function name, such as sin( or cos(, as one character; the TI84 Plus interprets each instruction or function name as one character. Entering a String To enter a string on a blank line on the home screen or in a program, follow these steps. 1. Press ƒ [ã] to indicate the beginning of the string. 2. Enter the characters that comprise the string. • • • Use any combination of numbers, letters, function names, or instruction names to create the string. To enter a blank space, press ƒ O. To enter several alpha characters in a row, press y 7 to activate alphalock.
413 Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions 3. Press ƒ [ã] to indicate the end of the string. ãstringã 4. Press Í. On the home screen, the string is displayed on the next line without quotations. An ellipsis (...) indicates that the string continues beyond the screen. To scroll the entire string, press ~ and . Note: Quotation marks do not count as string characters. Storing Strings to String Variables
String Variables The TI84 Plus has 10 variables to which you can store strings. You can use string variables with string functions and instructions. To display the VARS STRING menu, follow these steps. 1. Press to display the VARS menu. Move the cursor to 7:String. Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions 414 2. Press Í to display the STRING secondary menu. Storing a String to a String Variable To store a string to a string variable, follow these steps. 1. Press ƒ [ã], enter the string, and press ƒ [ã]. 2. Press ¿. 3. Press 7 to display the VARS STRING menu. 4. Select the string variable (from Str1 to Str9, or Str0) to which you want to store the string. The string variable is pasted to the current cursor location, next to the store symbol (!). Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions 415 5. Press Í to store the string to the string variable. On the home screen, the stored string is displayed on the next line without quotation marks. Displaying the Contents of a String Variable To display the contents of a string variable on the home screen, select the string variable from the VARS STRING menu, and then press Í. The string is displayed. String Functions and Instructions in the CATALOG
Displaying String Functions and Instructions in the CATALOG String functions and instructions are available only from the CATALOG. The table below lists the string functions and instructions in the order in which they appear among the Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions 416 other CATALOG menu items. The ellipses in the table indicate the presence of additional CATALOG items. CATALOG ... Equ4String( expr( ... inString( ... length( ... String4Equ( sub( ...
Converts a string to an equation. Returns a string subset as a string. Returns a string’s character length. Returns a character’s place number. Converts an equation to a string. Converts a string to an expression. Concatenation To concatenate two or more strings, follow these steps. 1. Enter string1, which can be a string or string name. 2. Press Ã. Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions 417 3. Enter string2, which can be a string or string name. If necessary, press Ã and enter string3, and so on.
string1+string2+string3... 4. Press Í to display the strings as a single string. Selecting a String Function from the CATALOG To select a string function or instruction and paste it to the current screen, follow the steps for selecting an item from the CATALOG. Equ4String(
Equ4String( converts to a string an equation that is stored to any VARS YVARS variable. Yn contains the equation. Strn (from Str1 to Str9, or Str0) is the string variable to which you want the equation to be stored as a string.
Equ4String(Yn,Strn) Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions 418 expr(
expr( converts the character string contained in string to an expression and executes it. string can be a string or a string variable. expr(string) inString(
inString( returns the character position in string of the first character of substring. string can be a string or a string variable. start is an optional character position at which to start the search; the default is 1.
inString(string,substring[,start]) Note: If string does not contain substring, or start is greater than the length of string, inString( returns 0. Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions 419 length(
length( returns the number of characters in string. string can be a string or string variable. Note: An instruction or function name, such as sin( or cos(, counts as one character. length(string) String4Equ(
String4Equ( converts string into an equation and stores the equation to Yn. string can be a string or string variable. String4Equ( is the inverse of Equ4String(. String4Equ(string,Yn) Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions 420 sub(
sub( returns a string that is a subset of an existing string. string can be a string or a string variable. begin is the position number of the first character of the subset. length is the number of characters in the subset. sub(string,begin,length) Entering a Function to Graph during Program Execution In a program, you can enter a function to graph during program execution using these commands. Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions 421 Note: When you execute this program, enter a function to store to Y3 at the ENTRY= prompt. Hyperbolic Functions in the CATALOG
Hyperbolic Functions The hyperbolic functions are available only from the CATALOG. The table below lists the hyperbolic functions in the order in which they appear among the other CATALOG menu items. The ellipses in the table indicate the presence of additional CATALOG items. CATALOG ... cosh( cosh1( ... sinh(
Hyperbolic sine Hyperbolic cosine Hyperbolic arccosine Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions 422 CATALOG sinh1( ... tanh( tanh1( ... sinh(, cosh(, tanh(
sinh(, cosh(, and tanh( are the hyperbolic functions. Each is valid for real numbers, expressions, and lists. sinh(value) cosh(value) tanh(value) Hyperbolic tangent Hyperbolic arctangent Hyperbolic arcsine sinh1(, cosh1(, tanh1(
sinh1( is the hyperbolic arcsine function. cosh1( is the hyperbolic arccosine function. tanh1( is the hyperbolic arctangent function. Each is valid for real numbers, expressions, and lists. Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions 423 sinh1(value) cosh1(value) sinh1(value) Chapter 15: CATALOG, Strings, Hyperbolic Functions 424 Chapter 16: Programming
Getting Started: Volume of a Cylinder
Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. A program is a set of commands that the TI84 Plus executes sequentially, as if you had entered them from the keyboard. Create a program that prompts for the radius R and the height H of a cylinder and then computes its volume. 1. Press ~ ~ to display the PRGM NEW menu. 2. Press Í to select 1:Create New. The Name= prompt is displayed, and alphalock is on. Press [C] [Y] [L] [I] [N] [D] [E] [R], and then press Í to name the program CYLINDER. You are now in the program editor. The colon ( : ) in the first column of the second line indicates the beginning of a command line. Chapter 16: Programming 425 3. Press ~ 2 to select 2:Prompt from the PRGM I/O menu. Prompt is copied to the command line. Press ƒ [R] ¢ ƒ [H] to enter the variable names for radius and height. Press Í. 4. Press y B ƒ [R] ¡ ƒ [H] ¿ ƒ [V] Í to enter the expression pR 2H and store it to the variable V. 5. Press ~ 3 to select 3:Disp from the PRGM I/O menu. Disp is pasted to the command line. Press y 7 [ã] [V] [O] [L] [U] [M] [E] O [I] [S] [ã] ƒ ¢ ƒ [V] Í to set up the program to display the text VOLUME IS on one line and the calculated value of V on the next. 6. Press y 5 to display the home screen. 7. Press to display the PRGM EXEC menu. The items on this menu are the names of stored programs. Chapter 16: Programming 426 8. Press Í to paste prgmCYLINDER to the current cursor location. (If CYLINDER is not item 1 on your PRGM EXEC menu, move the cursor to CYLINDER before you press Í.) 9. Press Í to execute the program. Enter 1.5 for the radius, and then press Í. Enter 3 for the height, and then press Í. The text VOLUME IS, the value of V, and Done are displayed. Repeat steps 7 through 9 and enter different values for R and H. Creating and Deleting Programs
What Is a Program? A program is a set of one or more command lines. Each line contains one or more instructions. When you execute a program, the TI84 Plus performs each instruction on each command line in the same order in which you entered them. The number and size of programs that the TI84 Plus can store is limited only by available memory. Creating a New Program To create a new program, follow these steps. 1. Press  to display the PRGM NEW menu. Chapter 16: Programming 427 2. Press Í to select 1:Create New. The Name= prompt is displayed, and alphalock is on. 3. Press a letter from A to Z or q to enter the first character of the new program name.
Note: A program name can be one to eight characters long. The first character must be a letter from A to Z or q. The second through eighth characters can be letters, numbers, or q. 4. Enter zero to seven letters, numbers, or q to complete the new program name. 5. Press Í. The program editor is displayed. 6. Enter one or more program commands. 7. Press y 5 to leave the program editor and return to the home screen. Managing Memory and Deleting a Program To check whether adequate memory is available for a program you want to enter: 1. Press y L to display the MEMORY menu. 2. Select 2:Mem Mgmt/Del to display the MEMORY MANAGEMENT/DELETE menu (Chapter 18). 3. Select 7:Prgm to display the PRGM editor. Chapter 16: Programming 428 The TI84 Plus expresses memory quantities in bytes. You can increase available memory in one of two ways. You can delete one or more programs or you can archive some programs. To increase available memory by deleting a specific program: 1. Press y L and then select 2:Mem Mgmt/Del from the MEMORY menu. 2. Select 7:Prgm to display the PRGM editor (Chapter 18). 3. Press } and † to move the selection cursor (4) next to the program you want to delete, and then press {. The program is deleted from memory.
Note: You will receive a message asking you to confirm this delete action. Select 2:yes to continue. To leave the PRGM editor screen without deleting anything, press y 5, which displays the home screen. To increase available memory by archiving a program:
Chapter 16: Programming 429 4. Press y L and then select 2:Mem Mgmt/Del from the MEMORY menu. 5. Select 2:Mem Mgmt/Del to display the MEM MGMT/DEL menu. 6. Select 7:Prgm... to display the PRGM menu. 7. Press Í to archive the program. An asterisk will appear to the left of the program to indicate it is an archived program. To unarchive a program in this screen, put the cursor next to the archived program and press Í. The asterisk will disappear.
Note: Archive programs cannot be edited or executed. In order to edit or execute an archived program, you must first unarchive it. Entering Command Lines and Executing Programs
Entering a Program Command Line You can enter on a command line any instruction or expression that you could execute from the home screen. In the program editor, each new command line begins with a colon. To enter more than one instruction or expression on a single command line, separate each with a colon.
Note: A command line can be longer than the screen is wide; long command lines wrap to the next screen line. Chapter 16: Programming 430 While in the program editor, you can display and select from menus. You can return to the program editor from a menu in either of two ways. • • Select a menu item, which pastes the item to the current command line. Press ‘. When you complete a command line, press Í. The cursor moves to the next command line. Programs can access variables, lists, matrices, and strings saved in memory. If a program stores a new value to a variable, list, matrix, or string, the program changes the value in memory during execution. You can call another program as a subroutine. Executing a Program To execute a program, begin on a blank line on the home screen and follow these steps. 1. Press to display the PRGM EXEC menu. 2. Select a program name from the PRGM EXEC menu. prgmname is pasted to the home screen (for example, prgmCYLINDER). 3. Press Í to execute the program. While the program is executing, the busy indicator is on. Last Answer (Ans) is updated during program execution. Last Entry is not updated as each command is executed (Chapter 1). Chapter 16: Programming 431 The TI84 Plus checks for errors during program execution. It does not check for errors as you enter a program. Breaking a Program To stop program execution, press É. The ERR:BREAK menu is displayed. • • To return to the home screen, select 1:Quit. To go where the interruption occurred, select 2:Goto. Editing Programs
Editing a Program To edit a stored program, follow these steps. 1. Press ~ to display the PRGM EDIT menu. 2. Select a program name from the PRGM EDIT menu. Up to the first seven lines of the program are displayed.
Note: The program editor does not display a $ to indicate that a program continues beyond the screen. 3. Edit the program command lines. • • Move the cursor to the appropriate location, and then delete, overwrite, or insert. Press ‘ to clear all program commands on the command line (the leading colon remains), and then enter a new program command. Chapter 16: Programming 432 Note: To move the cursor to the beginning of a command line, press y ; to move to the end, press y ~. To scroll the cursor down seven command lines, press ƒ †. To scroll the cursor up seven command lines, press ƒ }. Inserting and Deleting Command Lines To insert a new command line anywhere in the program, place the cursor where you want the new line, press y 6, and then press Í. A colon indicates a new line. To delete a command line, place the cursor on the line, press ‘ to clear all instructions and expressions on the line, and then press { to delete the command line, including the colon. Copying and Renaming Programs
Copying and Renaming a Program To copy all command lines from one program into a new program, follow steps 1 through 5 for Creating a New Program, and then follow these steps. 1. Press y K. Rcl is displayed on the bottom line of the program editor in the new program (Chapter 1). 2. Press  to display the PRGM EXEC menu. 3. Select a name from the menu. prgmname is pasted to the bottom line of the program editor. 4. Press Í. All command lines from the selected program are copied into the new program. Chapter 16: Programming 433 Copying programs has at least two convenient applications. • • You can create a template for groups of instructions that you use frequently. You can rename a program by copying its contents into a new program. Note: You also can copy all the command lines from one existing program to another existing program using RCL. Scrolling the PRGM EXEC and PRGM EDIT Menus The TI84 Plus sorts PRGM EXEC and PRGM EDIT menu items automatically into alphanumerical order. Each menu only labels the first 10 items using 1 through 9, then 0. To jump to the first program name that begins with a particular alpha character or q, press ƒ [letter from A to Z or q].
Note: From the top of either the PRGM EXEC or PRGM EDIT menu, press } to move to the bottom. From the bottom, press † to move to the top. To scroll the cursor down the menu seven items, press ƒ †. To scroll the cursor up the menu seven items, press ƒ }. Chapter 16: Programming 434 PRGM CTL (Control) Instructions
PRGM CTL Menu To display the PRGM CTL (program control) menu, press from the program editor only. CTL 1: If 2: Then 3: Else 4: For( 5: While 6: Repeat 7: End 8: Pause 9: Lbl 0: Goto A: IS>( B: DS<( C: Menu( I/O EXEC
Creates a conditional test. Executes commands when If is true. Executes commands when If is false. Creates an incrementing loop. Creates a conditional loop. Creates a conditional loop. Signifies the end of a block. Pauses program execution. Defines a label. Goes to a label. Increments and skips if greater than. Decrements and skips if less than. Defines menu items and branches. Chapter 16: Programming 435 CTL I/O EXEC
Executes a program as a subroutine. Returns from a subroutine. Stops execution. Deletes a variable from within program. Designates the graph style to be drawn. D: prgm E: Return F: Stop G: DelVar H: GraphStyle( These menu items direct the flow of an executing program. They make it easy to repeat or skip a group of commands during program execution. When you select an item from the menu, the name is pasted to the cursor location on a command line in the program. To return to the program editor without selecting an item, press ‘. Controlling Program Flow Program control instructions tell the TI84 Plus which command to execute next in a program. If, While, and Repeat check a defined condition to determine which command to execute next. Conditions frequently use relational or Boolean tests (Chapter 2), as in:
If A<7:A+1!A or If N=1 and M=1:Goto Z Chapter 16: Programming 436 If Use If for testing and branching. If condition is false (zero), then the command immediately following If is skipped. If condition is true (nonzero), then the next command is executed. If instructions can be nested.
:If condition :command (if true) :command Program Output IfThen
Then following an If executes a group of commands if condition is true (nonzero). End identifies the end of the group of commands. :If condition :Then :command (if true) :command (if true) Chapter 16: Programming 437 :End :command Program Output IfThenElse
Else following IfThen executes a group of commands if condition is false (zero). End identifies the end of the group of commands. :If condition :Then :command (if true) :command (if true) :Else :command (if false) :command (if false) :End :command Program Output Chapter 16: Programming 438 For(
For( loops and increments. It increments variable from begin to end by increment. increment is optional (default is 1) and can be negative (end<begin). end is a maximum or minimum value not to be exceeded. End identifies the end of the loop. For( loops can be nested. :For(variable,begin,end[,increment]) :command (while end not exceeded) :command (while end not exceeded) :End :command Program Output Chapter 16: Programming 439 While
While performs a group of commands while condition is true. condition is frequently a relational test (Chapter 2). condition is tested when While is encountered. If condition is true (nonzero), the program executes a group of commands. End signifies the end of the group. When condition is false (zero), the program executes each command following End. While instructions can be nested. :While condition :command (while condition is true) :command (while condition is true) :End :command Program Output Repeat
Repeat repeats a group of commands until condition is true (nonzero). It is similar to While, but condition is tested when End is encountered; therefore, the group of commands is always executed at least once. Repeat instructions can be nested. :Repeat condition :command (until condition is true) Chapter 16: Programming 440 :command (until condition is true) :End :command Program Output End
End identifies the end of a group of commands. You must include an End instruction at the end of each For(, While, or Repeat loop. Also, you must paste an End instruction at the end of each IfThen group and each IfThenElse group. Pause During the pause, the pause indicator is on in the topright corner. Press Í to resume execution. • •
Pause suspends execution of the program so that you can see answers or graphs. Pause without a value temporarily pauses the program. If the DispGraph or Disp instruction has been executed, the appropriate screen is displayed.
Pause with value displays value on the current home screen. value can be scrolled. Chapter 16: Programming 441 Pause [value] Program Output Lbl, Goto
Lbl (label) and Goto (go to) are used together for branching. Lbl specifies the label for a command. label can be one or two characters (A through Z, 0 through 99, or q).
Lbl label Goto causes the program to branch to label when Goto is encountered. Chapter 16: Programming 442 Goto label Program Output IS>(
IS>( (increment and skip) adds 1 to variable. If the answer is > value (which can be an expression), the next command is skipped; if the answer is { value, the next command is executed. variable cannot be a system variable. :IS>(variable,value) :command (if answer value) :command (if answer > value) Program Output Note: IS>( is not a looping instruction. Chapter 16: Programming 443 DS<(
DS<( (decrement and skip) subtracts 1 from variable. If the answer is < value (which can be an expression), the next command is skipped; if the answer is  value, the next command is executed. variable cannot be a system variable. :DS<(variable,value) :command (if answer ‚ value) :command (if answer < value) Program Output Note: DS<( is not a looping instruction. Menu(
Menu( sets up branching within a program. If Menu( is encountered during program execution, the menu screen is displayed with the specified menu items, the pause indicator is on, and execution pauses until you select a menu item. The menu title is enclosed in quotation marks ( " ). Up to seven pairs of menu items follow. Each pair comprises a text item (also enclosed in quotation marks) to be displayed as a menu selection, and a label item to which to branch if you select the corresponding menu selection. Chapter 16: Programming 444 Menu("title","text1",label1,"text2",label2, . . .) Program Output The program above pauses until you select 1 or 2. If you select 2, for example, the menu disappears and the program continues execution at Lbl B. prgm Use prgm to execute other programs as subroutines. When you select prgm, it is pasted to the cursor location. Enter characters to spell a program name. Using prgm is equivalent to selecting existing programs from the PRGM EXEC menu; however, it allows you to enter the name of a program that you have not yet created.
prgmname Note: You cannot directly enter the subroutine name when using RCL. You must paste the name from the PRGM EXEC menu. Return
Return quits the subroutine and returns execution to the calling program, even if encountered within nested loops. Any loops are ended. An implied Return exists at the end of any program that is called as a subroutine. Within the main program, Return stops execution and returns to the home screen.
Chapter 16: Programming 445 Stop
Stop stops execution of a program and returns to the home screen. Stop is optional at the end of a program. DelVar
DelVar deletes from memory the contents of variable. DelVar variable GraphStyle(
GraphStyle( designates the style of the graph to be drawn. function# is the number of the Y= function name in the current graphing mode. graphstyle is a number from 1 to 7 that corresponds to the graph style, as shown below. 1 2 3 4 = ç (line) = è (thick) = é (shade above) = ê (shade below) 5 = ë (path) 6 = ì (animate) 7 = í (dot) GraphStyle(function#,graphstyle) For example, GraphStyle(1,5) in Func mode sets the graph style for Y1 to ë (path; 5). Chapter 16: Programming 446 Not all graph styles are available in all graphing modes. For a detailed description of each graph style, see the Graph Styles table in Chapter 3. PRGM I/O (Input/Output) Instructions
PRGM I/O Menu To display the PRGM I/O (program input/output) menu, press ~ from within the program editor only. CTL I/O EXEC
Enters a value or uses the cursor. Prompts for entry of variable values. Displays text, value, or the home screen. Displays the current graph. Displays the current table. Displays text at a specified position. Checks the keyboard for a keystroke. Clears the display. Clears the current table. Gets a variable from another TI84 Plus. Gets a variable from CBL 2™ or CBR™. Sends a variable to CBL 2 or CBR. 1: Input 2: Prompt 3: Disp 4: DispGraph 5: DispTable 6: Output( 7: getKey 8: ClrHome 9: ClrTable 0: GetCalc( A: Get( B: Send( Chapter 16: Programming 447 These instructions control input to and output from a program during execution. They allow you to enter values and display answers during program execution. To return to the program editor without selecting an item, press ‘. Displaying a Graph with Input
Input without a variable displays the current graph. You can move the freemoving cursor, which updates X and Y (and R and q for PolarGC format). The pause indicator is on. Press Í to resume program execution.
Input Program Output Chapter 16: Programming 448 Storing a Variable Value with Input
Input with variable displays a ? (question mark) prompt during execution. variable may be a real number, complex number, list, matrix, string, or Y= function. During program execution, enter a value, which can be an expression, and then press Í. The value is evaluated and stored to variable, and the program resumes execution. Input [variable] You can display text or the contents of Strn (a string variable) of up to 16 characters as a prompt. During program execution, enter a value after the prompt and then press Í. The value is stored to variable, and the program resumes execution.
Input ["text",variable] Input [Strn,variable] Program Output Note: When a program prompts for input of lists and Yn functions during execution, you must include the braces ( { } ) around the list elements and quotation marks ( " ) around the expressions. Chapter 16: Programming 449 Prompt During program execution, Prompt displays each variable, one at a time, followed by =?. At each prompt, enter a value or expression for each variable, and then press Í. The values are stored, and the program resumes execution.
Prompt variableA[,variableB,...,variable n] Program Output Note: Y= functions are not valid with Prompt. Displaying the Home Screen
Disp (display) without a value displays the home screen. To view the home screen during program execution, follow the Disp instruction with a Pause instruction. Disp Displaying Values and Messages
Disp with one or more values displays the value of each. Disp [valueA,valueB,valueC,...,value n] Chapter 16: Programming 450 • • • If value is a variable, the current value is displayed. If value is an expression, it is evaluated and the result is displayed on the right side of the next line. If value is text within quotation marks, it is displayed on the left side of the current display line. ! is not valid as text.
Output Program If Pause is encountered after Disp, the program halts temporarily so you can examine the screen. To resume execution, press Í.
Note: If a matrix or list is too large to display in its entirety, ellipses (...) are displayed in the last column, but the matrix or list cannot be scrolled. To scroll, use Pause value. DispGraph
DispGraph (display graph) displays the current graph. If Pause is encountered after DispGraph, the program halts temporarily so you can examine the screen. Press Í to resume execution. DispTable
DispTable (display table) displays the current table. The program halts temporarily so you can examine the screen. Press Í to resume execution. Chapter 16: Programming 451 Output(
Output( displays text or value on the current home screen beginning at row (1 through 8) and column (1 through 16), overwriting any existing characters. Note: You may want to precede Output( with ClrHome. Expressions are evaluated and values are displayed according to the current mode settings. Matrices are displayed in entry format and wrap to the next line. ! is not valid as text.
Output(row,column,"text") Output(row,column,value) Program Output For Output( on a Horiz split screen, the maximum value for row is 4. Chapter 16: Programming 452 getKey
getKey returns a number corresponding to the last key pressed, according to the key code diagram below. If no key has been pressed, getKey returns 0. Use getKey inside loops to transfer control, for example, when creating video games.
Program Output Note: , Œ, , and Í were pressed during program execution. Note: You can press É at any time during execution to break the program. Chapter 16: Programming 453 TI84 TI84 Plus Key Code Diagram ClrHome, ClrTable
ClrHome (clear home screen) clears the home screen during program execution. ClrTable (clear table) clears the values in the table during program execution. GetCalc(
GetCalc( gets the contents of variable on another TI84 Plus and stores it to variable on the receiving TI84 Plus. variable can be a real or complex number, list element, list name, matrix element, matrix name, string, Y= variable, graph database, or picture.
GetCalc(variable[,portflag]) Chapter 16: Programming 454 By default, the TI84 Plus uses the USB port if it is connected. If the USB cable is not connected, it uses the I/O port. If you want to specify either the USB or I/O port, use the following portflag numbers:
portflag=0 use USB port if connected; portflag=1 use USB port; portflag=2 use I/O port Note: GetCalc( does not work between TI.82 and TI83 Plus or a TI.82 and TI84 Plus calculators. Get(, Send(
Get( gets data from the CBL 2™ or CBR™ and stores it to variable on the receiving TI84 Plus. variable can be a real number, list element, list name, matrix element, matrix name, string, Y= variable, graph database, or picture.
Get(variable) Note: If you transfer a program that references the Get( command to the TI84 Plus from a TI.82, the TI84 Plus will interpret it as the Get( described above. Use GetCalc( to get data from another TI84 Plus.
Send( sends the contents of variable to the CBL 2™ or CBR™. You cannot use it to send to another TI84 Plus. variable can be a real number, list element, list name, matrix element, matrix name, string, Y= variable, graph database, or picture. variable can be a list of elements. Chapter 16: Programming 455 Send(variable) Note: This program gets sound data and time in seconds from CBL 2™. Note: You can access Get(, Send(, and GetCalc( from the CATALOG to execute them from the home screen (Chapter 15). Calling Other Programs as Subroutines
Calling a Program from Another Program On the TI84 Plus, any stored program can be called from another program as a subroutine. Enter the name of the program to use as a subroutine on a line by itself. You can enter a program name on a command line in either of two ways. • • Press  to display the PRGM EXEC menu and select the name of the program prgmname is pasted to the current cursor location on a command line. Select prgm from the PRGM CTL menu, and then enter the program name. prgmname When prgmname is encountered during execution, the next command that the program executes is the first command in the second program. It returns to the subsequent Chapter 16: Programming 456 command in the first program when it encounters either Return or the implied Return at the end of the second program.
Program Output Subroutine ( ' Notes about Calling Programs Variables are global.
label used with Goto and Lbl is local to the program where it is located. label in one program is not recognized by another program. You cannot use Goto to branch to a label in another program. Return exits a subroutine and returns to the calling program, even if it is encountered within nested loops. Chapter 16: Programming 457 Running an Assembly Language Program
You can run programs written for the TI84 Plus in assembly language. Typically, assembly language programs run much faster and provide greater control than than the keystroke programs that you write with the builtin program editor.
Note: Because an assembly langauge program has greater control over the calculator, if your assembly language program has error(s), it may cause your calculator to reset and lose all data, programs, and applications stored in memory. When you download an assembly language program, it is stored among the other programs as a PRGM menu item. You can: • • Transmit it using the TI84 Plus communication link (Chapter 19). Delete it using the MEM MGMT DEL screen (Chapter 18). To run an assembly Program, the syntax is: Asm(assemblyprgmname) If you write an assembly language program, use the two instructions below from the CATALOG to identify and compile the program.
Instructions AsmComp(prgmASM1, prgmASM2) AsmPrgm Comments Compiles an assembly language program written in ASCII and stores the hex version Identifies an assembly language program; must be entered as the first line of an assembly language program To compile an assembly program that you have written: Chapter 16: Programming 458 1. Follow the steps for writing a program (164) but be sure to include AsmPrgm as the first line of your program. 2. From the home screen, press y N and then select AsmComp( to paste it to the screen. 3. Press to display the PRGM EXEC menu. 4. Select the program you want to compile. It will be pasted to the home screen. 5. Press ¢ and then select prgm from the CATALOG. 6. Key in the name you have chosen for the output program.
Note: This name must be unique — not a copy of an existing program name. 7. Press ¤ to complete the sequence. The sequence of the arguments should be as follows:
AsmComp(prgmASM1, prgmASM2) 8. Press Í to compile your program and generate the output program. Chapter 16: Programming 459 Chapter 17: Activities
The Quadratic Formula
Entering a Calculation Use the quadratic formula to solve the quadratic equations 3x2 + 5x + 2 = 0 and 2x2 N x + 3 = 0. Begin with the equation 3x2 + 5x + 2 = 0. 1. Press 3 ¿ ƒ [A] (above ) to store the coefficient of the x2 term. 2. Press ƒ [:] (above Ë). The colon allows you to enter more than one instruction on a line. 3. Press 5 ¿ ƒ [B] (above Œ) to store the coefficient of the X term. Press ƒ [:] to enter a new instruction on the same line. Press 2 ¿ ƒ [C] (above ) to store the constant. 4. Press Í to store the values to the variables A, B, and C. The last value you stored is shown on the right side of the display. The cursor moves to the next line, ready for your next entry.
Chapter 17: Activities 460 5. Press £ Ì ƒ [B] Ã y C ƒ [B] ¡ ¹ 4 ƒ [A] ƒ [C] ¤ ¤ ¥ £ 2 ƒ [A] ¤ to enter the expression for one of the solutions for the quadratic formula,
– b ± b – 4 ac 2a
2 6. Press Í to find one solution for the equation 3x2 + 5x + 2 = 0. The answer is shown on the right side of the display. The cursor moves to the next line, ready for you to enter the next expression. Converting to a Fraction You can show the solution as a fraction. 1. Press to display the MATH menu. Chapter 17: Activities 461 2. Press 1 to select 1:4Frac from the MATH menu. When you press 1, Ans4Frac is displayed on the home screen. Ans is a variable that contains the last calculated answer. 3. Press Í to convert the result to a fraction. To save keystrokes, you can recall the last expression you entered, and then edit it for a new calculation. 4. Press y [ (above Í) to recall the fraction conversion entry, and then press y [ again to recall the quadraticformula expression,
– b + b – 4 ac 2a
2 Chapter 17: Activities 462 5. Press } to move the cursor onto the + sign in the formula. Press ¹ to edit the quadraticformula expression to become:
– b – b – 4 ac 2a
2 6. Press Í to find the other solution for the quadratic equation 3x2 + 5x + 2 = 0. Displaying Complex Results Now solve the equation 2x2 N x + 3 = 0. When you set a+bi complex number mode, the TI84 Plus displays complex results. 1. Press z † † † † † † (6 times), and then press ~ to position the cursor over a+bi. Press Í to select a+bi complexnumber mode. Chapter 17: Activities 463 2. Press y 5 (above z) to return to the home screen, and then press ‘ to clear it. 3. Press 2 ¿ ƒ [A] ƒ [:] Ì 1 ¿ ƒ [B] ƒ [:] 3 ¿ ƒ [C] Í. The coefficient of the x2 term, the coefficient of the X term, and the constant for the new equation are stored to A, B, and C, respectively. 4. Press y [ to recall the store instruction, and then press y [ again to recall the quadraticformula expression,
– b – b – 4 ac 2a
2 5. Press Í to find one solution for the equation 2x2 N x + 3 = 0. Chapter 17: Activities 464 6. Press y [ repeatedly until this quadraticformula expression is displayed:
– b + b – 4 ac 2a
2 7. Press Í to find the other solution for the quadratic equation: 2x2 N x + 3 = 0.
Note: An alternative for solving equations for real numbers is to use the builtin Equation Solver. Chapter 17: Activities 465 Box with Lid
Defining a Function Take a 20 cm × 25 cm. sheet of paper and cut X × X squares from two corners. Cut X × 12½ cm rectangles from the other two corners as shown in the diagram below. Fold the paper into a box with a lid. What value of X would give your box the maximum volume V? Use the table and graphs to determine the solution. Begin by defining a function that describes the volume of the box. From the diagram: 2X + A = 20 2X + 2B = 25 V = A… B … X X 20 A XB 25 X B 1. Press o to display the Y= editor, which is where you define functions for tables and graphing. Chapter 17: Activities 466 2. Press £ 20 ¹ 2 „ ¤ £ 25 ¥ 2 ¹ „ ¤ „ Í to define the volume function as Y1 in terms of X. „ lets you enter X quickly, without having to press ƒ. The highlighted = sign indicates that Y1 is selected. Defining a Table of Values The table feature of the TI84 Plus displays numeric information about a function. You can use a table of values from the function you just defined to estimate an answer to the problem. 1. Press y  (above p) to display the TABLE SETUP menu. 2. Press Í to accept TblStart=0. 3. Press 1 Í to define the table increment @Tbl=1. Leave Indpnt: Auto and Depend: Auto so that the table will be generated automatically. 4. Press y 0 (above s) to display the table. Notice that the maximum value for Y1 (box’s volume) occurs when X is about 4, between 3 and 5. Chapter 17: Activities 467 5. Press and hold † to scroll the table until a negative result for Y1 is displayed. Notice that the maximum length of X for this problem occurs where the sign of Y1 (box’s volume) changes from positive to negative, between 10 and 11. 6. Press y . Notice that TblStart has changed to 6 to reflect the first line of the table as it was last displayed. (In step 5, the first value of X displayed in the table is 6.) Zooming In on the Table You can adjust the way a table is displayed to get more information about a defined function. With smaller values for @Tbl, you can zoom in on the table. 1. Press 3 Í to set TblStart. Press Ë 1 Í to set @Tbl. This adjusts the table setup to get a more accurate estimate of X for maximum volume Y1. Chapter 17: Activities 468 2. Press y 0. 3. Press † and } to scroll the table. Notice that the maximum value for Y1 is 410.26, which occurs at X=3.7. Therefore, the maximum occurs where 3.6<X<3.8. 4. Press y . Press 3 Ë 6 Í to set TblStart. Press Ë 01 Í to set @Tbl. 5. Press y 0, and then press † and } to scroll the table. Four equivalent maximum values are shown, 410.26 at X=3.67, 3.68, 3.69, and 3.70. 6. Press † or } to move the cursor to 3.67. Press ~ to move the cursor into the Y1 column. The value of Y1 at X=3.67 is displayed on the bottom line in full precision as 410.261226. Chapter 17: Activities 469 7. Press † to display the other maximum. The value of Y1 at X=3.68 in full precision is 410.264064, at X=3.69 is 410.262318 and at X=3.7 is 410.256. The maximum volume of the box would occur at 3.68 if you could measure and cut the paper at .01centimeter increments. Setting the Viewing Window You also can use the graphing features of the TI84 Plus to find the maximum value of a previously defined function. When the graph is activated, the viewing window defines the displayed portion of the coordinate plane. The values of the window variables determine the size of the viewing window. 1. Press p to display the window editor, where you can view and edit the values of the window variables. Chapter 17: Activities 470 The standard window variables define the viewing window as shown. Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, and Ymax define the boundaries of the display. Xscl and Yscl define the distance between tick marks on the X and Y axes. Xres controls resolution. 2. Press 0 Í to define Xmin. 3. Press 20 ¥ 2 to define Xmax using an expression. 4. Press Í. The expression is evaluated, and 10 is stored in Xmax. Press Í to accept Xscl as 1. 5. Press 0 Í 500 Í 100 Í 1 Í to define the remaining window variables. Chapter 17: Activities 471 Displaying and Tracing the Graph Now that you have defined the function to be graphed and the window in which to graph it, you can display and explore the graph. You can trace along a function using the TRACE feature. 1. Press s to graph the selected function in the viewing window. The graph of Y1=(20N2X)(25à2NX)X is displayed. 2. Press ~ to activate the freemoving graph cursor. The X and Y coordinate values for the position of the graph cursor are displayed on the bottom line. 3. Press , ~, }, and † to move the freemoving cursor to the apparent maximum of the function. As you move the cursor, the X and Y coordinate values are updated continually. Chapter 17: Activities 472 4. Press r. The trace cursor is displayed on the Y1 function. The function that you are tracing is displayed in the topleft corner. 5. Press  and ~ to trace along Y1, one X dot at a time, evaluating Y1 at each X. You also can enter your estimate for the maximum value of X. 6. Press 3 Ë 8. When you press a number key while in TRACE, the X= prompt is displayed in the bottomleft corner. 7. Press Í. The trace cursor jumps to the point on the Y1 function evaluated at X=3.8. 8. Press  and ~ until you are on the maximum Y value. This is the maximum of Y1(X) for the X pixel values. The actual, precise maximum may lie between pixel values. Chapter 17: Activities 473 Zooming In on the Graph To help identify maximums, minimums, roots, and intersections of functions, you can magnify the viewing window at a specific location using the ZOOM instructions. 1. Press q to display the ZOOM menu. This menu is a typical TI84 Plus menu. To select an item, you can either press the number or letter next to the item, or you can press † until the item number or letter is highlighted, and then press Í. 2. Press 2 to select 2:Zoom In. The graph is displayed again. The cursor has changed to indicate that you are using a ZOOM instruction. 3. With the cursor near the maximum value of the function, press Í. The new viewing window is displayed. Both XmaxNXmin and YmaxNYmin have been adjusted by factors of 4, the default values for the zoom factors. Chapter 17: Activities 474 4. Press p to display the new window settings. Finding the Calculated Maximum You can use a CALCULATE menu operation to calculate a local maximum of a function. 1. Press y / (above r) to display the CALCULATE menu. Press 4 to select 4:maximum. The graph is displayed again with a
Left Bound? prompt. 2. Press  to trace along the curve to a point to the left of the maximum, and then press Í. A 4 at the top of the screen indicates the selected bound. A Right Bound? prompt is displayed. Chapter 17: Activities 475 3. Press ~ to trace along the curve to a point to the right of the maximum, and then press Í. A 3 at the top of the screen indicates the selected bound. A Guess? prompt is displayed. 4. Press  to trace to a point near the maximum, and then press Í. Or, press 3 Ë 8, and then press Í to enter a guess for the maximum. When you press a number key in TRACE, the X= prompt is displayed in the bottomleft corner. Notice how the values for the calculated maximum compare with the maximums found with the freemoving cursor, the trace cursor, and the table.
Note: In steps 2 and 3 above, you can enter values directly for Left Bound and Right Bound, in the same way as described in step 4. Chapter 17: Activities 476 Comparing Test Results Using Box Plots
Problem An experiment found a significant difference between boys and girls pertaining to their ability to identify objects held in their left hands, which are controlled by the right side of their brains, versus their right hands, which are controlled by the left side of their brains. The TI Graphics team conducted a similar test for adult men and women. The test involved 30 small objects, which participants were not allowed to see. First, they held 15 of the objects one by one in their left hands and guessed what they were. Then they held the other 15 objects one by one in their right hands and guessed what they were. Use box plots to compare visually the correctguess data from this table. Each row in the table represents the results observed for one subject. Note that 10 women and 12 men were tested.
Correct Guesses Women Left 8 9 12 11 10 8 12 Women Right 4 1 8 12 11 11 13 Men Left 7 8 7 5 7 8 11 Men Right 12 6 12 12 7 11 12 Chapter 17: Activities 477 Correct Guesses Women Left 7 9 11 Women Right 12 11 12 Men Left 4 10 14 13 5 Men Right 8 12 11 9 9 Procedure 1. Press … 5 to select 5:SetUpEditor. Enter list names WLEFT, WRGHT, MLEFT, and MRGHT, separated by commas. Press Í. The stat list editor now contains only these four lists. 2. Press … 1 to select 1:Edit. 3. Enter into WLEFT the number of correct guesses each woman made using her left hand (Women Left). Press ~ to move to WRGHT and enter the number of correct guesses each woman made using her right hand (Women Right). 4. Likewise, enter each man’s correct guesses in MLEFT (Men Left) and MRGHT (Men Right). 5. Press y ,. Select 1:Plot1. Turn on plot 1; define it as a modified box plot Õ that uses WLEFT. Move the cursor to the top line and select Plot2. Turn on plot 2; define it as a modified box plot that uses WRGHT. 6. Press o. Turn off all functions. Chapter 17: Activities 478 7. Press p. Set Xscl=1 and Yscl=0. Press q 9 to select 9:ZoomStat. This adjusts the viewing window and displays the box plots for the women’s results. 8. Press r. Women’s lefthand data Women’s righthand data Use  and ~ to examine minX, Q1, Med, Q3, and maxX for each plot. Notice the outlier to the women’s righthand data. What is the median for the left hand? For the right hand? With which hand were the women more accurate guessers, according to the box plots? 9. Examine the men’s results. Redefine plot 1 to use MLEFT, redefine plot 2 to use MRGHT. Press r.
Men’s lefthand data Men’s righthand data Press  and ~ to examine minX, Q1, Med, Q3, and maxX for each plot. What difference do you see between the plots? 10. Compare the lefthand results. Redefine plot 1 to use WLEFT, redefine plot 2 to use MLEFT, and then press r to examine minX, Q1, Med, Q3, and maxX for each plot. Who were the better lefthand guessers, men or women?
Chapter 17: Activities 479 11. Compare the righthand results. Define plot 1 to use WRGHT, define plot 2 to use MRGHT, and then press r to examine minX, Q1, Med, Q3, and maxX for each plot. Who were the better righthand guessers? In the original experiment boys did not guess as well with right hands, while girls guessed equally well with either hand. This is not what our box plots show for adults. Do you think that this is because adults have learned to adapt or because our sample was not large enough? Chapter 17: Activities 480 Graphing Piecewise Functions
Problem The fine for speeding on a road with a speed limit of 45 kilometers per hour (kph) is 50; plus 5 for each kph from 46 to 55 kph; plus 10 for each kph from 56 to 65 kph; plus 20 for each kph from 66 kph and above. Graph the piecewise function that describes the cost of the ticket. The fine (Y) as a function of kilometers per hour (X) is:
Y=0 Y = 50 + 5 (X N 45) Y = 50 + 5 … 10 + 10 (X N 55) Y = 50 + 5 … 10 + 10 … 10 + 20 (X N 65) 0 < X 45 45 < X 55 55 < X 65 65 < X Procedure 1. Press z. Select Func and the default settings. 2. Press o. Turn off all functions and stat plots. Enter the Y= function to describe the fine. Use the TEST menu operations to define the piecewise function. Set the graph style for Y1 to í (dot). Chapter 17: Activities 481 3. Press p and set Xmin=L2, Xscl=10, Ymin=L5, and Yscl=10. Ignore Xmax and Ymax; they are set by @X and @Y in step 4. 4. Press y 5 to return to the home screen. Store 1 to @X, and then store 5 to @Y. @X and @Y are on the VARS Window X/Y secondary menu. @X and @Y specify the horizontal and vertical distance between the centers of adjacent pixels. Integer values for @X and @Y produce nice values for tracing. 5. Press r to plot the function. At what speed does the ticket exceed 250? Chapter 17: Activities 482 Graphing Inequalities
Problem Graph the inequality 0.4x3 N 3x + 5 < 0.2x + 4. Use the TEST menu operations to explore the values of X where the inequality is true and where it is false. Procedure 1. Press z. Select Dot, Simul, and the default settings. Setting Dot mode changes all graph style icons to í (dot) in the Y= editor. 2. Press o. Turn off all functions and stat plots. Enter the left side of the inequality as Y4 and the right side as Y5. 3. Enter the statement of the inequality as Y6. This function evaluates to 1 if true or 0 if false. 4. Press q 6 to graph the inequality in the standard window. 5. Press r † † to move to Y6. Then press  and ~ to trace the inequality, observing the value of Y.
Chapter 17: Activities 483 6. Press o. Turn off Y4, Y5, and Y6. Enter equations to graph only the inequality. 7. Press r. Notice that the values of Y7 and Y8 are zero where the inequality is false. Chapter 17: Activities 484 Solving a System of Nonlinear Equations
Problem Using a graph, solve the equation x3N2x=2cos(x). Stated another way, solve the system of two equations and two unknowns: y = x 3N2x and y = 2cos(x). Use ZOOM factors to control the decimal places displayed on the graph. Procedure 1. Press z. Select the default mode settings. Press o. Turn off all functions and stat plots. Enter the functions. 2. Press q 4 to select 4:ZDecimal. The display shows that two solutions may exist (points where the two functions appear to intersect). 3. Press q ~ 4 to select 4:SetFactors from the ZOOM MEMORY menu. Set XFact=10 and YFact=10. Chapter 17: Activities 485 4. Press q 2 to select 2:Zoom In. Use , ~, }, and † to move the freemoving cursor onto the apparent intersection of the functions on the right side of the display. As you move the cursor, notice that the X and Y values have one decimal place. 5. Press Í to zoom in. Move the cursor over the intersection. As you move the cursor, notice that now the X and Y values have two decimal places. 6. Press Í to zoom in again. Move the freemoving cursor onto a point exactly on the intersection. Notice the number of decimal places. 7. Press y / 5 to select 5:intersect. Press Í to select the first curve and Í to select the second curve. To guess, move the trace cursor near the intersection. Press Í. What are the coordinates of the intersection point? 8. Press q 4 to select 4:ZDecimal to redisplay the original graph. 9. Press q. Select 2:Zoom In and repeat steps 4 through 8 to explore the apparent function intersection on the left side of the display. Chapter 17: Activities 486 Using a Program to Create the Sierpinski Triangle
Setting up the Program This program creates a drawing of a famous fractal, the Sierpinski Triangle, and stores the drawing to a picture. To begin, press ~ ~ 1. Name the program SIERPINS, and then press Í. The program editor is displayed. Program PROGRAM:SIERPINS :FnOff :ClrDraw :PlotsOff :AxesOff :0!Xmin:1!Xmax :0!Ymin:1!Ymax :rand!X:rand!Y :For(K,1,3000) :rand!N :If N1 à3 :Then :.5X!X :.5Y!Y :End
Beginning of For group. Set viewing window. If/Then group Chapter 17: Activities 487 :If 1 à3 <N and N2 à3 :Then :.5(.5+X)!X :.5(1+Y)!Y :End :If 2 à3 <N :Then :.5(1+X)!X :.5Y!Y :End :PtOn(X,Y) :End :StorePic 6 If/Then group. If/Then group. Draw point. End of For group. Store picture. After you execute the program above, you can recall and display the picture with the instruction RecallPic 6. Chapter 17: Activities 488 Graphing Cobweb Attractors
Problem Using Web format, you can identify points with attracting and repelling behavior in sequence graphing. Procedure 1. Press z. Select Seq and the default mode settings. Press y .. Select Web format and the default format settings. 2. Press o. Clear all functions and turn off all stat plots. Enter the sequence that corresponds to the expression Y = K X(1NX).
u(n)=Ku(nN1)(1Nu(nN1)) u(nMin)=.01 3. Press y 5 to return to the home screen, and then store 2.9 to K. 4. Press p. Set the window variables.
nMin=0 nMax=10 PlotStart=1 PlotStep=1 Xmin=0 Xmax=1 Xscl=1 Ymin=M.26 Ymax=1.1 Yscl=1 5. Press r to display the graph, and then press ~ to trace the cobweb. This is a cobweb with one attractor. Chapter 17: Activities 489 6. Change K to 3.44 and trace the graph to show a cobweb with two attractors. 7. Change K to 3.54 and trace the graph to show a cobweb with four attractors. Chapter 17: Activities 490 Using a Program to Guess the Coefficients
Setting Up the Program This program graphs the function A sin(BX) with random integer coefficients between 1 and 10. Try to guess the coefficients and graph your guess as C sin(DX). The program continues until your guess is correct. Program PROGRAM:GUESS :PlotsOff :Func :FnOff :Radian :ClrHome :"Asin(BX)"!Y1 :"Csin(DX)"!Y2 :GraphStyle(1,1) :GraphStyle(2,5) :FnOff 2 :randInt(1,10)!A :randInt(1,10)!B :0!C:0!D
Initialize coefficients. Define equations. Set line and path graph styles. Chapter 17: Activities 491 :L2p!Xmin :2p!Xmax :pà2!Xscl :L10!Ymin :10!Ymax :1!Yscl :DispGraph :Pause :FnOn 2 :Lbl Z :Prompt C,D :DispGraph :Pause :If C=A :Text(1,1,"C IS OK") :If CƒA :Text(1,1,"C IS WRONG") :If D=B :Text(1,50,"D IS OK") :If DƒB :Text(1,50,"D IS WRONG") :DispGraph :Pause Set viewing window. Display graph. Prompt for guess. Display graph. Display results. Display graph. Chapter 17: Activities 492 :If C=A and D=B :Stop :Goto Z Quit if guesses are correct. Chapter 17: Activities 493 Graphing the Unit Circle and Trigonometric Curves
Problem Using parametric graphing mode, graph the unit circle and the sine curve to show the relationship between them. Any function that can be plotted in Func mode can be plotted in Par mode by defining the X component as T and the Y component as F(T). Procedure 1. Press z. Select Par, Simul, and the default settings. 2. Press p. Set the viewing window.
Tmin=0 Tmax=2p Tstep=.1 Xmin=L2 Xmax=7.4 Xscl=pà2 Ymin=L3 Ymax=3 Yscl=1 3. Press o. Turn off all functions and stat plots. Enter the expressions to define the unit circle centered on (0,0). 4. Enter the expressions to define the sine curve. Chapter 17: Activities 494 5. Press r. As the graph is plotting, you may press Í to pause and Í again to resume graphing as you watch the sine function “unwrap” from the unit circle. Note: You can generalize the unwrapping. Replace sin(T) in Y2T with any other trig function to unwrap that function. Chapter 17: Activities 495 Finding the Area between Curves
Problem Find the area of the region bounded by: f(x) g(x) x = = = 300x / (x2 + 625) 3cos(.1x) 75 Procedure 1. Press z. Select the default mode settings. 2. Press p. Set the viewing window.
Xmin=0 Xmax=100 Xscl=10 Ymin=L5 Ymax=10 Yscl=1 Xres=1 3. Press o. Turn off all functions and stat plots. Enter the upper and lower functions.
Y1=300Xà(X2+625) Y2=3cos(.1X) 4. Press y / 5 to select 5:Intersect. The graph is displayed. Select a first curve, second curve, and guess for the intersection toward the left side of the display. The solution is displayed, and the value of X at the intersection, which is the lower limit of the integral, is stored in Ans and X. Chapter 17: Activities 496 5. Press y 5 to go to the home screen. Press y < 7 and use Shade( to see the area graphically.
Shade(Y2,Y1,Ans,75) 6. Press y 5 to return to the home screen. Enter the expression to evaluate the integral for the shaded region.
fnInt(Y1NY2,X,Ans,75) The area is 325.839962. Chapter 17: Activities 497 Using Parametric Equations: Ferris Wheel Problem
Problem Using two pairs of parametric equations, determine when two objects in motion are closest to each other in the same plane. A ferris wheel has a diameter (d) of 20 meters and is rotating counterclockwise at a rate (s) of one revolution every 12 seconds. The parametric equations below describe the location of a ferris wheel passenger at time T, where a is the angle of rotation, (0,0) is the bottom center of the ferris wheel, and (10,10) is the passenger’s location at the rightmost point, when T=0. X(T) = r cos a Y(T) = r + r sin a where a = 2pTs and r = d à2 A person standing on the ground throws a ball to the ferris wheel passenger. The thrower’s arm is at the same height as the bottom of the ferris wheel, but 25 meters (b) to the right of the ferris wheel’s lowest point (25,0). The person throws the ball with velocity (v0) of 22 meters per second at an angle (q) of 66¡ from the horizontal. The parametric equations below describe the location of the ball at time T. X(T) = b N Tv 0 cosq
2 Y(T) = Tv 0 sinq N (g à2) T 2 where g = 9.8 m/sec Chapter 17: Activities 498 Procedure 1. Press z. Select Par, Simul, and the default settings. Simul (simultaneous) mode simulates the two objects in motion over time. 2. Press p. Set the viewing window.
Tmin=0 Tmax=12 Tstep=.1 Xmin=L13 Xmax=34 Xscl=10 Ymin=0 Ymax=31 Yscl=10 3. Press o. Turn off all functions and stat plots. Enter the expressions to define the path of the ferris wheel and the path of the ball. Set the graph style for X2T to ë (path). Note: Try setting the graph styles to ë X1T and ì X2T, which simulates a chair on the ferris wheel and the ball flying through the air when you press s. 4. Press s to graph the equations. Watch closely as they are plotted. Notice that the ball and the ferris wheel passenger appear to be closest where the paths cross in the topright quadrant of the ferris wheel. Chapter 17: Activities 499 5. Press p. Change the viewing window to concentrate on this portion of the graph.
Tmin=1 Tmax=3 Tstep=.03 Xmin=0 Xmax=23.5 Xscl=10 Ymin=10 Ymax=25.5 Yscl=10 6. Press r. After the graph is plotted, press ~ to move near the point on the ferris wheel where the paths cross. Notice the values of X, Y, and T. 7. Press † to move to the path of the ball. Notice the values of X and Y (T is unchanged). Notice where the cursor is located. This is the position of the ball when the ferris wheel passenger passes the intersection. Did the ball or the passenger reach the intersection first? Chapter 17: Activities 500 You can use r to, in effect, take snapshots in time and explore the relative behavior of two objects in motion. Chapter 17: Activities 501 Demonstrating the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
Problem 1 Using the functions fnInt( and nDeriv( from the MATH menu to graph functions defined by integrals and derivatives demonstrates graphically that: F( x) =
x ∫1 dt x = ln ( x ) , x > 0 and that Dx ∫1  dt t 1 =1 x Procedure 1 1. Press z. Select the default settings. 2. Press p. Set the viewing window.
Xmin=.01 Xmax=10 Xscl=1 Ymin=L1.5 Ymax=2.5 Yscl=1 Xres=3 3. Press o. Turn off all functions and stat plots. Enter the numerical integral of 1àT from 1 to X and the function ln(X). Set the graph style for Y1 to ç (line) and Y2 to ë (path). Chapter 17: Activities 502 4. Press r. Press , }, ~, and † to compare the values of Y1 and Y2. 5. Press o. Turn off Y1 and Y2, and then enter the numerical derivative of the integral of 1àX and the function 1àX. Set the graph style for Y3 to ç (line) and Y4 to è (thick). 6. Press r. Again, use the cursor keys to compare the values of the two graphed functions, Y3 and Y4. Chapter 17: Activities 503 Problem 2 Explore the functions defined by y= ∫2 t x2 dt , ∫0 t x2 dt , and ∫2 t x2 dt Procedure 2 1. Press o. Turn off all functions and stat plots. Use a list to define these three functions simultaneously. Store the function in Y5. 2. Press q 6 to select 6:ZStandard. 3. Press r. Notice that the functions appear identical, only shifted vertically by a constant. 4. Press o. Enter the numerical derivative of Y5 in Y6. Chapter 17: Activities 504 5. Press r. Notice that although the three graphs defined by Y5 are different, they share the same derivative. Chapter 17: Activities 505 Computing Areas of Regular NSided Polygons
Problem Use the equation solver to store a formula for the area of a regular Nsided polygon, and then solve for each variable, given the other variables. Explore the fact that the limiting case is the area of a circle, pr2. Consider the formula A = NB 2 sin(pàN) cos(pàN) for the area of a regular polygon with N sides of equal length and B distance from the center to a vertex. N = 4 sides N = 8 sides N = 12 sides Procedure 1. Press 0 to select 0:Solver from the MATH menu. Either the equation editor or the interactive solver editor is displayed. If the interactive solver editor is displayed, press } to display the equation editor. 2. Enter the formula as 0=ANNB2sin(p / N)cos(p / N), and then press Í. The interactive solver editor is displayed. Chapter 17: Activities 506 3. Enter N=4 and B=6 to find the area (A) of a square with a distance (B) from center to vertex of 6 centimeters. 4. Press } } to move the cursor onto A, and then press Äƒ \. The solution for A is displayed on the interactive solver editor. 5. Now solve for B for a given area with various number of sides. Enter A=200 and N=6. To find the distance B, move the cursor onto B, and then press ƒ \. 6. Enter N=8. To find the distance B, move the cursor onto B, and then press ƒ \. Find B for N=9, and then for N=10. Find the area given B=6, and N=10, 100, 150, 1000, and 10000. Compare your results with p62 (the area of a circle with radius 6), which is approximately 113.097. 7. Enter B=6. To find the area A, move the cursor onto A, and then press ƒ \. Find A for N=10, then N=100, then N=150, then N=1000, and finally N=10000. Notice that as N gets large, the area A approaches pB2. Chapter 17: Activities 507 Now graph the equation to see visually how the area changes as the number of sides gets large. 8. Press z. Select the default mode settings. 9. Press p. Set the viewing window.
Xmin=0 Xmax=200 Xscl=10 Ymin=0 Ymax=150 Yscl=10 Xres=1 10. Press o. Turn off all functions and stat plots. Enter the equation for the area. Use X in place of N. Set the graph styles as shown. 11. Press r. After the graph is plotted, press 100 Í to trace to X=100. Press 150 Í. Press 188 Í. Notice that as X increases, the value of Y converges to p62, which is approximately 113.097. Y2=pB2 (the area of the circle) is a horizontal Chapter 17: Activities 508 asymptote to Y1. The area of an Nsided regular polygon, with r as the distance from the center to a vertex, approaches the area of a circle with radius r (pr 2) as N gets large. Chapter 17: Activities 509 Computing and Graphing Mortgage Payments
Problem You are a loan officer at a mortgage company, and you recently closed on a 30year home mortgage at 8 percent interest with monthly payments of 800. The new home owners want to know how much will be applied to the interest and how much will be applied to the principal when they make the 240th payment 20 years from now. Procedure 1. Press z and set the fixeddecimal mode to 2 decimal places. Set the other mode settings to the defaults. 2. Press Œ Í Í to display the TVM Solver. Enter these values. Note: Enter a positive number (800) to show PMT as a cash inflow. Payment values will be displayed as positive numbers on the graph. Enter 0 for FV, since the future value of a loan is 0 once it is paid in full. Enter PMT: END, since payment is due at the end of a period. 3. Move the cursor onto the PV= prompt, and then press ƒ \. The present value, or mortgage amount, of the house is displayed at the PV= prompt. Chapter 17: Activities 510 Now compare the graph of the amount of interest with the graph of the amount of principal for each payment. 4. Press z. Set Par and Simul. 5. Press o. Turn off all functions and stat plots. Enter these equations and set the graph styles as shown. Note: GPrn( and GInt( are located on the FINANCE menu (APPS 1:FINANCE). 6. Press p. Set these window variables.
Tmin=1 Tmax=360 Tstep=12 Xmin=0 Xmax=360 Xscl=10 Ymin=0 Ymax=1000 Yscl=100 Note: To increase the graph speed, change Tstep to 24. 7. Press r. After the graph is drawn, press 240 Í to move the trace cursor to T=240, which is equivalent to 20 years of payments.
Chapter 17: Activities 511 The graph shows that for the 240th payment (X=240), 358.03 of the 800 payment is applied to principal (Y=358.03).
Note: The sum of the payments (Y3T=Y1T+Y2T) is always 800. 8. Press † to move the cursor onto the function for interest defined by X2T and Y2T. Enter 240. The graph shows that for the 240th payment (X=240), 441.97 of the 800 payment is interest (Y=441.97). 9. Press y 5 Œ Í 9 to paste 9:bal( to the home screen. Check the figures from the graph. Chapter 17: Activities 512 At which monthly payment will the principal allocation surpass the interest allocation? Chapter 17: Activities 513 Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management
Checking Available Memory
MEMORY Menu At any time you can check available memory or manage existing memory by selecting items from the MEMORY menu. To access this menu, press y L. MEMORY 1: About...
Displays information about the graphing calculator including current OS version number. 2: Mem Mgmt/Del... Reports memory availability and variable usage. 3: Clear Entries 4: ClrAllLists 5: Archive... 6: UnArchive... 7: Reset... 8: Group...
Clears ENTRY (lastentry storage). Clears all lists in memory. Archives a selected variable. UnArchives a selected variable. Displays the RAM, ARCHIVE, and ALL menus Displays GROUP and UNGROUP menus. To check memory availability, first press y L and then select 2:Mem Mgmt/Del. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 514 RAM FREE displays the amount of available RAM. ARC FREE displays the amount of available Archive. Available RAM, Archive, and App Slots The TI84 Plus / TI84 Plus Silver Edition has Archive, RAM, and Application (App) slot memory for you to use and manage. The available RAM stores computations, lists, variables, and data. The available Archive lets you store programs, Apps, groups, and other variables. The App slots are actually individual sectors of Flash ROM where Apps are stored.
Graphing calculator TI84 Plus TI84 Plus Silver Edition Available RAM 24 Kilobytes 24 Kilobytes Available Archive 491 Kilobytes 1.5 Megabytes App Slots 30 94 Note: Some Apps take up several App slots. Displaying the About Screen
About displays information about the TI84 Plus Operating System (OS) Version, Product Number, Product Identification (ID), and Flash Application (App) Certificate Revision Number. To display the About screen, press y L and then select 1:About. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 515 Displays the type of graphing calculator. Displays the OS version. As new software upgrades become available, you can electronically upgrade your unit. Displays the Product ID. Each Flashbased graphing calculator has a unique product ID, which you may need if you contact technical support. You can also use this 14 digit ID to register your calculator at education.ti.com, or identify your calculator in the event that it is lost or stolen. Displaying the MEMORY MANAGEMENT/DELETE Menu
Mem Mgmt/Del displays the MEMORY MANAGEMENT/DELETE menu. The two lines at the top report the total amount of available RAM (RAM FREE) and Archive (ARC FREE) memory. By selecting menu items on this screen, you can see the amount of memory each variable type is using. This information can help you determine if you need to delete variables from memory to make room for new data, such as programs or Apps. To check memory usage, follow these steps. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 516 1. Press y L to display the MEMORY menu.
Note: The # and $ in the top or bottom of the left column indicate that you can scroll up or down to view more variable types. 2. Select 2:Mem Mgmt/Del to display the MEMORY MANAGEMENT/DELETE menu. The TI84 Plus expresses memory quantities in bytes. 3. Select variable types from the list to display memory usage.
Notes: Real, List, YVars, and Prgm variable types never reset to zero, even after memory is cleared. Apps are independent applications which are stored in Flash ROM. AppVars is a variable holder used to store variables created by Apps. You cannot edit or change variables in AppVars unless you do so through the application which created them.
Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 517 To leave the MEMORY MANAGEMENT/DELETE menu, press either y 5 or ‘. Both options display the home screen. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 518 Deleting Items from Memory
Deleting an Item To increase available memory by deleting the contents of any variable (real or complex number, list, matrix, Y= variable, program, Apps, AppVars, picture, graph database, or string), follow these steps. 1. Press y L to display the MEMORY menu. 2. Select 2:Mem Mgmt/Del to display the MEMORY MANAGEMENT/DELETE menu. 3. Select the type of data you want to delete, or select 1:All for a list of all variables of all types. A screen is displayed listing each variable of the type you selected and the number of bytes each variable is using. For example, if you select 4:List, the LIST editor screen is displayed. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 519 4. Press } and † to move the selection cursor (4) next to the item you want to delete, and then press {. The variable is deleted from memory. You can delete individual variables one by one from this screen. No warning will be given to verify the deletion.
Note: If you are deleting programs or Apps, you will receive a message asking you to confirm this delete action. Select 2:Yes to continue. To leave any variable screen without deleting anything, press y 5, which displays the home screen. You cannot delete some system variables, such as the lastanswer variable Ans and the statistical variable RegEQ. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 520 Clearing Entries and List Elements
Clear Entries
Clear Entries clears the contents of the ENTRY (last entry on home screen) storage area. To clear the ENTRY storage area, follow these steps. 1. Press y L to display the MEMORY menu. 2. Select 3:Clear Entries to paste the instruction to the home screen. 3. Press Í to clear the ENTRY storage area. To cancel Clear Entries, press ‘.
Note: If you select 3:Clear Entries from within a program, the Clear Entries instruction is pasted to the program editor, and the Entry (last entry) is cleared when the program is executed. ClrAllLists
ClrAllLists sets the dimension of each list in RAM to 0. To clear all elements from all lists, follow these steps. 1. Press y L to display the MEMORY menu. 2. Select 4:ClrAllLists to paste the instruction to the home screen. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 521 3. Press Í to set the dimension of each list in memory to 0. To cancel ClrAllLists, press ‘.
ClrAllLists does not delete list names from memory, from the LIST NAMES menu, or from the stat list editor. Note: If you select 4:ClrAllLists from within a program, the ClrAllLists instruction is pasted to the program editor. The lists are cleared when the program is executed. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 522 Archiving and UnArchiving Variables
Archiving and UnArchiving Variables Archiving lets you store data, programs, or other variables to the user data archive (ARC) where they cannot be edited or deleted inadvertently. Archiving also allows you to free up RAM for variables that may require additional memory. Archived variables cannot be edited or executed. They can only be seen and unarchived. For example, if you archive list L1, you will see that L1 exists in memory but if you select it and paste the name L1 to the home screen, you won’t be able to see its contents or edit it.
Note: Not all variables may be archived. Not all archived variables may be unarchived. For example, system variables including r, t, x, y, and q cannot be archived. Apps and Groups always exist in Flash ROM so there is no need to archive them. Groups cannot be unarchived. However, you can ungroup or delete them. Archive? (yes/no) yes yes yes yes yes UnArchive? (yes/no) yes yes yes yes yes Variable Type Real numbers Complex numbers Matrices Lists Programs Names A, B, ... , Z A, B, ... , Z [A], [B], [C], ... , [J] L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, and userdefined names Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 523 Variable Type Functions Parametric equations Polar functions Sequence functions Stat plots Graph databases Graph pictures Strings Tables Apps AppVars Groups Variables with reserved names Names Y1, Y2, . . . , Y9, Y0 X1T and Y1T, ... , X6T and Y6T r1, r2, r3, r4, r5, r6 u, v, w Plot1, Plot2, Plot3 GDB1, GDB2,... Pic1, Pic2, ... , Pic9, Pic0 Str1, Str2, . . . Str9, Str0 TblStart, Tb1, TblInput Applications Application variables Archive? (yes/no) no no no no no yes yes yes no see Note above yes see Note above UnArchive? (yes/no) not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable yes yes yes not applicable no yes no not applicable minX, maxX, RegEQ, and others no Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 524 Variable Type System variables Names Xmin, Xmax, and others Archive? (yes/no) no UnArchive? (yes/no) not applicable Archiving and unarchiving can be done in two ways: • • Use the 5:Archive or 6:UnArchive commands from the MEMORY menu or CATALOG. Use a Memory Management editor screen. Before archiving or unarchiving variables, particularly those with a large byte size (such as large programs) use the MEMORY menu to: • • Find the size of the variable. See if there is enough free space.
For: Archive UnArchive Sizes must be such that: Archive free size > variable size RAM free size > variable size Note: If there is not enough space, unarchive or delete variables as necessary. Be aware that when you unarchive a variable, not all the memory associated with that variable in user data archive will be released since the system keeps track of where the variable has been and where it is now in RAM. Even if there appears to be enough free space, you may see a Garbage Collection message when you attempt to archive a variable. Depending on the usability of empty blocks in the user data archive, you may need to unarchive existing variables to create more free space.
Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 525 To archive or unarchive a list variable (L1) using the Archive/UnArchive options from the MEMORY menu: 1. Press y L to display the MEMORY menu. 2. Select 5:Archive or 6:UnArchive to place the command in the Home screen. 3. Press y d to place the L1 variable in the Home screen. 4. Press Í to complete the archive process. Note: An asterisk will be displayed to the left of the Archived variable name to indicate it is archived. To archive or unarchive a list variable (L1) using a Memory Management editor: 1. Press y L to display the MEMORY menu. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 526 2. Select 2:Mem Mgmt/Del to display the MEMORY MANAGEMENT/DELETE menu. 3. Select 4:List to display the LIST menu. 4. Press Í to archive L1. An asterisk will appear to the left of L1 to indicate it is an archived variable. To unarchive a variable in this screen, put the cursor next to the archived variable and press Í. The asterisk will disappear. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 527 5. Press y 5 to leave the LIST menu.
Note: You can access an archived variable for the purpose of linking, deleting, or unarchiving it, but you cannot edit it. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 528 Resetting the TI84 Plus
RAM ARCHIVE ALL Menu
Reset displays the RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu. This menu gives you the option of resetting all memory (including default settings) or resetting selected portions of memory while preserving other data stored in memory, such as programs and Y= functions. For instance, you can choose to reset all of RAM or just restore the default settings. Be aware that if you choose to reset RAM, all data and programs in RAM will be erased. For archive memory, you can reset variables (Vars), applications (Apps), or both of these. Be aware that if you choose to reset Vars, all data and programs in archive memory will be erased. If you choose to reset Apps, all applications in archive memory will be erased. When you reset defaults on the TI84 Plus, all defaults in RAM are restored to the factory settings. Stored data and programs are not changed. These are some examples of TI84 Plus defaults that are restored by resetting the defaults. • • • • • • Mode settings such as Normal (notation); Func (graphing); Real (numbers); and Full (screen)
Y= functions off Window variable values such as Xmin=L10, Xmax=10, Xscl=1, Yscl=1, and Xres=1
STAT PLOTS off Format settings such as CoordOn (graphing coordinates on); AxesOn; and ExprOn (expression on)
rand seed value to 0 Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 529 Displaying the RAM ARCHIVE ALL Menu To display the RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu on the TI84 Plus, follow these steps. 1. Press y L to display the MEMORY menu. 2. Select 7:Reset to display the RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu. Resetting RAM Memory Resetting all RAM restores RAM system variables to factory settings and deletes all nonsystem variables and all programs. Resetting RAM defaults restores all system variables to default settings without deleting variables and programs in RAM. Resetting all RAM or resetting defaults does not affect variables and applications in user data archive.
Note: Before you reset all RAM memory, consider restoring sufficient available memory by deleting only selected data. To reset all RAM memory or RAM defaults on the TI84 Plus, follow these steps. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 530 1. From the RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu, select 1:All RAM to display the RESET RAM menu or 2:Defaults to display the RESET DEFAULTS menu. 2. If you are resetting RAM, read the message below the RESET RAM menu. • • To cancel the reset and return to the HOME screen, press Í. To erase RAM memory or reset defaults, select 2:Reset. Depending on your choice, the message RAM cleared or Defaults set is displayed on the home screen. Resetting Archive Memory When resetting archive memory on the TI84 Plus, you can choose to delete from user data archive all variables, all applications, or both variables and applications. To reset all or part of user data archive memory, follow these steps. 1. From the RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu, press ~ to display the ARCHIVE menu. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 531 2. Select one of the following:
1:Vars to display the RESET ARC VARS menu. 2:Apps to display the RESET ARC APPS menu. 3:Both to display the RESET ARC BOTH menu. 3. Read the message below the menu. • To cancel the reset and return to the HOME screen, press Í. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 532 • To continue with the reset, select 2:Reset. A message indicating the type of archive memory cleared will be displayed on the HOME screen. Resetting All Memory When resetting all memory on the TI84 Plus, RAM and user data archive memory is restored to factory settings. All nonsystem variables, applications, and programs are deleted. All system variables are reset to default settings. Before you reset all memory, consider restoring sufficient available memory by deleting only selected data. To reset all memory on the TI84 Plus, follow these steps. 1. From the RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu, press ~ ~ to display the ALL menu. 2. Select 1:All Memory to display the RESET MEMORY menu. 3. Read the message below the RESET MEMORY menu. • To cancel the reset and return to the HOME screen, press Í.
533 Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management • To continue with the reset, select 2:Reset. The message MEM cleared is displayed on the HOME screen. When you clear memory, the contrast sometimes changes. If the screen is faded or blank, adjust the contrast by pressing y } or †. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 534 Grouping and Ungrouping Variables
Grouping Variables Grouping allows you to make a copy of two or more variables residing in RAM and then store them as a group in user data archive. The variables in RAM are not erased. The variables must exist in RAM before they can be grouped. In other words, archived data cannot be included in a group. Once grouped, the variables can be deleted from RAM to open memory. When the variables are needed later, they can be ungrouped for use. To create a group of variables: 1. Press y L to display the MEMORY menu. 2. Select 8:Group to display GROUP UNGROUP menu. 3. Press Í to display the GROUP menu. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 535 4. Enter a name for the new group and press Í.
Note: A group name can be one to eight characters long. The first character must be a letter from A to Z or q. The second through eighth characters can be letters, numbers, or q. 5. Select the type of data you want to group. You can select 1:All+ which shows all variables of all types available and selected. You can also select 2:All which shows all variables of all types available but not selected. A screen is displayed listing each variable of the type you selected. For example, suppose some variables have been created in RAM, and selecting 2:All displays the following screen. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 536 6. Press } and † to move the selection cursor (4) next to the first item you want to copy into a group, and then press Í. A small square will remain to the left of all variables selected for grouping. Repeat the selection process until all variables for the new group are selected and then press ~ to display the DONE menu. 7. Press Í to complete the grouping process. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 537 Note: You can only group variables in RAM. You cannot group some system variables, such as the lastanswer variable Ans and the statistical variable RegEQ. Ungrouping Ungrouping Variables Ungrouping allows you to make a copy of variables in a group stored in user data archive and place them ungrouped in RAM. DuplicateName Menu During the ungrouping action, if a duplicate variable name is detected in RAM, the
DUPLICATE NAME menu is displayed. DuplicateName 1: Rename 2: Overwrite
Prompts to rename receiving variable. Overwrites data in receiving duplicate variable. variables. 3: Overwrite All Overwrites data in all receiving duplicate 4: Omit 5: Quit
Skips ungrouping of sending variable. Stops ungrouping at duplicate variable. Notes about Menu Items: • When you select 1:Rename, the Name= prompt is displayed, and alphalock is on. Enter a new variable name, and then press Í. Ungrouping resumes. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 538 • When you select 2:Overwrite, the unit overwrites the data of the duplicate variable name found in RAM. Ungrouping resumes. When you select 3: Overwrite All, the unit overwrites the data of all duplicate variable names found in RAM. Ungrouping resumes. When you select 4:Omit, the unit does not ungroup the variable in conflict with the duplicated variable name found in RAM. Ungrouping resumes with the next item. When you select 5:Quit, ungrouping stops, and no further changes are made. • • • To ungroup a group of variables: 1. Press y L to display the MEMORY menu. 2. Select 8:Group to display the GROUP UNGROUP menu. 3. Press ~ to display the UNGROUP menu. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 539 4. Press } and † to move the selection cursor (4) next to the group variable you want to ungroup, and then press Í. The ungroup action is completed.
Note: Ungrouping does not remove the group from user data archive. You must delete the group in user data archive to remove it. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 540 Garbage Collection
Garbage Collection Message If you use the user data archive extensively, you may see a Garbage Collect? message. This occurs if you try to archive a variable when there is not enough free contiguous archive memory. The Garbage Collect? message lets you know an archive will take longer than usual. It also alerts you that the archive will fail if there is not enough memory. The message can also alert you when a program is caught in a loop that repetitively fills the user data archive. Select No to cancel the garbage collection process, and then find and correct the errors in your program. When YES is selected, the TI84 Plus will attempt to rearrange the archived variables to make additional room. Responding to the Garbage Collection Message • • • • To cancel, select 1:No. If you select 1:No, the message ERR:ARCHIVE FULL will be displayed. To continue archiving, select 2:Yes. If you select 2:Yes, the process message Garbage Collecting... or Defragmenting... will be displayed. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 541 Note: The process message Defragmenting... is displayed whenever an application marked for deletion is encountered. Garbage collection may take up to 20 minutes, depending on how much of archive memory has been used to store variables. After garbage collection, depending on how much additional space is freed, the variable may or may not be archived. If not, you can unarchive some variables and try again. Why Is Garbage Collection Necessary? The user data archive is divided into sectors. When you first begin archiving, variables are stored consecutively in sector 1. This continues to the end of the sector. An archived variable is stored in a continuous block within a single sector. Unlike an application stored in user data archive, an archived variable cannot cross a sector boundary. If there is not enough space left in the sector, the next variable is stored at the beginning of the next sector. Typically, this leaves an empty block at the end of the previous sector.
Sector 1 Empty block variable A variable B variable D variable C Sector 2 Depending on its size, variable D is stored in one of these locations. Sector 3 Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 542 Each variable that you archive is stored in the first empty block large enough to hold it. This process continues to the end of the last sector. Depending on the size of individual variables, the empty blocks may account for a significant amount of space. Garbage collection occurs when the variable you are archiving is larger than any empty block. How Unarchiving a Variable Affects the Process When you unarchive a variable, it is copied to RAM but it is not actually deleted from user data archive memory. Unarchived variables are “marked for deletion,” meaning they will be deleted during the next garbage collection.
v a r ia b le A Sector 1 After you unarchive variables B and C, they continue to take up space.
v a r ia b le D Sector 2 Sector 3 If the MEMORY Screen Shows Enough Free Space Even if the MEMORY screen shows enough free space to archive a variable or store an application, you may still get a Garbage Collect? message or an ERR: ARCHIVE FULL message. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 543 When you unarchive a variable, the Archive free amount increases immediately, but the space is not actually available until after the next garbage collection. If the Archive free amount shows enough available space for your variable, there probably will be enough space to archive it after garbage collection (depending on the usability of any empty blocks). The Garbage Collection Process The garbage collection process: • • Deletes unarchived variables from the user data archive. Rearranges the remaining variables into consecutive blocks.
v a ria b le A v a ria b le D Sector 1 Sector 2 Note: Power loss during garbage collection may cause all memory (RAM and Archive) to be deleted. Using the GarbageCollect Command You can reduce the number of automatic garbage collections by periodically optimizing memory. This is done by using the GarbageCollect command. To use the GarbageCollect command, follow these steps. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 544 1. From the HOME screen, press y N to display the CATALOG. 2. Press † or } to scroll the CATALOG until the selection cursor points to the GarbageCollect command or press G to skip to the commands starting with the letter G. 3. Press Í to paste the command to the HOME screen. 4. Press Í to display the Garbage Collect? message. 5. Select 2:Yes to begin garbage collection. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 545 ERR:ARCHIVE FULL Message
Even if the MEMORY screen shows enough free space to archive a variable or store an application, you may still get an ERR: ARCHIVE FULL message. An ERR:ARCHIVE FULL message may be displayed: • • When there is insufficient space to archive a variable within a continuous block and within a single sector. When there is insufficient space to store an application within a continuous block of memory. When the message is displayed, it will indicate the largest single space of memory available for storing a variable and an application. To resolve the problem, use the GarbageCollect command to optimize memory. If memory is still insufficient, you must delete variables or applications to increase space. Chapter 18: Memory and Variable Management 546 Chapter 19: Communication Link
Getting Started: Sending Variables
Getting Started is a fastpaced introduction. Read the chapter for details. Create and store a variable and a matrix, and then transfer them to another TI84 Plus. 1. On the home screen of the sending unit, press 5 Ë 5 ¿ ƒ Q. Press Í to store 5.5 to Q. 2. Press y H y H 1 ¢ 2 y I y H 3 ¢ 4 y I y I ¿ y > 1. Press Í to store the matrix to [A]. 3. On the sending unit, press y L to display the MEMORY menu. 4. On the sending unit, press 2 to select 2:Mem Mgmt/Del. The MEMORY MANAGEMENT menu is displayed. Chapter 19: Communication Link 547 5. On the sending unit, press 5 to select 5:Matrix. The MATRIX editor screen is displayed. 6. On the sending unit, press Í to archive [A]. An asterisk (ä) will appear, signifying that [A] is now archived. 7. Connect the graphing calculators with the USB unittounit cable. Push both ends in firmly. 8. On the receiving unit, press y 8 ~ to display the RECEIVE menu. Press 1 to select 1:Receive. The message Waiting... is displayed and the busy indicator is on. 9. On the sending unit, press y 8 to display the SEND menu. 10. Press 2 to select 2:AllN. The AllN SELECT screen is displayed. 11. Press † until the selection cursor ( 4 ) is next to [A] MATRX. Press Í. 12. Press † until the selection cursor is next to Q REAL. Press Í. A square dot next to [A] and Q indicates that each is selected to send. Chapter 19: Communication Link 548 13. On the sending unit, press ~ to display the TRANSMIT menu. 14. On the sending unit, press 1 to select 1:Transmit and begin transmission. The receiving unit displays the message Receiving....When the items are transmitted, both units display the name and type of each transmitted variable. Chapter 19: Communication Link 549 TI84 Plus LINK
This chapter describes how to communicate with compatible TI units. The TI84 Plus has a USB port to connect and communicate with another TI84 Plus or TI84 Plus Silver Edition. A USB unittounit cable is included with the TI84 Plus. The TI84 Plus also has an I/O port using a I/O unittounit cable to communicate with: • • • TI83 Plus Silver Edition TI83 Plus TI83 • • • TI82 TI73 CBL 2™ or a CBR™ Connecting Two Graphing Calculators with a USB UnittoUnit Cable or an I/O UnittoUnit Cable
USB UnittoUnit Cable The TI84 Plus USB link port is located at the top right edge of the graphing calculator. 1. Firmly insert either end of the USB unittounit cable into the USB port. 2. Insert the other end of the cable into the other graphing calculator’s USB port. Chapter 19: Communication Link 550 I/O UnittoUnit Cable The TI84 Plus I/O link port is located at the top left edge of the graphing calculator. 1. Firmly insert either end of the I/O unittounit cable into the port. 2. Insert the other end of the cable into the other graphing calculator’s I/O port. TI84 Plus to a TI83 Plus using I/O UnittoUnit Cable The TI84 Plus I/O link port is located at the top left edge of the graphing calculator. The TI83 Plus I/O link port is located at the bottom edge of the graphing calculator. 3. Firmly insert either end of the I/O unittounit cable into the port. 4. Insert the other end of the cable into the other graphing calculator’s I/O port. Linking to the CBL/CBR System The CBL 2™ and the CBR™ are optional accessories that also connect to a TI84 Plus with the I/O unittounit cable. With a CBL 2 or CBR and a TI84 Plus, you can collect and analyze realworld data. Chapter 19: Communication Link 551 Linking to a Computer With TI Connect™ software and the USB computer cable that is included with your TI84 Plus, you can link the graphing calculator to a personal computer. Chapter 19: Communication Link 552 Selecting Items to Send
LINK SEND Menu To display the LINK SEND menu, press y 8. SEND RECEIVE
Displays all items as selected, including RAM and Flash applications. Displays all items as deselected. Displays all program names. Displays all list names. Displays list names L1 through L6. Displays all graph databases. Displays all picture data types. Displays all matrix data types. Displays all real variables. Displays all complex variables. Displays all Y= variables. Displays all string variables. Displays all software applications. 1: All+... 2: AllN... 3: Prgm... 4: List... 5: Lists to TI82... 6: GDB... 7: Pic... 8: Matrix... 9: Real... 0: Complex... A: YVars... B: String... C: Apps... Chapter 19: Communication Link 553 SEND RECEIVE
Displays all software application variables. Displays all grouped variables. Sends the Calculator ID number immediately. (You do not need to select SEND.) Sends operating system updates to another TI84 Plus Silver Edition or TI84 Plus. You can not send the operating system to the TI83 Plus product family. Selects all RAM and mode settings (no Flash applications or archived items) for backup to another TI84 Plus, TI84 Plus Silver Edition, TI83 Plus Silver Edition, or to a TI83 Plus. D: AppVars... E: Group... F: SendId G: SendOS H: Back Up... When you select an item on the LINK SEND menu, the corresponding SELECT screen is displayed.
Note: Each SELECT screen, except All+…, is initially displayed with nothing preselected. All+… is displayed with everything preselected. To select items to send: 1. Press y 8 on the sending unit to display the LINK SEND menu. 2. Select the menu item that describes the data type to send. The corresponding SELECT screen is displayed. 3. Press } and † to move the selection cursor ( 4 ) to an item you want to select or deselect. 4. Press Í to select or deselect the item. Selected names are marked with a 0. Chapter 19: Communication Link 554 Note: An asterisk (ä) to the left of an item indicates the item is archived. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select or deselect additional items. Sending the Selected Items After you have selected items to send on the sending unit and set the receiving unit to receive, follow these steps to transmit the items. To set the receiving unit, see Receiving Items. 1. Press ~ on the sending unit to display the TRANSMIT menu. 2. Confirm that Waiting... is displayed on the receiving unit, which indicates it is set to receive. Chapter 19: Communication Link 555 3. Press Í to select 1:Transmit. The name and type of each item are displayed linebyline on the sending unit as the item is queued for transmission, and then on the receiving unit as each item is accepted. Note: Items sent from the RAM of the sending unit are transmitted to the RAM of the receiving unit. Items sent from user data archive (flash) of the sending unit are transmitted to user data archive (flash) of the receiving unit. After all selected items have been transmitted, the message Done is displayed on both calculators. Press } and † to scroll through the names. Sending to a TI84 Plus Silver Edition or TI84 Plus You can transfer variables (all types), programs, and Flash applications to another TI84 Plus Silver Edition or TI84 Plus. You can also backup the RAM memory of one unit to another.
Note: Keep in mind that the TI84 Plus has less Flash memory than the TI84 Plus Silver Edition. • Variables stored in RAM on the sending TI84 Plus Silver Edition will be sent to the RAM of the receiving TI84 Plus Silver Edition or TI84 Plus. Chapter 19: Communication Link 556 • Variables and applications stored in the user data archive of the sending TI84 Plus Silver Edition will be sent to the user data archive of the receiving TI84 Plus Silver Edition or TI84 Plus. After sending or receiving data, you can repeat the same transmission to additional TI84 Plus Silver Edition or TI84 Plus units—from either the sending unit or the receiving unit—without having to reselect data to send. The current items remain selected. However, you cannot repeat transmission if you selected All+ or All.. To send data to an additional TI84 Plus Silver Edition or a TI84 Plus: 1. Use a USB unittounit cable to link two units together. 2. On the sending unit press y 8 and select a data type and items to SEND. 3. Press ~ on the sending unit to display the TRANSMIT menu. 4. On the other unit, press y 8 ~ to display the RECEIVE menu. 5. Press Í on the receiving unit. 6. Press Í on the sending unit. A copy of the selected item(s) is sent to the receiving unit. 7. Disconnect the link cable only from the receiving unit and connect it to another unit. 8. Press y 8 on the sending unit. 9. Select only the data type. For example, if the unit just sent a list, select 4:LIST.
Note: The item(s) you want to send are preselected from the last transmission. Do not select or deselect any items. If you select or deselect an item, all selections or deselections from the last transmission are cleared. 10. Press ~ on the sending unit to display the TRANSMIT menu. 11. On the new receiving unit, press y 8 ~ to display the RECEIVE menu. Chapter 19: Communication Link 557 12. Press Í on the receiving unit. 13. Press Í on the sending unit. A copy of the selected item(s) is sent to the receiving unit. 14. Repeat steps 7 through 13 until the items are sent to all additional units. Sending to a TI83 Plus or TI83 Plus Silver Edition You can send all variables from a TI84 Plus to a TI83 Plus or TI83 Plus Silver Edition except Flash applications with new features, or programs with new features in them. If archived variables on the TI84 Plus are variable types recognized and used on the TI83 Plus or TI83 Plus Silver Edition, you can send these variables to the TI83 Plus or TI83 Plus Silver Edition. They will be automatically sent to the RAM of the TI83 Plus or TI83 Plus Silver Edition during the transfer process. It will send to archive if the item is from archive. To send data to a TI83 Plus or TI83 Plus Silver Edition: 1. Use an I/O unittounit cable to link the two units together. 2. Set the TI83 Plus or TI83 Plus Silver Edition to receive. 3. Press y 8 on the sending TI84 Plus to display the LINK SEND menu. 4. Select the menu of the items you want to transmit. 5. Press ~ on the sending TI84 Plus to display the LINK TRANSMIT menu. 6. Confirm that the receiving unit is set to receive. 7. Press Í on the sending TI84 Plus to select 1:Transmit and begin transmitting. Chapter 19: Communication Link 558 Receiving Items
LINK RECEIVE Menu To display the LINK RECEIVE menu, press y 8 ~. SEND RECEIVE
Sets unit to receive data transmission. 1: Receive Receiving Unit When you select 1:Receive from the LINK RECEIVE menu on the receiving unit, the message Waiting... and the busy indicator are displayed. The receiving unit is ready to receive transmitted items. To exit the receive mode without receiving items, press É, and then select 1:Quit from the Error in Xmit menu. When transmission is complete, the unit exits the receive mode. You can select 1:Receive again to receive more items. The receiving unit then displays a list of items received. Press y 5 to exit the receive mode. Chapter 19: Communication Link 559 DuplicateName Menu During transmission, if a variable name is duplicated, the DuplicateName menu is displayed on the receiving unit. DuplicateName 1: Rename
Prompts to rename receiving variable. 2: Overwrite Overwrites data in receiving variable. 3: Omit 4: Quit
Skips transmission of sending variable. Stops transmission at duplicate variable. When you select 1:Rename, the Name= prompt is displayed, and alphalock is on. Enter a new variable name, and then press Í. Transmission resumes. When you select 2:Overwrite, the sending unit’s data overwrites the existing data stored on the receiving unit. Transmission resumes. When you select 3:Omit, the sending unit does not send the data in the duplicated variable name. Transmission resumes with the next item. When you select 4:Quit, transmission stops, and the receiving unit exits receive mode. Receiving from a TI84 Plus Silver Edition or TI84 Plus The TI84 Plus Silver Edition and the TI84 Plus are totally compatible. Keep in mind, however that the TI84 Plus has less Flash memory than a TI84 Plus Silver Edition. Chapter 19: Communication Link 560 You cannot send memory backups between the TI84 Plus product family and the TI83 Plus product family. Receiving from a TI83 Plus Silver Edition or TI83 Plus The TI84 Plus product family and the TI83 Plus product family are compatible with a few exceptions. Receiving Receiving from a TI83 You can transfer all variables and programs from a TI83 to a TI84 Plus if they fit in the RAM of the TI84 Plus. The RAM of the TI84 Plus is slightly less than the RAM of the TI83. Chapter 19: Communication Link 561 Backing Up RAM Memory
Warning: H:Back Up overwrites the RAM memory and mode settings in the receiving unit. All information in the RAM memory of the receiving unit is lost. Note: Archived items on the receiving unit are not overwritten. You can backup the contents of RAM memory and mode settings (no Flash applications or archived items) to another TI84 Plus Silver Edition. You can also backup RAM memory and mode settings to a TI84 Plus. To perform a RAM memory backup: 1. Use a USB unittounit cable to link two TI84 Plus units, or a TI84 Plus and a TI84 Plus Silver Edition together. 2. On the sending unit press y 8 and select H:Back Up. The MEMORYBACKUP screen displays. 3. On the receiving unit, press y 8 ~ to display the RECEIVE menu. 4. Press Í on the receiving unit. 5. Press Í on the sending unit. A WARNING — Backup message displays on the receiving unit. Chapter 19: Communication Link 562 6. Press Í on the receiving unit to continue the backup. — or — Press 2:Quit on the receiving unit to cancel the backup and return to the LINK SEND menu
Note: If a transmission error is returned during a backup, the receiving unit is reset. Memory Backup Complete When the backup is complete, both the sending graphing calculator and receiving graphing calculator display a confirmation screen. Chapter 19: Communication Link 563 Error Conditions
A transmission error occurs after one or two seconds if: • • • • • A cable is not attached to the sending unit. A cable is not attached to the receiving unit.
Note: If the cable is attached, push it in firmly and try again. The receiving unit is not set to receive transmission. You attempt a backup between a TI73, TI82, TI83, TI83 Plus, or TI83 Plus Silver Edition. You attempt a data transfer from a TI84 Plus to a TI83 Plus, TI83 Plus Silver Edition, TI83, TI82, or TI73 with variables or features not recognized by the TI83 Plus, TI83 Plus Silver Edition, TI83, TI82, or TI73. New variable types and features not recognized by the TI83, TI83 Plus, TI82, or TI73 include applications, application variables, grouped variables, new variable types, or programs with new features in them such as Archive, UnArchive, SendID, SendOS, Asm(, AsmComp(, AsmPrgm, checkTmr(, ClockOff, ClockOn, dayOfWk(, getDate, getDtFmt, getDtStr(, getTime, getTmFmt, getTmStr, isClockOn, setDate(, setDtFmt(, setTime(, setTmFmt(, startTmr, and timeCnv. • • • • You attempt a data transfer from a TI84 Plus to a TI82 with data other than real lists L1 through L6 or without using menu item 5:Lists to TI82. You attempt a data transfer from a TI84 Plus to a TI73 with data other than real numbers, pics, real lists L1 through L6 or named lists with q as part of the name. Although a transmission error does not occur, these two conditions may prevent successful transmission. You try to use Get( with a graphing calculator instead of a CBL 2™ or CBR™. Chapter 19: Communication Link 564 • You try to use GetCalc( with a TI83 instead of a TI84 Plus or TI84 Plus Silver Edition. Insufficient Memory in Receiving Unit • • • During transmission, if the receiving unit does not have sufficient memory to receive an item, the Memory Full menu is displayed on the receiving unit. To skip this item for the current transmission, select 1:Omit. Transmission resumes with the next item. To cancel the transmission and exit receive mode, select 2:Quit. Chapter 19: Communication Link 565 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
Functions return a value, list, or matrix. You can use functions in an expression. Instructions initiate an action. Some functions and instructions have arguments. Optional arguments and accompanying commas are enclosed in brackets ( [ ] ). For details about an item, including argument descriptions and restrictions, turn to the page listed on the right side of the table. From the CATALOG, you can paste any function or instruction to the home screen or to a command line in the program editor. However, some functions and instructions are not valid on the home screen. The items in this table appear in the same order as they appear in the CATALOG. † indicates either keystrokes that are valid in the program editor only or ones that paste certain instructions when you are in the program editor. Some keystrokes display menus that are available only in the program editor. Others paste mode, format, or tableset instructions only when you are in the program editor.
Function or Instruction/Arguments abs(value) Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Result Returns the absolute value of a real number, NUM expression, list, or matrix. 1:abs( Returns the magnitude of a complex number or list. CPX 5:abs( abs(complex value) Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 566 Function or Instruction/Arguments valueA and valueB Result Returns 1 if both valueA and valueB are ƒ 0. valueA and valueB can be real numbers, expressions, or lists. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item y:
LOGIC 1:and angle(value) Returns the polar angle of a complex number or list of CPX complex numbers. 4:angle( Performs a oneway analysis of variance for comparing the means of two to 20 populations. Returns the last answer. Moves the specified variables from RAM to the user data archive memory. Executes an assembly language program. ANOVA(list1,list2 [,list3,...,list20]) …
TESTS H:ANOVA( Ans Archive yZ yL
5:Archive Asm(assemblyprgmname) AsmComp(prgmASM1, prgmASM2) yN
Asm( Compiles an assembly yN language program written AsmComp( in ASCII and stores the hex version. Must be used as the first line of an assembly language program. AsmPrgm yN
AsmPrgm Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 567 Function or Instruction/Arguments augment(matrixA, matrixB) augment(listA,listB) Result Returns a matrix, which is matrixB appended to matrixA as new columns. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item y>
MATH 7:augment( Returns a list, which is listB y 9 concatenated to the end of OPS listA. 9:augment( Turns off the graph axes. Turns on the graph axes. Sets the mode to rectangular complex number mode (a+bi). †y. AxesOff †y. AxesOn †z a+bi AxesOff AxesOn a+bi bal(npmt[,roundvalue]) Computes the balance at Œ 1:Finance npmt for an amortization CALC schedule using stored 9:bal( values for PV, æ, and PMT and rounds the computation to roundvalue. Computes a cumulative probability at x for the discrete binomial distribution with the specified numtrials and probability p of success on each trial. binomcdf(numtrials,p [,x]) y=
DISTR B:binomcdf( Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 568 Function or Instruction/Arguments binompdf(numtrials,p [,x]) Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Computes a probability at x y = for the discrete binomial DISTR distribution with the A:binompdf( specified numtrials and probability p of success on each trial. c2cdf(lowerbound,
upperbound,df) y= Computes the c2 DISTR distribution probability between lowerbound and 8:c2cdf( upperbound for the specified degrees of freedom df.
Computes the probability density function (pdf) for the c2 distribution at a specified x value for the specified degrees of freedom df. c2pdf(x,df) y=
DISTR 7:c2pdf( c2LTest(observedmatrix,
expectedmatrix [,drawflag]) Performs a chisquare test. † … drawflag=1 draws results; TESTS drawflag=0 calculates C:c2LTest( results. †… that sample data is from a TESTS population that conforms to D:c2GOFLTest( a specified distribution. c2GOFTest(observedlist, Performs a test to confirm
expectedlist,df) Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 569 Function or Instruction/Arguments checkTmr(starttime) Result Returns the number of seconds since you used startTmr to start the timer. The starttime is the value displayed by startTmr. Draws a circle with center (X,Y) and radius. Clears the contents of the Last Entry storage area. Turns off the clock display in the mode screen. Turns on the clock display in the mode screen. Sets to 0 the dimension of all lists in memory. Clears all drawn elements from a graph or drawing. Clears the home screen. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item yN
checkTmr( Circle(X,Y,radius) y<
DRAW 9:Circle( Clear Entries yL
MEMORY 3:Clear Entries ClockOff ClockOn ClrAllLists yN
ClockOff yN
ClockOn yL
MEMORY 4:ClrAllLists ClrDraw y<
DRAW 1:ClrDraw † I/O 8:ClrHome ClrHome Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 570 Function or Instruction/Arguments ClrList listname1 [,listname2, ..., listname n] ClrTable Result Sets to 0 the dimension of one or more listnames. Clears all values from the table. Returns the complex conjugate of a complex number or list of complex numbers. Sets connected plotting mode; resets all Y= editor graphstyle settings to ç . Turns off cursor coordinate value display. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item …
EDIT 4:ClrList † I/O 9:ClrTable conj(value) CPX 1:conj( †z Connected †y. CoordOff Connected CoordOff CoordOn cos(value) cosL1(value) cosh(value) Turns on cursor coordinate † y . value display. CoordOn Returns cosine of a real ™ number, expression, or list. Returns arccosine of a real y @ number, expression, or list. Returns hyperbolic cosine of a real number, expression, or list. yN
cosh( Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 571 Function or Instruction/Arguments coshL1 (value) Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Returns hyperbolic yN arccosine of a real number, coshL1( expression, or list. Fits a cubic regression model to Xlistname and Ylistname with frequency freqlist, and stores the regression equation to regequ. Returns a list of the cumulative sums of the elements in list, starting with the first element. CubicReg [Xlistname, Ylistname,freqlist, regequ] …
CALC 6:CubicReg cumSum(list) y9
OPS 6:cumSum( cumSum(matrix) Returns a matrix of the y> cumulative sums of matrix MATH elements. Each element in 0:cumSum( the returned matrix is a cumulative sum of a matrix column from top to bottom. Returns an integer from 1 to 7, with each integer representing a day of the week. Use dayOfWk( to determine on which day of the week a particular date would occur. The year must be 4 digits; month and day can be 1 or 2 digit. dayOfWk(year,month, day) yN
dayOfWk( 1:Sunday 2:Monday 3:Tuesday... Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 572 Function or Instruction/Arguments dbd(date1,date2) Result Calculates the number of days between date1 and date2 using the actualdaycount method. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Œ 1:Finance
CALC D:dbd( value4Dec Displays a real or complex number, expression, list, or MATH matrix in decimal format. 2:4Dec Sets degree angle mode. Deletes from memory the contents of variable. †z Degree † CTL G:DelVar Degree DelVar variable DependAsk DependAuto Sets table to ask for †ydependentvariable values. Depend: Ask Sets table to generate dependentvariable values automatically. Returns determinant of matrix. Sets diagnosticsoff mode; r, r2, and R2 are not displayed as regression model results. †yDepend: Auto det(matrix) y>
MATH 1:det( DiagnosticOff yN
DiagnosticOff Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 573 Function or Instruction/Arguments DiagnosticOn Result Sets diagnosticson mode; r, r2, and R2 are displayed as regression model results. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item yN
DiagnosticOn dim(listname) Returns the dimension of listname. Returns the dimension of matrixname as a list. y9
OPS 3:dim( dim(matrixname) y>
MATH 3:dim( length!dim(listname) Assigns a new dimension y9 (length) to a new or existing OPS listname. 3:dim( Assigns new dimensions to y > a new or existing MATH matrixname. 3:dim( Displays the home screen. † I/O 3:Disp † I/O 3:Disp † I/O 4:DispGraph {rows,columns}! dim(matrixname) Disp Disp [valueA,valueB, valueC,...,value n] DispGraph Displays each value. Displays the graph. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 574 Function or Instruction/Arguments DispTable Result Displays the table. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item † I/O 5:DispTable value4DMS Displays value in DMS format. Sets dot plotting mode; resets all Y= editor graphstyle settings to í . Draws expression (in terms of X) on the graph. Draws the inverse of expression by plotting X values on the yaxis and Y values on the xaxis. Decrements variable by 1; skips commandA if variable < value. Returns e raised to power. y;
ANGLE 4:4DMS †z Dot Dot DrawF expression y<
DRAW 6:DrawF DrawInv expression y<
DRAW 8:DrawInv † CTL B:DS<( :DS<(variable,value) :commandA :commands e^(power) e^(list) Exponent: valueâexponent yJ Returns a list of e raised to y J a list of powers. Returns value times 10 to the exponent. yD Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 575 Function or Instruction/Arguments Exponent: listâexponent Exponent: matrixâexponent Result Returns list elements times 10 to the exponent. Returns matrix elements times 10 to the exponent. Computes the effective interest rate. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item yD yD Œ 1:Finance
CALC C:4Eff( 4Eff(nominal rate, compounding periods)
Else See If:Then:Else End Identifies end of For(, IfThenElse, Repeat, or While loop. Sets engineering display mode. Converts the contents of a Y= var to a string and stores it in Strn. † CTL 7:End †z Eng Eng Equ4String(Y= var,Strn) yN
Equ4String( expr(string) ExpReg [Xlistname, Ylistname,freqlist,regequ] Converts string to an yN expression and executes it. expr( Fits an exponential … regression model to CALC Xlistname and Ylistname with 0:ExpReg frequency freqlist, and stores the regression equation to regequ. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 576 Function or Instruction/Arguments ExprOff ExprOn Result Turns off the expression display during TRACE. Turns on the expression display during TRACE. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item †y. ExprOff †y. ExprOn Ücdf(lowerbound, upperbound, numerator df, denominator df) Computes the Û y= distribution probability DISTR between lowerbound and 0:Ücdf( upperbound for the specified numerator df (degrees of freedom) and denominator df. Stores value to each element in matrixname. Stores value to each element in listname. Sets fixeddecimal mode for # of decimal places. Sets floating decimal mode. Fill(value,matrixname) y>
MATH 4:Fill( Fill(value,listname) y9
OPS 4:Fill( †z 0123456789 (select one) †z Float Fix # Float Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 577 Function or Instruction/Arguments fMax(expression, variable,lower,upper [,tolerance]) Result Returns the value of variable where the local maximum of expression occurs, between lower and upper, with specified tolerance. Returns the value of variable where the local minimum of expression occurs, between lower and upper, with specified tolerance. Returns the function integral of expression with respect to variable, between lower and upper, with specified tolerance. Deselects all Y= functions or specified Y= functions. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item MATH 7:fMax( fMin(expression,variable, lower,upper[,tolerance]) MATH 6:fMin( fnInt(expression,variable, lower,upper[,tolerance]) MATH 9:fnInt( FnOff [function#, function#,...,function n] YVARS 4:On/Off 2:FnOff FnOn [function#, function#,...,function n] Selects all Y= functions or specified Y= functions. YVARS 4:On/Off 1:FnOn Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 578 Function or Instruction/Arguments :For(variable,begin,end [,increment]) :commands :End :commands fPart(value) Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Executes commands † through End, incrementing CTL variable from begin by 4:For( increment until variable>end. Returns the fractional part or parts of a real or complex number, expression, list, or matrix. NUM 4:fPart( Üpdf(x,numerator df, denominator df) Computes the Û y= DISTR distribution probability between lowerbound and 9:Üpdf( upperbound for the specified numerator df (degrees of freedom) and denominator df. Displays a real or complex number, expression, list, or MATH matrix as a fraction 1:4Frac simplified to its simplest terms. Sets full screen mode. Sets function graphing mode. †z Full †z Func value4Frac Full Func Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 579 Function or Instruction/Arguments GarbageCollect Result Displays the garbage collection menu to allow cleanup of unused archive memory. Returns the greatest common divisor of valueA and valueB, which can be real numbers or lists. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item yN
GarbageCollect gcd(valueA,valueB) NUM 9:gcd( geometcdf(p,x) Computes a cumulative y= probability at x, the number DISTR of the trial on which the first F:geometcdf( success occurs, for the discrete geometric distribution with the specified probability of success p. Computes a probability at x, y = the number of the trial on DISTR which the first success E:geometpdf( occurs, for the discrete geometric distribution with the specified probability of success p. Gets data from the CBL 2™ † or CBR™ System and I/O stores it in variable. A:Get( geometpdf(p,x) Get(variable) Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 580 Function or Instruction/Arguments GetCalc(variable [,portflag]) Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Gets contents of variable on † another TI84 Plus and I/O stores it to variable on the 0:GetCalc( receiving TI84 Plus. By default, the TI84 Plus uses the USB port if it is connected. If the USB cable is not connected, it uses the I/O port. portflag=0 use USB port if connected; portflag=1 use USB port; portflag=2 use I/O port. Returns a list giving the date according to the current value of the clock. The list is in {year,month,day} format. Returns an integer representing the date format that is currently set on the device. 1 = M/D/Y 2 = D/M/Y 3 = Y/M/D getDate yN
getDate getDtFmt yN
getDtFmt Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 581 Function or Instruction/Arguments getDtStr(integer) Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Returns a string of the yN current date in the format getDtStr( specified by integer, where: 1 = M/D/Y 2 = D/M/Y 3 = Y/M/D Returns the key code for † the current keystroke, or 0, I/O if no key is pressed. 7:getKey Returns a list giving the yN time according to the getTime current value of the clock. The list is in {hour,minute,second} format. The time is returned in the 24 hour format. Returns an integer yN representing the clock time getTmFmt format that is currently set on the device. 12 = 12 hour format 24 = 24 hour format Returns a string of the current clock time in the format specified by integer, where: 12 = 12 hour format 24 = 24 hour format getKey getTime getTmFmt getTmStr(integer) yN
getTmStr( Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 582 Function or Instruction/Arguments Goto label Result Transfers control to label. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item † CTL 0:Goto † CTL H:GraphStyle( †y. GridOff †y. GridOn †z GT GraphStyle(function#, graphstyle#) GridOff GridOn GT Horiz Horizontal y Sets a graphstyle for function#. Turns off grid format. Turns on grid format. Sets graphtable vertical splitscreen mode. Sets horizontal splitscreen † z mode. Horiz Draws a horizontal line at y. y < DRAW 3:Horizontal Returns the identity matrix of dimension rows x dimension columns. identity(dimension) y>
MATH 5:identity( :If condition :commandA :commands If condition = 0 (false), skips † commandA. CTL 1:If Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 583 Function or Instruction/Arguments :If condition :Then :commands :End :commands :If condition :Then :commands :Else :commands :End :commands imag(value) Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Executes commands from † Then to End if condition = 1 CTL (true). 2:Then Executes commands from † Then to Else if CTL condition = 1 (true); from 3:Else Else to End if condition = 0 (false). Returns the imaginary (nonreal) part of a complex CPX number or list of complex 3:imag( numbers. Sets table to ask for independentvariable values. Sets table to generate independentvariable values automatically. Displays graph. †yIndpnt: Ask †yIndpnt: Auto † I/O 1:Input IndpntAsk IndpntAuto Input Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 584 Function or Instruction/Arguments Input [variable] Input ["text",variable] Input [Strn,variable] Result Prompts for value to store to variable. Displays Strn and stores entered value to variable. Returns the character position in string of the first character of substring beginning at start. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item † I/O 1:Input † I/O 1:Input inString(string,substring [,start]) yN
inString( int(value) Returns the largest integer a real or complex NUM number, expression, list, or 5:int( matrix. Computes the sum, rounded to roundvalue, of the interest amount between pmt1 and pmt2 for an amortization schedule. Computes the inverse cumulative normal distribution function for a given area under the normal distribution curve specified by m and s. GInt(pmt1,pmt2 [,roundvalue]) Œ 1:Finance CALC A:GInt( y=
DISTR 3:invNorm( invNorm(area[,m,s]) Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 585 Function or Instruction/Arguments invT(area,df) Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Computes the inverse y= cumulative studentt DISTR probability function 4:invT( specified by degree of freedom, df for a given area under the curve. Returns the integer part of a real or complex number, expression, list, or matrix. iPart(value) NUM 3:iPart( irr(CF0,CFList[,CFFreq]) Returns the interest rate at Œ 1:Finance which the net present value CALC of the cash flow is equal to 8:irr( zero. Increments variable by 1; skips commandA if variable>value. Identifies if clock is ON or OFF. Returns 1 if the clock is ON. Returns 0 if the clock is OFF. Identifies the next one to five characters as a usercreated list name. Turns off axes labels. † CTL A:IS>( :IS>(variable,value) :commandA :commands isClockOn yN
isClockOn Ùlistname y9
OPS B:Ù †y. LabelOff LabelOff Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 586 Function or Instruction/Arguments LabelOn Lbl label Result Turns on axes labels. Creates a label of one or two characters. Returns the least common multiple of valueA and valueB, which can be real numbers or lists. Returns the number of characters in string. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item †y. LabelOn † CTL 9:Lbl lcm(valueA,valueB) NUM 8:lcm( length(string) Line(X1,Y1,X2,Y2) yN
length( Draws a line from (X1,Y1) to y < (X2,Y2). DRAW 2:Line( Erases a line from (X1,Y1) to (X2,Y2). Line(X1,Y1,X2,Y2,0) y<
DRAW 2:Line( LinReg(a+bx) [Xlistname, Fits a linear regression Ylistname,freqlist, model to Xlistname and regequ] Ylistname with frequency freqlist, and stores the regression equation to regequ. …
CALC 8:LinReg(a+bx) Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 587 Function or Instruction/Arguments Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item LinReg(ax+b) [Xlistname, Fits a linear regression Ylistname,freqlist, model to Xlistname and regequ] Ylistname with frequency freqlist, and stores the regression equation to regequ. LinRegTTest [Xlistname, Ylistname,freqlist, alternative,regequ] Performs a linear regression and a ttest. alternative=L1 is <; alternative=0 is ƒ; alternative=1 is >. …
CALC 4:LinReg(ax+b) †… TESTS F:LinRegTTest LinRegTInt [Xlistname, Ylistname,freqlist, confidence level, regequ] Performs a linear †… regression and computes TESTS the t confidence interval for G:LinRegTInt the slope coefficient b. Returns a list containing the differences between consecutive elements in list. Fills matrixname column by column with the elements from each specified listname. Returns the natural logarithm of a real or complex number, expression, or list. @List(list) y9
OPS 7:@List( List 4 matr(listname1,..., listname n,matrixname) y9
OPS 0:List 4 matr( ln(value) µ Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 588 Function or Instruction/Arguments LnReg [Xlistname, Ylistname,freqlist, regequ] Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Fits a logarithmic … regression model to CALC Xlistname and Ylistname with 9:LnReg frequency freqlist, and stores the regression equation to regequ. Returns logarithm of a real or complex number, expression, or list. Fits a logistic regression model to Xlistname and Ylistname with frequency freqlist, and stores the regression equation to regequ. Fits a linear equation to a scatter plot. log(value) « Logistic [Xlistname, Ylistname,freqlist, regequ] …
CALC B:Logistic ManualFit equname …
CALC D:ManualFit Matr4list(matrix, listnameA,...,listname n) Matr4list(matrix, column#,listname) Fills each listname with elements from each column in matrix. Fills a listname with elements from a specified column# in matrix. y9
OPS A:Matr4list( y9
OPS A:Matr4list( Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 589 Function or Instruction/Arguments max(valueA,valueB) Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Returns the larger of valueA and valueB. NUM 7:max( Returns largest real or complex element in list. max(list) y9
MATH 2:max( max(listA,listB) Returns a real or complex y9 list of the larger of each pair MATH of elements in listA and 2:max( listB. Returns a real or complex list of the larger of value or each list element. Returns the mean of list with frequency freqlist. Returns the median of list with frequency freqlist. Fits a medianmedian model to Xlistname and Ylistname with frequency freqlist, and stores the regression equation to regequ. max(value,list) y9
MATH 2:max( mean(list[,freqlist]) y9
MATH 3:mean( median(list[,freqlist]) y9
MATH 4:median( MedMed [Xlistname, Ylistname,freqlist, regequ] …
CALC 3:MedMed Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 590 Function or Instruction/Arguments Menu("title","text1", label1[,...,"text7",label7]) min(valueA,valueB) Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Generates a menu of up to † seven items during CTL program execution. C:Menu( Returns smaller of valueA and valueB. Returns smallest real or complex element in list. NUM 6:min( min(list) y9
MATH 1:min( min(listA,listB) Returns real or complex list y 9 of the smaller of each pair MATH of elements in listA and 1:min( listB. Returns a real or complex y 9 list of the smaller of value or MATH each list element. 1:min( Returns the number of combinations of valueA taken valueB at a time. min(value,list) valueA nCr valueB PRB 3:nCr value nCr list Returns a list of the combinations of value taken PRB each element in list at a 3:nCr time. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 591 Function or Instruction/Arguments list nCr value Result Returns a list of the combinations of each element in list taken value at a time. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item PRB 3:nCr listA nCr listB Returns a list of the combinations of each PRB element in listA taken each 3:nCr element in listB at a time. Returns approximate numerical derivative of expression with respect to variable at value, with specified H. Computes the nominal interest rate. Sets normal display mode. nDeriv(expression, variable,value[,H]) MATH 8:nDeriv( 4Nom(effective rate,
compounding periods) Normal normalcdf(lowerbound, upperbound[,m,s]) Œ 1:Finance
CALC B:4Nom( †z Normal Computes the normal y= distribution probability DISTR between lowerbound and 2:normalcdf( upperbound for the specified m and s. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 592 Function or Instruction/Arguments normalpdf(x[,m,s]) Result Computes the probability density function for the normal distribution at a specified x value for the specified m and s. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item y=
DISTR 1:normalpdf( not(value) Returns 0 if value is ƒ 0. y: value can be a real number, LOGIC expression, or list. 4:not( Returns the number of permutations of valueA taken valueB at a time. valueA nPr valueB PRB 2:nPr value nPr list Returns a list of the permutations of value taken PRB each element in list at a 2:nPr time. Returns a list of the permutations of each element in list taken value at a time. list nPr value PRB 2:nPr listA nPr listB Returns a list of the permutations of each PRB element in listA taken each 2:nPr element in listB at a time. Computes the sum of the present values for cash inflows and outflows. npv(interest rate,CF0, CFList[,CFFreq]) Œ 1:Finance
CALC 7:npv( Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 593 Function or Instruction/Arguments valueA or valueB Result Returns 1 if valueA or valueB is ƒ 0. valueA and valueB can be real numbers, expressions, or lists. Displays text beginning at specified row and column. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item y:
LOGIC 2:or Output(row,column, "text") Output(row,column, value) Param Pause † I/O 6:Output( Displays value beginning at † specified row and column. I/O 6:Output( Sets parametric graphing mode. Suspends program execution until you press Í. Displays value; suspends program execution until you press Í. Defines Plot# (1, 2, or 3) of type Scatter or xyLine for Xlistname and Ylistname using mark. †z Par † CTL 8:Pause † CTL 8:Pause †y, STAT PLOTS 1:Plot12:Plot23:Plot3 Pause [value] Plot#(type,Xlistname, Ylistname,mark) Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 594 Function or Instruction/Arguments Plot#(type,Xlistname, freqlist) Result Defines Plot# (1, 2, or 3) of type Histogram or Boxplot for Xlistname with frequency freqlist. Defines Plot# (1, 2, or 3) of type ModBoxplot for Xlistname with frequency freqlist using mark. Defines Plot# (1, 2, or 3) of type NormProbPlot for datalistname on data axis using mark. data axis can be X or Y. Deselects all stat plots or one or more specified stat plots (1, 2, or 3). Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item †y, STAT PLOTS 1:Plot12:Plot23:Plot3†y, STAT PLOTS 1:Plot12:Plot23:Plot3†y, STAT PLOTS 1:Plot12:Plot23:Plot3 Plot#(type,Xlistname, freqlist,mark) Plot#(type,datalistname, data axis,mark) PlotsOff [1,2,3] y,
STAT PLOTS 4:PlotsOff PlotsOn [1,2,3] Selects all stat plots or one y , or more specified stat plots STAT PLOTS (1, 2, or 3). 5:PlotsOn Specifies an annuity due, where payments occur at the beginning of each payment period. Pmt_Bgn Œ 1:Finance
CALC F:Pmt_Bgn Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 595 Function or Instruction/Arguments Pmt_End Result Specifies an ordinary annuity, where payments occur at the end of each payment period. Computes a cumulative probability at x for the discrete Poisson distribution with specified mean m. Computes a probability at x for the discrete Poisson distribution with the specified mean m. Sets polar graphing mode. Displays complex value in polar format. Sets polar graphing coordinates format. Executes the program name. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Œ 1:Finance
CALC E:Pmt_End poissoncdf(m,x) y=
DISTR D:poissoncdf( poissonpdf(m,x) y=
DISTR C:poissonpdf( †z Pol Polar complex value 4Polar CPX 7:4Polar †y. PolarGC † CTRL D:prgm PolarGC prgmname Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 596 Function or Instruction/Arguments Result Computes the sum, rounded to roundvalue, of the principal amount between pmt1 and pmt2 for an amortization schedule. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item GPrn(pmt1,pmt2 [,roundvalue]) Œ 1:Finance
CALC 0:GPrn( prod(list[,start,end]) Returns product of list y9 elements between start and MATH end. 6:prod( Prompts for value for variableA, then variableB, and so on. † I/O 2:Prompt Prompt variableA [,variableB,...,variable n] 1PropZInt(x,n [,confidence level]) 2PropZInt(x1,n1,x2,n2 [,confidence level]) 1PropZTest(p0,x,n [,alternative,drawflag]) Computes a oneproportion † … z confidence interval. TESTS A:1PropZInt( Computes a twoproportion † … z confidence interval. TESTS B:2PropZInt( Computes a oneproportion † … z test. alternative=L1 is <; TESTS 5:1PropZTest( alternative=0 is ƒ; alternative=1 is >. drawflag=1 draws results; drawflag=0 calculates results. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 597 Function or Instruction/Arguments 2PropZTest(x1,n1,x2,n2 [,alternative,drawflag]) Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Computes a twoproportion † … z test. alternative=L1 is <; TESTS 6:2PropZTest( alternative=0 is ƒ; alternative=1 is >. drawflag=1 draws results; drawflag=0 calculates results. Reverses a point at (x,y). PtChange(x,y) y<
POINTS 3:PtChange( PtOff(x,y[,mark]) Erases a point at (x,y) using y < mark. POINTS 2:PtOff( Draws a point at (x,y) using y < mark. POINTS 1:PtOn( Fits a power regression model to Xlistname and Ylistname with frequency freqlist, and stores the regression equation to regequ. Reverses pixel at (row,column); 0 row 62 and 0 column 94. PtOn(x,y[,mark]) PwrReg [Xlistname, Ylistname,freqlist, regequ] …
CALC A:PwrReg PxlChange(row,column) y<
POINTS 6:PxlChange( Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 598 Function or Instruction/Arguments PxlOff(row,column) Result Erases pixel at (row,column); 0 row 62 and 0 column 94. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item y<
POINTS 5:PxlOff( PxlOn(row,column) Draws pixel at (row,column); y < 0 row 62 and POINTS 4:PxlOn( 0 column 94. Returns 1 if pixel (row, column) is on, 0 if it is off; 0 row 62 and 0 column 94. pxlTest(row,column) y<
POINTS 7:pxlTest( P4Rx(r,q) Returns X, given polar y; coordinates r and q or a list ANGLE of polar coordinates. 7:P4Rx( Returns Y, given polar y; coordinates r and q or a list ANGLE of polar coordinates. 8:P4Ry( Fits a quadratic regression model to Xlistname and Ylistname with frequency freqlist, and stores the regression equation to regequ. P4Ry(r,q) QuadReg [Xlistname, Ylistname,freqlist, regequ] …
CALC 5:QuadReg Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 599 Function or Instruction/Arguments QuartReg [Xlistname, Ylistname,freqlist, regequ] Result Fits a quartic regression model to Xlistname and Ylistname with frequency freqlist, and stores the regression equation to regequ. Sets radian angle mode. Returns a random number between 0 and 1 for a specified number of trials numtrials. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item …
CALC 7:QuartReg Radian rand[(numtrials)] †z Radian PRB 1:rand randBin(numtrials,prob [,numsimulations]) Generates and displays a random real number from a PRB specified Binomial 7:randBin( distribution. Generates and displays a random integer within a range specified by lower and upper integer bounds for a specified number of trials numtrials. randInt( lower,upper [,numtrials]) PRB 5:randInt( randM(rows,columns) Returns a random matrix of y > rows (199) × columns MATH (199). 6:randM( Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 600 Function or Instruction/Arguments randNorm(m,s [,numtrials]) Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Generates and displays a random real number from a PRB specified Normal 6:randNorm( distribution specified by m and s for a specified number of trials numtrials. Sets the mode to polar complex number mode (re^qi). Sets mode to display complex results only when you enter complex numbers. Returns the real part of a complex number or list of complex numbers. †z re^qi †z Real re^qi Real real(value) CPX 2:real( RecallGDB n Restores all settings stored y < in the graph database STO variable GDBn. 4:RecallGDB Displays the graph and adds the picture stored in Picn. Displays complex value or list in rectangular format. RecallPic n y<
STO 2:RecallPic complex value 4Rect CPX 6:4Rect Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 601 Function or Instruction/Arguments RectGC ref(matrix) Result Sets rectangular graphing coordinates format. Returns the rowechelon form of a matrix. Executes commands until condition is true. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item †y. RectGC y>
MATH A:ref( † CTL 6:Repeat † CTL E:Return :Repeat condition :commands :End :commands Return Returns to the calling program. Returns a number, expression, list, or matrix rounded to #decimals ( 9). round(value[,#decimals]) NUM 2:round( ärow(value,matrix,row) Returns a matrix with row y> of matrix multiplied by value MATH and stored in row. E:ärow( Returns a matrix with rowA y > of matrix added to rowB and MATH stored in rowB. D:row+( Returns a matrix with rowA of matrix multiplied by value, added to rowB, and stored in rowB. row+(matrix,rowA,rowB) ärow+(value,matrix, rowA,rowB) y>
MATH F:ärow+( Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 602 Function or Instruction/Arguments rowSwap(matrix,rowA, rowB) rref(matrix) Result Returns a matrix with rowA of matrix swapped with rowB. Returns the reduced rowechelon form of a matrix. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item y>
MATH C:rowSwap( y>
MATH B:rref( R4Pr(x,y) Returns R, given y; rectangular coordinates x ANGLE and y or a list of rectangular 5:R4Pr( coordinates. Returns q, given y; rectangular coordinates x ANGLE and y or a list of rectangular 6:R4Pq( coordinates. Performs a twosample Û test. alternative=L1 is <; alternative=0 is ƒ; alternative=1 is >. drawflag=1 draws results; drawflag=0 calculates results. †… TESTS E:2SampÜTest R4Pq(x,y) 2SampÜTest [listname1, listname2,freqlist1, freqlist2,alternative, drawflag] (Data list input) Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 603 Function or Instruction/Arguments 2SampÜTest Sx1,n1, Sx2,n2[,alternative, drawflag] (Summary stats input) Result Performs a twosample Û test. alternative=L1 is <; alternative=0 is ƒ; alternative=1 is >. drawflag=1 draws results; drawflag=0 calculates results. Computes a twosample t confidence interval. pooled=1 pools variances; pooled=0 does not pool variances. Computes a twosample t confidence interval. pooled=1 pools variances; pooled=0 does not pool variances. Computes a twosample t test. alternative=L1 is <; alternative=0 is ƒ; alternative=1 is >. pooled=1 pools variances; pooled=0 does not pool variances. drawflag=1 draws results; drawflag=0 calculates results. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item †… TESTS E:2SampÜTest 2SampTInt [listname1, listname2, freqlist1,freqlist2, confidence level,pooled] (Data list input) 2SampTInt v1,Sx1,n1, v2,Sx2,n2 [,confidence level,pooled] (Summary stats input) 2SampTTest [listname1, listname2,freqlist1, freqlist2,alternative, pooled,drawflag] (Data list input) †… TESTS 0:2SampTInt †… TESTS 0:2SampTInt †… TESTS 4:2SampTTest Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 604 Function or Instruction/Arguments 2SampTTest v1,Sx1,n1, v2,Sx2,n2[,alternative, pooled,drawflag] (Summary stats input) Result Computes a twosample t test. alternative=L1 is <; alternative=0 is ƒ; alternative=1 is >. pooled=1 pools variances; pooled=0 does not pool variances. drawflag=1 draws results; drawflag=0 calculates results. Computes a twosample z confidence interval. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item †… TESTS 4:2SampTTest 2SampZInt(s1,s2 [,listname1,listname2, freqlist1,freqlist2, confidence level]) (Data list input) 2SampZInt(s1,s2, †… TESTS 9:2SampZInt( v1,n1,v2,n2
[,confidence level]) (Summary stats input) 2SampZTest(s1,s2 [,listname1,listname2, freqlist1,freqlist2, alternative,drawflag]) (Data list input) Computes a twosample z confidence interval. †… TESTS 9:2SampZInt( †… TESTS 3:2SampZTest( Computes a twosample z test. alternative=L1 is <; alternative=0 is ƒ; alternative=1 is >. drawflag=1 draws results; drawflag=0 calculates results. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 605 Function or Instruction/Arguments 2SampZTest(s1,s2, Result Computes a twosample z test. alternative=L1 is <; alternative=0 is ƒ; alternative=1 is >. drawflag=1 draws results; drawflag=0 calculates results. Sets scientific notation display mode. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item †… TESTS 3:2SampZTest( v1,n1,v2,n2
[,alternative,drawflag]) (Summary stats input) Sci Select(Xlistname, Ylistname) †z Sci Selects one or more y9 specific data points from a OPS scatter plot or xyLine plot 8:Select( (only), and then store•s the selected data points to two new lists, Xlistname and Ylistname. Sends contents of variable to the CBL 2™ or CBR™ System. Returns list created by evaluating expression with regard to variable, from begin to end by increment. Sets sequence graphing mode. † I/O B:Send( Send(variable) seq(expression,variable, begin,end[,increment]) y9
OPS 5:seq( †z Seq Seq Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 606 Function or Instruction/Arguments Sequential setDate(year,month,day) Result Sets mode to graph functions sequentially. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item †z Sequential Sets the date using a year, y N month, day format. The setDate( year must be 4 digits; month and day can be 1 or 2 digit. Sets the date format. 1 = M/D/Y 2 = D/M/Y 3 = Y/M/D setDtFmt(integer) yN
setDtFmt( setTime(hour,minute, second) Sets the time using an yN hour, minute, second setTime( format. The hour must be in 24 hour format, in which 13 = 1 p.m. Sets the time format. 12 = 12 hour format 24 = 24 hour format setTmFmt(integer) yN
setTmFmt( SetUpEditor Removes all list names … from the stat list editor, and EDIT then restores list names L1 5:SetUpEditor through L6 to columns 1 through 6. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 607 Function or Instruction/Arguments SetUpEditor listname1 [,listname2,..., listname20] Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Removes all list names … from the stat list editor, then EDIT sets it up to display one or 5:SetUpEditor more listnames in the specified order, starting with column 1. Draws lowerfunc and y< upperfunc in terms of X on DRAW the current graph and uses 7:Shade( pattern and patres to shade the area bounded by lowerfunc, upperfunc, Xleft, and Xright. Draws the density function
2 Shade(lowerfunc, upperfunc[,Xleft,Xright, pattern,patres]) Shadec2(lowerbound, upperbound,df) y= DRAW for the c distribution specified by degrees of 3:Shadec2( freedom df and shades the area between lowerbound and upperbound. Draws the density function y = for the Û distribution DRAW specified by numerator df 4:ShadeÜ( and denominator df and shades the area between lowerbound and upperbound. ShadeÜ(lowerbound, upperbound, numerator df, denominator df) Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 608 Function or Instruction/Arguments ShadeNorm(lowerbound, upperbound[,m,s]) Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Draws the normal density y= function specified by m and DRAW 1:ShadeNorm( s and shades the area between lowerbound and upperbound. Draws the density function y = for the Studentt DRAW distribution specified by 2:Shade_t( degrees of freedom df, and shades the area between lowerbound and upperbound. Sets mode to graph functions simultaneously. †z Simul Shade_t(lowerbound, upperbound,df) Simul sin(value) sinL1(value) Returns the sine of a real ˜ number, expression, or list. Returns the arcsine of a y? real number, expression, or list. Returns the hyperbolic sine y N of a real number, sinh( expression, or list. Returns the hyperbolic arcsine of a real number, expression, or list. sinh(value) sinhL1 (value) yN
sinhL1( Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 609 Function or Instruction/Arguments SinReg [iterations, Xlistname,Ylistname, period,regequ] Result Attempts iterations times to fit a sinusoidal regression model to Xlistname and Ylistname using a period guess, and stores the regression equation to regequ. Solves expression for variable, given an initial guess and lower and upper bounds within which the solution is sought. Sorts elements of listname in ascending order. Sorts elements of keylistname in ascending order, then sorts each dependlist as a dependent list. Sorts elements of listname in descending order. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item …
CALC C:SinReg solve(expression, variable,guess, {lower,upper}) † MATH 0:solve( SortA(listname) y9
OPS 1:SortA( SortA(keylistname, dependlist1[,dependlist2, ...,dependlist n]) y9
OPS 1:SortA( SortD(listname) y9
OPS 2:SortD( Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 610 Function or Instruction/Arguments Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item SortD(keylistname,dependl Sorts elements of ist1[,dependlist2, keylistname in descending ..., dependlist n]) order, then sorts each dependlist as a dependent list. startTmr y9
OPS 2:SortD( Starts the clock timer. Store y N or note the displayed value, startTmr and use it as the argument for checkTmr( ) to check the elapsed time. Returns the standard y9 deviation of the elements in MATH list with frequency freqlist. 7:stdDev( Ends program execution; returns to home screen. Stores value in variable. Stores current graph in database GDBn. Stores current picture in picture Picn. † CTL F:Stop stdDev(list[,freqlist]) Stop Store: value!variable StoreGDB n ¿ y<
STO 3:StoreGDB StorePic n y<
STO 1:StorePic yN String4Equ(string,Y= var) Converts string into an equation and stores it in Y= String4Equ( var. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 611 Function or Instruction/Arguments sub(string,begin,length) Result Returns a string that is a subset of another string, from begin to length. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item yN
sub( sum(list[,start,end]) Returns the sum of y9 elements of list from start to MATH end. 5:sum( Returns the tangent of a š real number, expression, or list. Returns the arctangent of a y A real number, expression, or list. Draws a line tangent to expression at X=value. Returns hyperbolic tangent of a real number, expression, or list. tan(value) tanL1(value) Tangent(expression, value) tanh(value) y<
DRAW 5:Tangent( yN
tanh( tanhL1(value) Returns the hyperbolic yN arctangent of a real tanhL1( number, expression, or list. Computes the Studentt y= distribution probability DISTR between lowerbound and 6:tcdf( upperbound for the specified degrees of freedom df. tcdf(lowerbound, upperbound,df) Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 612 Function or Instruction/Arguments Text(row,column,text1, text2,...,text n) Result Writes text on graph beginning at pixel (row,column), where 0 row 57 and 0 column 94. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item y<
DRAW 0:Text( Then See If:Then Time timeCnv(seconds) Sets sequence graphs to plot with respect to time. †y. Time Converts seconds to units y N of time that can be more timeCnv easily understood for evaluation. The list is in {days,hours,minutes,seconds} format. Computes a t confidence interval. Computes a t confidence interval. †… TESTS 8:TInterval †… TESTS 8:TInterval TInterval [listname, freqlist,confidence level] (Data list input) TInterval v,Sx,n [,confidence level] (Summary stats input) Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 613 Function or Instruction/Arguments tpdf(x,df) Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Computes the probability y= density function (pdf) for DISTR the Studentt distribution at 5:tpdf( a specified x value with specified degrees of freedom df. Displays the graph and enters TRACE mode. Performs a t test with frequency freqlist. alternative=L1 is <; alternative=0 is ƒ; alternative=1 is >. drawflag=1 draws results; drawflag=0 calculates results. Performs a t test with frequency freqlist. alternative=L1 is < ; alternative=0 is Äƒ; alternative=1 is >. drawflag=1 draws results; drawflag=0 calculates results. Trace TTest m0[,listname, freqlist,alternative, drawflag] (Data list input) r
†… TESTS 2:TTest TTest m0, v,Sx,n [,alternative,drawflag] (Summary stats input) †… TESTS 2:TTest tvm_FV[(Ú,æ,PV,PMT, P/Y,C/Y)] Computes the future value. Œ 1:Finance CALC 6:tvm_FV Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 614 Function or Instruction/Arguments tvm_æ[(Ú,PV,PMT,FV, P/Y,C/Y)] tvm_Ú[(æ,PV,PMT,FV, P/Y,C/Y)] tvm_Pmt[(Ú,æ,PV,FV, P/Y,C/Y)] tvm_PV[(Ú,æ,PMT,FV, P/Y,C/Y)] UnArchive Result Computes the annual interest rate. Computes the number of payment periods. Computes the amount of each payment. Computes the present value. Moves the specified variables from the user data archive memory to RAM. To archive variables, use Archive. Sets sequence graphs to plot u(n) on the xaxis and v(n) on the yaxis. Sets sequence graphs to plot u(n) on the xaxis and w(n) on the yaxis. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Œ 1:Finance
CALC 3:tvm_æ Œ 1:Finance
CALC 5:tvm_Ú Œ 1:Finance
CALC 2:tvm_Pmt Œ 1:Finance
CALC 4:tvm_PV yL
6:UnArchive uvAxes †y. uv †y. uw uwAxes Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 615 Function or Instruction/Arguments 1Var Stats [Xlistname, freqlist] Result Performs onevariable analysis on the data in Xlistname with frequency freqlist. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item …
CALC 1:1Var Stats 2Var Stats [Xlistname, Ylistname,freqlist] Performs twovariable … analysis on the data in CALC Xlistname and Ylistname with 2:2Var Stats frequency freqlist. Returns the variance of the y 9 elements in list with MATH frequency freqlist. 8:variance( Draws a vertical line at x. variance(list[,freqlist]) Vertical x y<
DRAW 4:Vertical vwAxes Sets sequence graphs to plot v(n) on the xaxis and w(n) on the yaxis. Sets sequence graphs to trace as webs. Executes commands while condition is true. †y. vw †y. Web † CTL 5:While Web :While condition :commands :End :command Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 616 Function or Instruction/Arguments valueA xor valueB Result Returns 1 if only valueA or valueB = 0. valueA and valueB can be real numbers, expressions, or lists. Displays a graph, lets you draw a box that defines a new viewing window, and updates the window. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item y:
LOGIC 3:xor ZBox †q ZOOM 1:ZBox ZDecimal Adjusts the viewing window † q so that @X=0.1 and ZOOM 4:ZDecimal @Y=0.1, and displays the graph screen with the origin centered on the screen. Redefines the viewing window using these dimensions: @X=1 Xscl=10 @Y=1 Yscl=10 Computes a z confidence interval. Computes a z confidence interval. †q ZOOM 8:ZInteger ZInteger ZInterval s[,listname, freqlist,confidence level] (Data list input) ZInterval s,v,n [,confidence level] (Summary stats input) †… TESTS 7:ZInterval †… TESTS 7:ZInterval Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 617 Function or Instruction/Arguments Zoom In Result Magnifies the part of the graph that surrounds the cursor location. Displays a greater portion of the graph, centered on the cursor location. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item †q ZOOM 2:Zoom In †q ZOOM 3:Zoom Out Zoom Out ZoomFit Recalculates Ymin and †q Ymax to include the ZOOM minimum and maximum Y 0:ZoomFit values, between Xmin and Xmax, of the selected functions and replots the functions. Graphs the selected functions in a userdefined viewing window. Redefines the viewing window so that all statistical data points are displayed. Immediately stores the current viewing window. †q MEMORY 3:ZoomRcl †q ZOOM 9:ZoomStat †q MEMORY 2:ZoomSto ZoomRcl ZoomStat ZoomSto Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 618 Function or Instruction/Arguments ZPrevious Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Replots the graph using the † q window variables of the MEMORY graph that was displayed 1:ZPrevious before you executed the last ZOOM instruction. Adjusts the X or Y window settings so that each pixel represents an equal width and height in the coordinate system, and updates the viewing window. Replots the functions immediately, updating the window variables to the default values. Performs a z test with frequency freqlist. alternative=L1 is <; alternative=0 is ƒ; alternative=1 is >. drawflag=1 draws results; drawflag=0 calculates results. †q ZOOM 5:ZSquare ZSquare ZStandard †q ZOOM 6:ZStandard †… TESTS 1:ZTest( ZTest(m0,s[,listname, freqlist,alternative, drawflag]) (Data list input) Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 619 Function or Instruction/Arguments ZTest(m0,s,v,n [,alternative,drawflag]) (Summary stats input) Result Performs a z test. alternative=L1 is <; alternative=0 is ƒ; alternative=1 is >. drawflag=1 draws results; drawflag=0 calculates results. Replots the functions immediately, updating the window variables to preset values for plotting trig functions. Returns factorial of value. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item †… TESTS 1:ZTest( ZTrig †q ZOOM 7:ZTrig Factorial: value! PRB 4:! Factorial: list! Returns factorial of list elements. PRB 4:! Degrees notation: value¡ Interprets value as degrees; y ; designates degrees in ANGLE DMS format. 1:¡ Interprets angle as radians. y ; ANGLE 3:r Radian: angler Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 620 Function or Instruction/Arguments Transpose: matrixT Result Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Returns a matrix in which y> each element (row, column) MATH is swapped with the 2:T corresponding element (column, row) of matrix. Returns xthroot of value. xthrootx‡value MATH 5:x‡ xthrootx‡list Returns xthroot of list elements. Returns list roots of value. MATH 5:x‡ listx‡value MATH 5:x‡ listAx‡listB Returns listA roots of listB. MATH 5:x‡ Cube: value3 Returns the cube of a real or complex number, expression, list, or square matrix. Returns the cube root of a real or complex number, expression, or list. MATH 3:3 Cube root: 3‡(value) MATH 4:3‡( Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 621 Function or Instruction/Arguments Equal: valueA=valueB Result Returns 1 if valueA = valueB. Returns 0 if valueA ƒ valueB. valueA and valueB can be real or complex numbers, expressions, lists, or matrices. Returns 1 if valueA ƒ valueB. Returns 0 if valueA = valueB. valueA and valueB can be real or complex numbers, expressions, lists, or matrices. Returns 1 if valueA < valueB. Returns 0 if valueA ‚ valueB. valueA and valueB can be real or complex numbers, expressions, or lists. Returns 1 if valueA > valueB. Returns 0 if valueA valueB. valueA and valueB can be real or complex numbers, expressions, or lists. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item y:
TEST 1:= Not equal: valueAƒvalueB y:
TEST 2:ƒ Less than: valueA<valueB y:
TEST 5:< Greater than: valueA>valueB y:
TEST 3:> Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 622 Function or Instruction/Arguments Less than or equal: valueAvalueB Result Returns 1 if valueA valueB. Returns 0 if valueA > valueB. valueA and valueB can be real or complex numbers, expressions, or lists. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item y:
TEST 6: Greater than or equal: valueA‚valueB Returns 1 if valueA ‚ y: valueB. Returns 0 if TEST valueA < valueB. valueA and 4:‚ valueB can be real or complex numbers, expressions, or lists. Returns 1 divided by a real — or complex number or expression. Returns 1 divided by list elements. Returns matrix inverted. Inverse: valueL1 Inverse: listL1 Inverse: matrixL1 Square: value2 — — Returns value multiplied by ¡ itself. value can be a real or complex number or expression. Returns list elements squared. Square: list2 Square: matrix2 ¡ Returns matrix multiplied by ¡ itself. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 623 Function or Instruction/Arguments Powers: value^power Result Returns value raised to power. value can be a real or complex number or expression. Returns list elements raised to power. Returns value raised to list elements. Returns matrix elements raised to power. Returns the negative of a real or complex number, expression, list, or matrix. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item › Powers: list^power Powers: value^list Powers: matrix^power Negation: Lvalue › › › Ì Power of ten: 10^(value) Returns 10 raised to the yG value power. value can be a real or complex number or expression. Returns a list of 10 raised to the list power. Returns square root of a real or complex number, expression, or list. Returns valueA times valueB. Power of ten: 10^(list) Square root: ‡(value) yG yC Multiplication: valueAävalueB ¯ Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 624 Function or Instruction/Arguments Multiplication: valueälist Multiplication: listävalue Multiplication: listAälistB Multiplication: valueämatrix Multiplication: matrixAämatrixB Division: valueAàvalueB Division: listàvalue Division: valueàlist Division: listAàlistB Addition: valueA+valueB Addition: list+value Result Returns value times each list element. Returns each list element times value. Returns listA elements times listB elements. Returns value times matrix elements. Returns matrixA times matrixB. Returns valueA divided by valueB. Returns list elements divided by value. Returns value divided by list elements. Returns listA elements divided by listB elements. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ Returns valueA plus valueB. Ã Returns list in which value is added to each list element. Ã Addition: listA+listB Returns listA elements plus Ã listB elements. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 625 Function or Instruction/Arguments Addition: matrixA+matrixB Concatenation: string1+string2 Subtraction: valueANvalueB Subtraction: valueNlist Subtraction: listNvalue Subtraction: listANlistB Subtraction: matrixANmatrixB Result Returns matrixA elements plus matrixB elements. Concatenates two or more strings. Subtracts valueB from valueA. Subtracts list elements from value. Subtracts value from list elements. Subtracts listB elements from listA elements. Key or Keys/Menu or Screen/Item Ã Ã ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ Subtracts matrixB elements ¹ from matrixA elements. Minutes Interprets minutes angle notation:degrees¡minutes's measurement as minutes. econds" Seconds notation: degrees¡minutes'seconds" Interprets seconds angle measurement as seconds. y;
ANGLE 2:' ƒ [ã] 626 Appendix B: Reference Information
Variables
User Variables The TI84 Plus uses the variables listed below in various ways. Some variables are restricted to specific data types. The variables A through Z and q are defined as real or complex numbers. You may store to them. The TI84 Plus can update X, Y, R, q, and T during graphing, so you may want to avoid using these variables to store nongraphing data. The variables (list names) L1 through L6 are restricted to lists; you cannot store another type of data to them. The variables (matrix names) [A] through [J] are restricted to matrices; you cannot store another type of data to them. The variables Pic1 through Pic9 and Pic0 are restricted to pictures; you cannot store another type of data to them. The variables GDB1 through GDB9 and GDB0 are restricted to graph databases; you cannot store another type of data to them. The variables Str1 through Str9 and Str0 are restricted to strings; you cannot store another type of data to them. Appendix B: Reference Information 627 Except for system variables, you can store any string of characters, functions, instructions, or variables to the functions Yn, (1 through 9, and 0), XnT/YnT (1 through 6), rn (1 through 6), u(n), v(n), and w(n) directly or through the Y= editor. The validity of the string is determined when the function is evaluated. Archive Variables You can store data, programs or any variable from RAM to user data archive memory where they cannot be edited or deleted inadvertantly. Archiving also allows you to free up RAM for variables that may require additional memory. The names of archived variables are preceded by an asterisk indicating they are in user data archive. “*” System Variables The variables below must be real numbers. You may store to them. Since the TI84 Plus can update some of them, as the result of a ZOOM, for example, you may want to avoid using these variables to store nongraphing data. • •
Xmin, Xmax, Xscl, @X, XFact, Tstep, PlotStart, nMin, and other window variables. ZXmin, ZXmax, ZXscl, ZTstep, ZPlotStart, Zu(nMin), and other ZOOM variables. The variables below are reserved for use by the TI84 Plus. You cannot store to them.
n, v, Sx, sx, minX, maxX, Gy, Gy2, Gxy, a, b, c, RegEQ, x1, x2, y1, z, t, F, c2, Ç, v1, Sx1, n1, lower, upper, r2, R2 and other statistical variables. Appendix B: Reference Information 628 Statistics Formulas
This section contains statistics formulas for the Logistic and SinReg regressions, ANOVA, 2SampÜTest, and 2SampTTest. Logistic The logistic regression algorithm applies nonlinear recursive leastsquares techniques to optimize the following cost function: ⎛ ⎞2 c ⎜  – y i⎟ ∑⎝ – bx i ⎠ i = 1 1 + ae
N J= which is the sum of the squares of the residual errors, where: x = the independent variable list y = the dependent variable list N = the dimension of the lists This technique attempts to estimate the constants a, b, and c recursively to make J as small as possible. Appendix B: Reference Information 629 SinReg The sine regression algorithm applies nonlinear recursive leastsquares techniques to optimize the following cost function: J= ∑ [a sin ( bxi + c ) + d – yi ]
i=1 N 2 which is the sum of the squares of the residual errors, where: x = the independent variable list y = the dependent variable list N = the dimension of the lists This technique attempts to recursively estimate the constants a, b, c, and d to make J as small as possible. ANOVA( The ANOVA Ü statistic is: FactorMS Ü = ErrorMS Appendix B: Reference Information 630 The mean squares (MS) that make up Ü are: FactorSS FactorMS = Factordf ErrorMS = ErrorSS Errordf The sum of squares (SS) that make up the mean squares are: FactorSS = ∑ ni ( xi –x )
i=1 I I 2 ErrorSS = ∑ ( ni –1 ) Sxi2
i=1 The degrees of freedom df that make up the mean squares are: Factordf = I – 1 = numerator df for Ü Errordf = ∑ ( ni – 1 )
i=1 I = denominator df for Ü where: I xi
Sxi ni x = = = = = number of populations the mean of each list the standard deviation of each list the length of each list the mean of all lists Appendix B: Reference Information 631 2SampFTest Below is the definition for the 2SampÜTest.
Sx1, Sx2 = Sample standard deviations having n – 1 1 and n 2 – 1 degrees of freedom df, respectively. ⎛ Sx 1⎞ = Ûstatistic = ⎝  ⎠ Sx 2
2 Ü
df(x, n 1 – 1 , n 2 – 1 ) = Ûpdf( ) with degrees of freedom df, n – 1 , 1 and n 2 – 1 = reported p value p 2SampÜTest for the alternative hypothesis σ 1 > σ 2 . p= ∫
F α f ( x ,n 1 – 1 ,n 2 – 1 ) dx 2SampÜTest for the alternative hypothesis σ 1 < σ 2 . p= ∫
0 F f ( x ,n 1 – 1 ,n 2 – 1 ) dx Appendix B: Reference Information 632 2SampÜTest for the alternative hypothesis s1 ƒ s2. Limits must satisfy the following:
L bnd ∞ p= 2 where: ∫
0 f ( x ,n 1 – 1 ,n 2 – 1 ) dx = ∫ f ( x ,n 1 – 1 ,n 2 – 1 ) dx U bnd [Lbnd,Ubnd] = lower and upper limits The Üstatistic is used as the bound producing the smallest integral. The remaining bound is selected to achieve the preceding integral’s equality relationship. 2SampTTest The following is the definition for the 2SampTTest. The twosample t statistic with degrees of freedom df is: x1 – x2 t = S Appendix B: Reference Information 633 where the computation of S and df are dependent on whether the variances are pooled. If the variances are not pooled: Sx 1 2 Sx 2 2  + n1 n2 S= ⎛ Sx 1 2 Sx 2 2⎞ 2 ⎜  +  ⎟ n2 ⎠ ⎝ n1 df = 22 22 1 ⎛ Sx 1 ⎞ 1 ⎛ Sx 2 ⎞  ⎜  ⎟ +  ⎜  ⎟ n1 – 1 ⎝ n1 ⎠ n2 – 1 ⎝ n2 ⎠ otherwise: ( n 1 – 1 ) Sx 1 2 + ( n 2 – 1 ) Sx 2 2 Sx p = df S= 1 1 +  Sx n1 n2 p df = n 1 + n 2 – 2 and Sxp is the pooled variance. Appendix B: Reference Information 634 Financial Formulas
This section contains financial formulas for computing time value of money, amortization, cash flow, interestrate conversions, and days between dates. Time Value of Money i = [e
( y × ln ( x + 1 ) ) –1 where PMT y :
x C/Y P/Y I% ƒ = = = = = C/Y ÷ P/Y (.01 × I%) ÷ C/Y 0 compounding periods per year payment periods per year interest rate per year (1 ÷ N) –1 i = ( – FV ÷ PV ) where: PMT = 0 Appendix B: Reference Information 635 The iteration used to compute i:
–N 1 – (1 + i) 0 = PV + PMT × G i  + FV × ( 1 + i ) i –N I % = 100 × C ⁄ Y × [ e where: x
y ( y × ln ( x + 1 ) ) – 1] =i = P/Y ÷ C/Y Gi = 1 + i × k where: k
k = 0 for endofperiod payments = 1 for beginningofperiod payments PMT × G i – FV × i ln ⎛ ⎞ ⎝ PMT × G i + PV × i⎠ N = ln ( 1 + i ) where:
iƒ0 N = – ( PV + FV ) ÷ PMT Appendix B: Reference Information 636 where: i=0 –i PV + FV PMT =  × PV + N Gi (1 + i) – 1 where:
iƒ0 PMT = – ( PV + FV ) ÷ N where:
i=0 PMT × G i 1  PMT × G i PV =  – FV ×  – N i i (1 + i) where:
iƒ0 PV = – ( FV + PMT × N ) where:
i=0 PMT × G i PMT × G i N FV =  – ( 1 + i ) × ⎛ PV + ⎞ ⎝ ⎠ i i where:
iƒ0 FV = – ( PV + PMT × N ) where:
i=0 637 Appendix B: Reference Information Amortization If computing bal(), pmt2 = npmt Let bal(0) = RND(PV) Iterate from m = 1 to pmt2 ⎧ I m = RND [ RND 12 ( – i × bal ( m – 1 ) ) ] ⎨ ⎩ bal ( m ) = bal ( m – 1 ) – I m + RND ( PMT ) then: bal ( ) = bal ( pmt 2 ) Σ Pr n ( ) = bal ( pmt 2 ) – bal ( pmt 1 ) Σ Int ( ) = ( pmt 2 – pmt 1 + 1 ) × RND ( PMT ) – Σ Pr n ( ) where: RND
RND12 = round the display to the number of decimal places selected = round to 12 decimal places Balance, principal, and interest are dependent on the values of PMT, PV, æ, and pmt1 and pmt2. Appendix B: Reference Information 638 Cash Flow npv ( ) = CF 0 + ∑ CFj ( 1 + i )
j=1 N S – 1(1 j – (1 + i) ) i  nj where: ⎧j ⎪ n ⎪ Sj = ⎨ ∑ i i=1 ⎪ ⎪0 ⎩ j≥1 j=0 Net present value is dependent on the values of the initial cash flow (CF0), subsequent cash flows (CFj), frequency of each cash flow (nj), and the specified interest rate (i).
irr() = 100 × i, where i satisfies npv() = 0 Internal rate of return is dependent on the values of the initial cash flow (CF0) and subsequent cash flows (CFj).
i = I% ÷ 100 Interest Rate Conversions 4Eff where: x = 100 × ( e
CP × ln ( x + 1 ) – 1) = .01 × Nom ÷ CP Appendix B: Reference Information 639 4Nom = 100 × CP × [ e 1 ÷ CP × ln ( x + 1 ) – 1] where: x
Eff CP Nom = .01 × Eff = effective rate = compounding periods = nominal rate Days between Dates With the dbd( function, you can enter or compute a date within the range Jan. 1, 1950, through Dec. 31, 2049. Actual/actual daycount method (assumes actual number of days per month and actual number of days per year):
dbd( (days between dates) = Number of Days II  Number of Days I Number of Days I = (Y1YB) × 365 + (number of days MB to M1) + DT1 + ( Y 1 – YB ) 4 Number of Days II = (Y2YB) × 365 Appendix B: Reference Information 640 + (number of days MB to M2) + DT2 + ( Y 2 – YB ) 4 where: M1 DT1 Y1 M2 DT2 Y2
MB DB YB = = = = = = = = = month of first date day of first date year of first date month of second date day of second date year of second date base month (January) base day (1) base year (first year after leap year) Appendix B: Reference Information 641 Important Things You Need to Know About Your TI84 Plus
TI84 Plus Results There may be a number of reasons that your TI84 Plus is not displaying the expected results; however, the most common solutions involve order of operations or mode settings. Your calculator uses an Equation Operating System (EOS) which evaluates the functions in an expression in the following order: 1. Functions that precede the argument, such as square root, sin(, or log( 2. Functions that are entered after the argument, such as exponents, factorial, r, ¡, and conversions 3. Powers and roots, such as 2^5, or 5*square root(32) 4. Permutations (nPr) and combinations (nCr) 5. Multiplication, implied multiplication, and division 6. Addition and subtraction 7. Relational functions, such as > or < 8. Logic operator and 9. Logic operators or and xor Remember that EOS evaluates from left to right and calculations within parentheses are evaluated first. You should use parentheses where the rules of algebra may not be clear. Appendix B: Reference Information 642 If you are using trigonometric functions or performing polar and rectangular conversions, the unexpected results may be caused by an angle mode setting. The Radian and Degree angle mode settings control how the TI84 Plus interprets angle values. To change the angle mode settings, follow these steps: 1. Press z to display the Mode settings. 2. Select Degree or Radian. 3. Press Í to save the angle mode setting. ERR:DIM ERR:DIM MISMATCH Error Your TI84 Plus displays the ERR:DIM MISMATCH error if you are trying to perform an operation that references one or more lists or matrices whose dimensions do not match. For example, multiplying L1*L2, where L1={1,2,3,4,5} and L2={1,2} produces an ERR:DIM MISMATCH error because the number of elements in L1 and L2 do not match. ERR:INVALID DIM Error The ERR:INVALID DIM error message may occur if you are trying to graph a function that does not involve the stat plot features. The error can be corrected by turning off the stat plots. To turn the stat plots off, press y , and then select 4:PlotsOff. Contrast Feature If the contrast setting is too dark (set to 9) or too dim (set to 0) the unit may appear as if it is malfunctioning or turned off. To adjust the contrast, press and release y, and then press and hold } or †. Appendix B: Reference Information 643 TI84 Plus Identification Code Your graphing calculator has a unique identification (ID) code that you should record and keep. You can use this 14 digit ID to register your calculator at education.ti.com or identify your calculator in the event that it is lost or stolen. A valid ID includes numbers 0 through 9 and the letters A through F. You can view the calculator’s Operating System, Product Number, ID, and Certificate Revision Number from the About screen. To display the About screen, press y L and then select 1:About. Your unique product ID code: _____________________________ Backups Your TI84 Plus is similar to a computer, in that it stores files and Apps that are important to you. It is always a good idea to back up your graphing calculator device files and Apps using the TI Connect™ software and a USB computer cable. You can find the specific procedures for backing up your calculator’s device files and Apps in the TI Connect™ Help file. Appendix B: Reference Information 644 Apps TI84 Plus Software Applications (Apps) is software that you can add to your calculator in the same way you would add software to your computer. Apps let you customize your calculator for peak performance in specific areas of study. You can find apps for the TI84 Plus at the TI Online Store at education.ti.com. TICares TICares KnowledgeBase The TICares KnowledgeBase provides 24hour access through the Web to find answers to frequently asked questions. The TICares KnowledgeBase searches its repository of known solutions and presents you with the solutions that are most likely to solve your problem. You can search the TICares KnowledgeBase at education.ti.com/support. Appendix B: Reference Information 645 Error Conditions
When the TI84 Plus detects an error, it returns an error message as a menu title, such as ERR:SYNTAX or ERR:DOMAIN. This table contains each error type, possible causes, and suggestions for correction. The error types listed in this table are each preceded by ERR: on your graphing calculator display. For example, you will see ERR:ARCHIVED as a menu title when your graphing calculator detects an ARCHIVED error type.
Error Type ARCHIVED Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies You have attempted to use, edit, or delete an archived variable. For example, the expression dim(L1) produces an error if L1 is archived. You have attempted to archive a variable and there is not enough space in archive to receive it. A function or instruction does not have the correct number of arguments. See Appendix A for function and instruction syntax. Appendix A displays the arguments and punctuation needed to execute the function or instruction. For example, stdDev(list[,freqlist]) is a function of the TI84 Plus. The arguments are shown in italics. The arguments in brackets are optional and you need not type them. You must also be sure to separate multiple arguments with a comma (,). For example, stdDev(list[,freqlist]) might be entered as stdDev(L1) or stdDev(L1,L2) since the frequency list or freqlist is optional. You have attempted to send or receive an application and an error (e.g. electrical interference) has occurred in the transmission. ARCHIVE FULL ARGUMENT BAD ADDRESS Appendix B: Reference Information 646 Error Type BAD GUESS Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
• • • In a CALC operation, you specified a Guess that is not between Left Bound and Right Bound. For the solve( function or the equation solver, you specified a guess that is not between lower and upper. Your guess and several points around it are undefined. Examine a graph of the function. If the equation has a solution, change the bounds and/or the initial guess. BOUND
• In a CALC operation or with Select(, you defined Left Bound > Right Bound. In fMin(, fMax(, solve(, or the equation solver, you entered lower ‚ upper. BREAK You pressed the É key to break execution of a program, to halt a DRAW instruction, or to stop evaluation of an expression. DATA TYPE You entered a value or variable that is the wrong data type.
• For a function (including implied multiplication) or an instruction, you entered an argument that is an invalid data type, such as a complex number where a real number is required. See Appendix A and the appropriate chapter. In an editor, you entered a type that is not allowed, such as a matrix entered as an element in the stat list editor. See the appropriate chapter. You attempted to store an incorrect data type, such as a matrix, to a list. • • Appendix B: Reference Information 647 Error Type DIM MISMATCH Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies Your calculator displays the ERR:DIM MISMATCH error if you are trying to perform an operation that references one or more lists or matrices whose dimensions do not match. For example, multiplying L1*L2, where L1={1,2,3,4,5} and L2={1,2} produces an ERR:DIM MISMATCH error because the number of elements in L1 and L2 do not match.
• You attempted to divide by zero. This error is not returned during graphing. The TI84 Plus allows for undefined values on a graph. You attempted a linear regression with a vertical line. You specified an argument to a function or instruction outside the valid range. This error is not returned during graphing. The TI84 Plus allows for undefined values on a graph. See Appendix A. You attempted a logarithmic or power regression with a LX or an exponential or power regression with a LY. You attempted to compute GPrn( or GInt( with pmt2 < pmt1. DIVIDE BY 0 • DOMAIN • • • DUPLICATE Duplicate Name You attempted to create a duplicate group name. A variable you attempted to transmit cannot be transmitted because a variable with that name already exists in the receiving unit. You have attempted to run an application with a limited trial period which has expired. EXPIRED Appendix B: Reference Information 648 Error Type Error in Xmit Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
• The TI84 Plus was unable to transmit an item. Check to see that the cable is firmly connected to both units and that the receiving unit is in receive mode. You pressed É to break during transmission. You attempted to perform a backup from a TI.82 to a TI84 Plus. You attempted to transfer data (other than L1 through L6) from a TI84 Plus to a TI.82. You attempted to transfer L1 through L6 from a TI84 Plus to a TI.82 without using 5:Lists to TI82 on the LINK SEND menu. • • • • ID NOT FOUND This error occurs when the SendID command is executed but the proper graphing calculator ID cannot be found.
• You attempted to use an invalid function in an argument to a function, such as seq( within expression for seq(. The increment in seq( is 0 or has the wrong sign. This error is not returned during graphing. The TI84 Plus allows for undefined values on a graph. The increment in a For( loop is 0. ILLEGAL NEST INCREMENT • • Appendix B: Reference Information 649 Error Type INVALID Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
• You attempted to reference a variable or use a function where it is not valid. For example, Yn cannot reference Y, Xmin, @X, or TblStart. You attempted to reference a variable or function that was transferred from the TI.82 and is not valid for the TI84 Plus For example, you may have transferred UnN1 to the TI84 Plus from the TI.82 and then tried to reference it. In Seq mode, you attempted to graph a phase plot without defining both equations of the phase plot. In Seq mode, you attempted to graph a recursive sequence without having input the correct number of initial conditions. In Seq mode, you attempted to reference terms other than (nN1) or (nN2). You attempted to designate a graph style that is invalid within the current graph mode. You attempted to use Select( without having selected (turned on) at least one xyLine or scatter plot. The ERR:INVALID DIM error message may occur if you are trying to graph a function that does not involve the stat plot features. The error can be corrected by turning off the stat plots. To turn the stat plots off, press y , and then select 4:PlotsOff. You specified a list dimension as something other than an integer between 1 and 999. You specified a matrix dimension as something other than an integer between 1 and 99. You attempted to invert a matrix that is not square. • • • • • • INVALID DIM • • • • Appendix B: Reference Information 650 Error Type ITERATIONS Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
• The solve( function or the equation solver has exceeded the maximum number of permitted iterations. Examine a graph of the function. If the equation has a solution, change the bounds, or the initial guess, or both. • • irr( has exceeded the maximum number of permitted iterations.
When computing æ, the maximum number of iterations was exceeded. LABEL MEMORY The label in the Goto instruction is not defined with a Lbl instruction in the program. Memory is insufficient to perform the instruction or function. You must delete items from memory before executing the instruction or function. Recursive problems return this error; for example, graphing the equation Y1=Y1. Branching out of an If/Then, For(, While, or Repeat loop with a Goto also can return this error because the End statement that terminates the loop is never reached.
• You are unable to transmit an item because the receiving unit’s available memory is insufficient. You may skip the item or exit receive mode. During a memory backup, the receiving unit’s available memory is insufficient to receive all items in the sending unit’s memory. A message indicates the number of bytes the sending unit must delete to do the memory backup. Delete items and try again. MemoryFull • Appendix B: Reference Information 651 Error Type MODE Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies You attempted to store to a window variable in another graphing mode or to perform an instruction while in the wrong mode; for example, DrawInv in a graphing mode other than Func.
• • The solve( function or the equation solver did not detect a sign change. You attempted to compute æ when FV, (Ú…PMT), and PV are all ‚ 0, or when FV, (Ú…PMT), and PV are all _ 0. You attempted to compute irr( when neither CFList nor CFO is > 0, or when neither CFList nor CFO is < 0. NO SIGN CHNG • NONREAL ANS In Real mode, the result of a calculation yielded a complex result. This error is not returned during graphing. The TI84 Plus allows for undefined values on a graph. You attempted to enter, or you have calculated, a number that is beyond the range of the graphing calculator. This error is not returned during graphing. The TI84 Plus allows for undefined values on a graph. You attempted to use a system variable inappropriately. See Appendix A. OVERFLOW RESERVED Appendix B: Reference Information 652 Error Type SINGULAR MAT Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
• • A singular matrix (determinant = 0) is not valid as the argument for L1. The SinReg instruction or a polynomial regression generated a singular matrix (determinant = 0) because it could not find a solution, or a solution does not exist. This error is not returned during graphing. The TI84 Plus allows for undefined values on a graph. SINGULARITY expression in the solve( function or the equation solver contains a singularity (a point at which the function is not defined). Examine a graph of the function. If the equation has a solution, change the bounds or the initial guess or both. You attempted a stat calculation with lists that are not appropriate.
• • • • Statistical analyses must have at least two data points. STAT MedMed must have at least three points in each
partition. When you use a frequency list, its elements must be ‚ 0. (Xmax N Xmin) à Xscl must be‚ 47 for a histogram. STAT PLOT You attempted to display a graph when a stat plot that uses an undefined list is turned on. Appendix B: Reference Information 653 Error Type SYNTAX Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies The command contains a syntax error. Look for misplaced functions, arguments, parentheses, or commas. Appendix A displays the arguments and punctuation needed to execute the function or instruction. For example, stdDev(list[,freqlist]) is a function of the TI84 Plus. The arguments are shown in italics. The arguments in brackets are optional and you need not type them. You must also be sure to separate multiple arguments with a comma (,). For example stdDev(list[,freqlist]) might be entered as stdDev(L1) or stdDev(L1,L2) since the frequency list or freqlist is optional. You requested a tolerance to which the algorithm cannot return an accurate result. You referenced a variable that is not currently defined. For example, you referenced a stat variable when there is no current calculation because a list has been edited, or you referenced a variable when the variable is not valid for the current calculation, such as a after MedMed. Electrical interference caused a link to fail or this graphing calculator is not authorized to run the application. TOL NOT MET UNDEFINED VALIDATION Appendix B: Reference Information 654 Error Type VARIABLE Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies You have tried to archive a variable that cannot be archived or you have tried to unarchive an application or group. Examples of variables that cannot be archived include:
• Real numbers LRESID, R, T, X, Y, Theta, Statistic variables under Vars, STATISTICS menu, Yvars, and the AppIdList. VERSION WINDOW RANGE You have attempted to receive an incompatible variable version from another graphing calculator. A problem exists with the window variables.
• • • • • You defined Xmax Xmin or Ymax Ymin. You defined qmax qmin and qstep > 0 (or vice versa). You attempted to define Tstep=0. You defined Tmax Tmin and Tstep > 0 (or vice versa). Window variables are too small or too large to graph correctly. You may have attempted to zoom in or zoom out to a point that exceeds the TI84 Plus’s numerical range. A point or a line, instead of a box, is defined in ZBox. A ZOOM operation returned a math error. ZOOM • • Appendix B: Reference Information 655 Accuracy Information
Computational Accuracy To maximize accuracy, the TI84 Plus carries more digits internally than it displays. Values are stored in memory using up to 14 digits with a twodigit exponent. • • • You can store a value in the window variables using up to 10 digits (12 for Xscl, Yscl, Tstep, and qstep). Displayed values are rounded as specified by the mode setting with a maximum of 10 digits and a twodigit exponent.
RegEQ displays up to 14 digits in Float mode. Using a fixeddecimal setting other than Float causes RegEQ results to be rounded and stored with the specified number of decimal places. Xmin is the center of the leftmost pixel, Xmax is the center of the nexttotherightmost pixel. (The rightmost pixel is reserved for the busy indicator.) @X is the distance between the centers of two adjacent pixels. • • In Full screen mode, @X is calculated as (Xmax N Xmin) à 94. In GT splitscreen mode, @X is calculated as (Xmax N Xmin) à 46. If you enter a value for @X from the home screen or a program in Full screen mode, Xmax is calculated as Xmin + @X É… 94. In GT splitscreen mode, Xmax is calculated as Xmin + @X É… 46. Ymin is the center of the nexttothebottom pixel; Ymax is the center of the top pixel. @Y is the distance between the centers of two adjacent pixels. Appendix B: Reference Information 656 • In Full screen mode, @Y is calculated as (Ymax N Ymin) à 62. In Horiz splitscreen mode, @Y is calculated as (Ymax N Ymin) à 30. In GT splitscreen mode, @Y is calculated as (Ymax N Ymin) à 50. If you enter a value for @Y from the home screen or a program in Full screen mode, Ymax is calculated as Ymin + @Y É… 62. In Horiz splitscreen mode, Ymax is calculated as Ymin + @Y … 30. In GT splitscreen mode, Ymax is calculated as Ymin + @Y É … 50. • Cursor coordinates are displayed as eightcharacter numbers (which may include a negative sign, decimal point, and exponent) when Float mode is selected. X and Y are updated with a maximum accuracy of eight digits.
minimum and maximum on the CALCULATE menu are calculated with a tolerance of 1âL5; ‰f(x)dx is calculated at 1âL3. Therefore, the result displayed may not be accurate to all eight displayed digits. For most functions, at least five accurate digits exist. For fMin(, fMax(, and fnInt( on the MATH menu and solve( in the CATALOG, the tolerance can be specified. Function Limits
Function sin x, cos x, tan x sinL1 x, cosL1 x ln x, log x ex 10x Range of Input Values 0 x < 10 12 (radian or degree) L1 x 1
10 L100 < x < 10 100 L10 100 < x 230.25850929940 L10 100 < x< 100 Appendix B: Reference Information 657 Function sinh x, cosh x tanh x sinhL1 x coshL1 x tanhL1 x Range of Input Values x 230.25850929940 x < 10 100 x < 5 × 10 99 1 x < 5 × 10 99 L1 < x < 1
0 x < 10 100 x < 10 100 ‡x (real mode) ‡x (complex mode)
x! L.5 _x 69, where x is a multiple of .5 Function Results
Function sinL1 x, tanL1 x cosL1 x Range of Result L90¡ to 90¡
0¡ to 180¡ or Lp à 2 to p à 2 (radians) or 0 to p (radians) Appendix B: Reference Information 658 Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information
Texas Instruments Support and Service
For general information
Home Page: KnowledgeBase and email inquiries: Phone: education.ti.com education.ti.com/support (800) TICARES / (800) 8422737 For U.S., Canada, Mexico, Puerto Rico, and Virgin Islands only education.ti.com/international International information: For technical support
KnowledgeBase and support by email: Phone (not tollfree): education.ti.com/support (972) 9178324 For product (hardware) service Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 659 Customers in the U.S., Canada, Mexico, Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands: Always contact Texas Instruments Customer Support before returning a product for service. All other customers: Refer to the leaflet enclosed with this product (hardware) or contact your local Texas Instruments retailer/distributor. Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 660 Texas Instruments (TI) Warranty Information
Customers in the U.S. and Canada Only
OneYear Limited Warranty for Commercial Electronic Product
This Texas Instruments ("TI") electronic product warranty extends only to the original purchaser and user of the product.
Warranty Duration. This TI electronic product is warranted to the original purchaser for a period of one (1) year from the original purchase date.
Warranty Coverage. This TI electronic product is warranted against defective materials and construction. THIS WARRANTY IS VOID IF THE PRODUCT HAS BEEN DAMAGED BY ACCIDENT OR UNREASONABLE USE, NEGLECT, IMPROPER SERVICE, OR OTHER CAUSES NOT ARISING OUT OF DEFECTS IN MATERIALS OR CONSTRUCTION. Warranty Disclaimers. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARISING OUT OF THIS SALE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE ABOVE ONEYEAR PERIOD. TEXAS INSTRUMENTS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL COSTS, EXPENSES, OR DAMAGES INCURRED BY THE CONSUMER OR ANY OTHER USER. Some states/provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
Legal Remedies. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province.
Warranty Performance. During the above one (1) year warranty period, your defective product will be either repaired or replaced with a reconditioned model of an equivalent quality (at TI's option) when the product is returned, postage prepaid, to Texas Instruments Service Facility. The warranty of the repaired or replacement unit will continue for the warranty of the original unit or six (6) months, whichever is longer. Other than the postage requirement, no charge will be made for such repair and/or replacement. TI strongly recommends that you insure the product for value prior to mailing.
Software. Software is licensed, not sold. TI and its licensors do not warrant that the software will be free from errors or meet your specific requirements. All software is provided "AS IS." Copyright. The software and any documentation supplied with this product are protected by copy right. Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 661 Australia & New Zealand Customers only
OneYear Limited Warranty for Commercial Electronic Product This Texas Instruments electronic product warranty extends only to the original purchaser and user of the product. Warranty Duration. This Texas Instruments electronic product is warranted to the original purchaser for a period of one (1) year from the original purchase date. Warranty Coverage. This Texas Instruments electronic product is warranted against defective materials and construction. This warranty is void if the product has been damaged by accident or unreasonable use, neglect, improper service, or other causes not arising out of defects in materials or construction. Warranty Disclaimers. Any implied warranties arising out of this sale, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the above oneyear period. Texas Instruments shall not be liable for loss of use of the product or other incidental or consequential costs, expenses, or damages incurred by the consumer or any other user. Except as expressly provided in the OneYear Limited Warranty for this product, Texas Instruments does not promise that facilities for the repair of this product or parts for the repair of this product will be available. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. Legal Remedies. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. Warranty Performance. During the above one (1) year warranty period, your defective product will be either repaired or replaced with a new or reconditioned model of an equivalent quality (at TI's option) when the product is returned to the original point of purchase. The repaired or replacement unit will continue for the warranty of the original unit or six (6) months, whichever is longer. Other than your cost to return the product, no charge will be made for such repair and/or replacement. TI strongly recommends that you insure the product for value if you mail it. Software. Software is licensed, not sold. TI and its licensors do not warrant that the software will be free from errors or meet your specific requirements. All software is provided "AS IS." Copyright. The software and any documentation supplied with this product are protected by copyright. Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 662 All Other Customers
For information about the length and terms of the warranty, refer to your package and/or to the warranty statement enclosed with this product, or contact your local Texas Instruments retailer/distributor. Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 663 Battery Information
When to Replace the Batteries The TI84 Plus uses five batteries: four AAA alkaline batteries and one SR44SW or 303 silver oxide backup battery. The silver oxide battery provides auxiliary power to retain memory while you replace the AAA batteries. When the battery voltage level drops below a usable level, the TI84 Plus:
Displays this message when you turn on the unit. Displays this message when you attempt to download an application. Message A Message B After Message A is first displayed, you can expect the batteries to function for about one or two weeks, depending on usage. (This oneweek to twoweek period is based on tests with alkaline batteries; the performance of other types of batteries may vary.) If Message B is displayed, you must replace the batteries immediately to successfully download an application. Replace the silver oxide battery every three or four years. Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 664 Effects of Replacing the Batteries
Do not remove both types of batteries (AAA and silver oxide) at the same time. Do not allow the batteries to lose power completely. If you follow these guidelines and the steps for replacing batteries, you can replace either type of battery without losing any information in memory. Battery Precautions Take these precautions when replacing batteries. • • • • • • • Do not leave batteries within reach of children Do not mix new and used batteries. Do not mix brands (or types within brands) of batteries. Do not mix rechargeable and nonrechargeable batteries. Install batteries according to polarity (+ and N) diagrams. Do not place nonrechargeable batteries in a battery recharger. Properly dispose of used batteries immediately. Do not leave them within the reach of children. Do not incinerate or dismantle batteries. Replacing the Batteries To replace the batteries, follow these steps. Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 665 1. Turn off the graphing calculator. Replace the slide cover over the keyboard to avoid inadvertently turning on the graphing calculator. Turn the back of the unit toward you. 2. Hold the graphing calculator upright, push downward on the latch on the top of the battery cover, and then pull the cover toward you.
Note: To avoid loss of information stored in memory, you must turn off the graphing calculator. Do not remove the AAA batteries and the silver oxide battery simultaneously. 3. Replace all four AAA alkaline batteries simultaneously. Or, replace the silver oxide battery. • To replace the AAA alkaline batteries, remove all four discharged AAA batteries and install new ones according to the polarity (+ and N) diagram in the battery compartment. • To replace the silver oxide battery, remove the screw from the silver oxide battery cover, and then remove the cover. Install the new battery, + side up. Replace the cover and secure it with the screw. Use a SR44SW or 303 (or equivalent) silver oxide battery. 4. Replace the battery compartment cover. Turn the graphing calculator on and adjust the display contrast, if necessary, by pressing y } or †. Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 666 In Case of Difficulty
Handling a Difficulty To handle a difficulty, follow these steps. 1. If you cannot see anything on the screen, you may need to adjust the graphing calculator contrast. To darken the screen, press and release y, and then press and hold } until the display is sufficiently dark. To lighten the screen, press and release y, and then press and hold † until the display is sufficiently light. 2. If an error menu is displayed, follow these steps: • • • • Note the error type (ERR:error type). Select 2:GOTO, if it is available. The previous screen is displayed with the cursor at or near the error location. Deteremine the error. Correct the expression. Refer to the Error Conditions table for details about specific errors, if necessary. 3. If the busy indicator (dotted line) is displayed, a graph or program has been paused; the TI84 Plus is waiting for input. Press Í to continue or press É to break. 4. If a checkerboard cursor ( # ) is displayed, then either you have entered the maximum number of characters in a prompt, or memory is full. If memory is full: • Press y L 2 to display the MEMORY MANAGEMENT / DELETE menu. Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 667 • Select the type of data you want to delete, or select 1:All for a list of all variables of all types. A screen is displayed listing each variable of the type you selected and the number of bytes each variable is using. Press } and † to move the selection cursor (4) next to the item you want to delete, and then press {. • 5. If the graphing calculator does not seem to work at all, be sure the alkaline batteries are fresh and that they are installed properly. 6. If the TI84 Plus does not function even though you are sure that the batteries are fresh, you can try manually resetting it. • • • • Remove all of the AAA batteries from the graphing calculator. Press and hold the É key for ten seconds. Replace the batteries. Turn on the unit. When you reset your graphing calculator, the contrast sometimes changes. If the screen is faded or blank, adjust the contrast by pressing y and releasing } or †. 7. If the above solutions do not work you can reset all of the memory. The RAM, user data archive memory, and system variables are restored to factory settings when you reset all memory. All nonsystem variables, applications (Apps), and programs are deleted. • • • • • Press y L to display the MEMORY menu. Select 7:Reset to display the RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu. Press ~ ~ to display the ALL menu. Select 1:All Memory to display the RESET MEMORY menu. To continue with the reset, select 2:Reset. The message Mem cleared is displayed on the home screen. Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 668 Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 669 Index
!dim( (assign dimension) . . . . . . . . . 261 ( (degrees notation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 ( (negation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 55, 624 (– (subtraction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 626 (! (factorial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 (! Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 611 (!dim( (assign dimension) . . . . . 238, 574 (# (not equal to) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 ($( (square root) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 624 (%, (, + (pixel mark) . . . . . . . . . . 203, 322 (& (plot type, histogram) . . . . . . . . . 320 (' (minutes notation) . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 626 (( ) (parentheses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 () (plot type, normal probability) . . . 322 ()Int( (sum of interest) . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 ()Prn( (sum of principal) . . . . . . . . . . 597 (* (multiplication) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 624 (* (plot type, modified box) . . . . . . . 320 (*f(x)dx operation on a graph . . . . . . . 131 (*row( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 602 (*row+( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 (+ (addition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 625 (+ (concatenation) . . . . . . . . . . . 417, 626 (+ (pixel mark) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 322 (+ (plot type, box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 (/ (division) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 625 (/ (inverse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 623 Symbols (: (colon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 (< (less than) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 622 (= (equalto relational test) . . . . . . 88, 622 (> (greater than) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 622 ([ ] (matrix indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 (^ (power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 624 ({ (less than or equal to) . . . . . . . . . . . 623 ( (greater than or equal to) . . . . . 88, 623 (² (square) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 623 (³ (cube) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 621 (³$( (cube root) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 621 (“ ” (string indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 (4Dec (to decimal conversion) . . . . 57, 573 (4DMS (to degrees/minutes/seconds) . 86, 575 (4Eff( (to effective interest rate) . . 402, 403 (4Frac (to fraction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 579 (4Nom( (to nominal interest rate) 402, 592 (4Polar (to polar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 596 (4Rect (to rectangular) . . . . . . . . . 78, 601 (χ²pdf( (chisquare pdf) . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 (χ²Test (chisquare test) . . 358, 360, 378 (∆Tbl (table step variable) . . . . . . . . . . 177 (∆X window variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 (∆Y window variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 (Fcdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 (Fpdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 / (inverse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Index 670 { } (list indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Numerics
10^( (power of ten) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 1PropZInt (oneproportion z confidence interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 597 1PropZTest (oneproportion z test) . 349, 597 1Var Stats (onevariable statistics) . 307, 616 2PropZInt (twoproportion z confidence interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 597 2PropZTest (twoproportion z test) . 350, 598 2SampFTest (twosample FTest) . . 361, 603 2SampTInt (twosample t confidence interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355, 604 2SampTTest (twosample t test) . . . 347, 605 2SampZInt (twosample z confidence interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354, 605 2SampZTest (twosample z test) . . . 345, 604, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 2Var Stats (twovariable statistics) . 308, 616 A
a+bi (rectangular complex mode) . 24, 72, 568 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Index above graph style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 abs( (absolute value) . . . 68, 78, 233, 566 accuracy information computational and graphing . . . . 656 function limits and results . . . . . . 657 graphing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 addition (+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 625 alpha cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 alphalock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 alternative hypothesis . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 amortization )Int( (sum of interest) . . . . . . . . . 585 )Prn( (sum of principal) . . . . . . . 597 bal( (amortization balance) . 399, 568 calculating schedules . . . . . . . . . 399 formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 and (Boolean operator) . . . . . . . . 90, 567 ANGLE menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 angle modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 angle( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 567 animate graph style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 ANOVA( (oneway variance analysis) . . . 366, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567, 630 Ans (last answer) . . . . . . . . . 32, 519, 567 APD (Automatic Power Down) . . . . . . . 4 applications See examples, applications . 52 Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 517 AppVars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 517 arccosine (cos/( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 523, 567 671 archive full error . . . . . . . . . 546, 646 garbage collection . . . . . . . . . . . 542 memory error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 archived variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 arcsine (sin/( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 arctangent (tan/( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Asm( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458, 567 AsmComp( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458, 567 AsmPrgm( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458, 567 assembly language programs . . . . . 458 augment( . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 267, 568 Automatic Power Down (APD) . . . . . . . 4 automatic regression equation . . . . . 303 automatic residual list (RESID) . . . . . 302 axes format, sequence graphing . . . 161 axes, displaying (AxesOn, AxesOff) . 110, 568 AxesOff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 568 AxesOn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 568 busy indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 C
C/Y (compoundingperiodsperyear variable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391, 406 χ²cdf( (chisquare cdf) . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 χ²pdf( (chisquare pdf) . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 χ²Test (chisquare test) . . . . . . . . . . 569 CALCULATE menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Calculate output option . . . . . . . 336, 339 cash flow calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 irr( (internal rate of return) . . 398, 586 npv( (net present value) . . . 398, 593 CATALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 CBL 2™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455, 551, 580 CBR™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455, 551, 580 check memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 checkTmr( (check timer) . . . . . . . . . . 570 Chi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 chisquare cdf (c²cdf( ) . . . . . . . 378, 569 chisquare goodness of fit test . . . . . 360 chisquare pdf (c²pdf( ) . . . . . . . 377, 569 chisquare test (c²Test) . . 358, 360, 569 Circle( (draw circle) . . . . . . . . . . 197, 570 Clear Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514, 570 clearing all lists (ClrAllLists) . . . . . . . 514, 570 drawing (ClrDraw) . . . . . . . . 188, 570 entries (Clear Entries) . . . . . 514, 570 B
backing up calculator memory . 556, 562 bal( (amortization balance) . . . . 399, 568 batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 664 below graph style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 binomcdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380, 568 binompdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379, 569 block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Boolean logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 box pixel mark (%) . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 322 Boxplot plot type (+) . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Index 672 home screen (ClrHome) . . . 454, 570 list (ClrList) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 571 table (ClrTable) . . . . . . . . . 454, 571 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Clock Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Clock On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ClockOff, turn clock off . . . . . . . . . . . 570 ClockOn, turn clock on . . . . . . . . . . . 570 ClrAllLists (clear all lists) . . . . . . 514, 570 ClrDraw (clear drawing) . . . . . . 188, 570 ClrHome (clear home screen) . 454, 570 ClrList (clear list) . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 571 ClrTable (clear table) . . . . . . . . 454, 571 coefficients of determination (r2, R2) 304 colon separator (:) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 combinations (nCr) . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 591 compiling an assembly program 458, 567 complex modes (a+bi, re^qi) . 24, 72, 568, 601 numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 72, 601 compoundingperiodsperyear variable (C/Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391, 406 concatenation (+) . . . . . . . . . . . 417, 626 confidence intervals . . . . . . . . . . 52, 339 conj( (conjugate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 571 Connected (plotting mode) . . . . . 23, 571 connecting two calculators 550, 551, 558 contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 contrast (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 convergence, sequence graphing . . 167 conversions 4Dec (to decimal) . . . . . . . . . 57, 573 4DMS (to degrees/minutes/ seconds) 86, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 4Eff (to effective interest rate) . . . 402 4Frac (to fraction conversion) 57, 579 4Nom (to nominal interest rate conversion) . . . . . . . . . . 402, 592 4Polar (to polar conversion) . 79, 596 4Rect (to rectangular conversion) 78, 601 Equ4String( (equationtostring conversion) . . . . . . . . . . 418, 576 List4matr( (listtomatrix conversion) . 241, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 588 Matr4list( (matrixtolist conversion) . 240, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 589 P4Rx(, P4Ry( (polartorectangular conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 599 R4Pr(, R4Pq( (rectangulartopolar conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 R4Pr(, R4Pθ( (rectangulartopolar conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 String4Equ( (stringtoequation conversion) . . . . . . . . . . 420, 611 convert time, timeCnv( ) . . . . . . . . . . 613 CoordOff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 571 CoordOn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 571 correlation coefficient (r) . . . . . . . . . . 304 cos( (cosine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 571 cos/( (arccosine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 571 cosh( (hyperbolic cosine) . . . . . 423, 571 Index 673 cosh/( (hyperbolic arccosine) . . 423, 572 cosine (cos( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 cosine (cos( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 cross pixel mark (+) . . . . . . . . . 203, 322 cube (³) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 621 cube root (³$( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 cube root (³$( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 cubic regression (CubicReg) . . 309, 572 CubicReg (cubic regression) . . 309, 572 cumSum( (cumulative sum) 242, 263, 572 cumulative sum (cumSum( ) . . . 242, 263 cumulative sum (cumSum( ) . . . . . . . 572 cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 19 customer support and service . . . . . 659 D
Data input option . . . . . . . . . . . 336, 337 dayOfWk( (day of week) . . . . . . . . . . 572 days between dates (dbd( ) . . . . . . . 403 days between dates (dbd( ) . . . 573, 640 dbd( (days between dates) 403, 573, 640 decimal mode (float or fixed) . . . . . . . 22 decrement and skip (DS<( ) . . . . . . . 444 decrement and skip (DS<( ) . . . . . . . 575 definite integral . . . . . . . . . . 60, 130, 143 defragmenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 Degree angle mode . . . . . . . 22, 84, 573 degrees notation () . . . . . . . . . . 85, 620 delete variable contents (DelVar) . . . 446, 573 deleting items from memory . . . . . . . 519 DependAsk . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 180, 573 DependAuto . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 180, 573 derivative See numerical derivative . . . 52 det( (determinant) . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 573 determinant (det( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 determinant (det( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 DiagnosticOff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 573 DiagnosticOn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 574 diagnostics display mode(r, r2, R2) . . 304 differentiation . . . . . . . . 61, 130, 143, 151 dim( (dimension) . . . . . . . . 238, 260, 574 dimensioning a list or matrix . . 238, 260, 574 Disp (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450, 574 DispGraph (display graph) . . . . 451, 574 display contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 display cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Displaying the Clock Settings . . . . . . . 12 DispTable (display table) . . . . . . 451, 575 DISTR (distributions menu) . . . . . . . . 372 DISTR DRAW (distributions drawing menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 distribution functions binomcdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380, 568 binompdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379, 569 χ²cdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 χ²pdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 Fcdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376, 612 Fpdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376, 614 geometcdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382, 580 geometpdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 580 Index 674 invNorm( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375, 585 normalcdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374, 592 normalpdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373, 593 poissoncdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 596 poissonpdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 596 distribution shading instructions Shade_t( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384, 609 Shadeχ²( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385, 608 ShadeF( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385, 608 ShadeNorm( . . . . . . . . . . . . 383, 609 division (/) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 625 ∆List( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 588 DMS (degrees/minutes/seconds entry notation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 626 Dot (plotting mode) . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 575 dot graph style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 dot pixel mark (() . . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 322 dr/dq operation on a graph . . . . . . . . 151 DRAW menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Draw output option . . . . . . . . . . 336, 339 DRAW POINTS menu . . . . . . . . . . . 201 DRAW STO (draw store menu) . . . . 205 DrawF (draw a function) . . . . . . 194, 575 drawing on a graph circles (Circle( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 functions and inverses (DrawF, DrawInv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 line segments (Line( ) . . . . . . . . . 189 lines (Horizontal, Line(, Vertical) 191 points (PtChange, PtOff, PtOn) 201 tangents (Tangent) . . . . . . . . . . . 192 text (Text) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 using Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 DrawInv (draw inverse) . . . . . . . 194, 575 DS<( (decrement and skip) . . . . 444, 575 DuplicateName menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 dx/dt operation on a graph . . . . 130, 143 dy/dx operation on a graph 130, 143, 151 E
E (exponent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 21, 575 e^( (exponential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 575 edit keys table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Else . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439, 576 Eng (engineering notation mode) 21, 576 ENTRY (last entry key) . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 entry cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 EOS (Equation Operating System) . . . 40 eqn (equation variable) . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Equ4String( (equationtostring conversion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418, 576 equalto relational test (=) . . . . . . 88, 622 Equation Operating System (EOS) . . . 40 Equation Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 equations with multiple roots . . . . . . . . 66 errors diagnosing and correcting . . . . . . . 49 messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 examples—applications area between curves . . . . . . . . . . 496 Index 675 areas of regular nsided polygons . . 506 box plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 box with lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 defining a 466 defining a table of values 467 setting the viewing window 470 tracing the graph 472 zooming in on the graph 474 zooming in on the table 468 cobweb attractors . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 fundamental theorem of calculus 502 guess the coefficients . . . . . . . . . 491 inequalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 mortgage payments . . . . . . . . . . 510 parametric equations, ferris wheel problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 piecewise functions . . . . . . . . . . 481 quadratic formula converting to a fraction 461 displaying complex results 463 entering a calculation 460 Sierpinski triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 solving a system of nonlinear equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 unit circle and trig curves . . . . . . 494 examples—Getting Started coin flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 compound interest . . . . . . . . . . . 389 drawing a tangent line . . . . . . . . 184 financing a car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 forest and trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 generating a sequence . . . . . . . . 246
Index mean height of a population . . . . 330 path of a ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 pendulum lengths and periods . . 273 polar rose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 roots of a function . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 sending variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 solving a system of linear equations . 221 unit circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 volume of a cylinder . . . . . . . . . . 425 examples—miscellaneous calculating outstanding loan balances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 daylight hours in Alaska . . . . . . . 312 predatorprey model . . . . . . . . . . 169 examplesóGetting Started graphing a circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 exponential regression (ExpReg) . . 310, 576 expr( (stringtoexpression conversion) . . 419, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 ExpReg (exponential regression) . . 310, 576 expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 converting from string (expr( ) . . . 419 converting from string (expr( ) . . . 576 turning on and off (ExprOn . 110, 577 ExprOff (expression off) . . . . . . 110, 577 ExprOn (expression on) . . . . . . 110, 577 676 F
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 factorial (!) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 family of curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 FCC statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Fill( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239, 577 FINANCE CALC menu . . . . . . . . . . . 393 FINANCE VARS menu . . . . . . . . . . . 405 financial functions amortization schedules . . . . . . . 399 cash flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 days between dates . . . . . . . . . . 403 interest rate conversions . . . . . . 402 payment method . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 time value of money (TVM) . . . . 394 Fix (fixeddecimal mode) . . . . . . 22, 577 fixeddecimal mode (Fix) . . . . . . 22, 577 Float (floatingdecimal mode) . . . 22, 577 floatingdecimal mode (Float) . . . 22, 577 fMax( (function maximum) . . . . . . . . 578 fMin( (function minimum) . . . . . . 59, 578 fnInt( (function integral) . . . . . . . . 61, 578 FnOff (function off) . . . . . . . . . . 100, 578 FnOn (function on) . . . . . . . . . . 100, 578 For( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439, 579 format settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 161 formulas amortization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 ANOVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 cash flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 days between dates . . . . . . . . . . 640 interest rate conversions . . . . . . . 639 logistic regression . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 sine regression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 time value of money . . . . . . . . . . 635 twosample FTest . . . . . . . . . . . 632 twosample t test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 fPart( (fractional part) . . . . . 69, 235, 579 freemoving cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Full (fullscreen mode) . . . . . . . . . 24, 579 fullscreen mode (Full) . . . . . . . . . 24, 579 Func (function graphing mode) . . 23, 579 function graphing accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 CALC (calculate menu) . . . . . . . . 126 defining and displaying . . . . . . . . . 94 defining in the Y= editor . . . . . . . . 96 defining on the home screen, in a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 deselecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 105, 111 ∆X and ∆Y window variables . . . 107 evaluating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 family of curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 format settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 freemoving cursor . . . . . . . . . . . 113 graph styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 maximum of (fMax( ) . . . . . . . . . . . 59 maximum of (fMax( ) . . . . . . . . . . 578 minimum of (fMin( ) . . . . . . . . . . . 578 modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 95, 579 Index 677 moving the cursor to a value . . . 116 overlaying functions on a graph . 112 panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 pausing or stopping a graph . . . . 111 Quick Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 100, 578 shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Smart Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 viewing window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 window variables . . . . . . . . 105, 106 Y= editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 ZOOM MEMORY menu . . . . . . . 123 ZOOM menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 function integral (fnInt( ) . . . . . . . . . . . 61 function integral (fnInt( ) . . . . . . . . . . 578 function, definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 functions and instructions table . . . . 566 future value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391, 396 FV (futurevalue variable) . . . . . 391, 406 G
garbage collecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 GarbageCollect . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543, 580 gcd( (greatest common divisor) . 71, 580 GDB (graph database) . . . . . . . . . . . 207 geometcdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382, 580 geometpdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 580 Get( (get data from CBL 2™ or CBR™) . 455, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 GetCalc( (get data from TI84 Plus) 454, 581 getDate, get current date . . . . . . . . . . 581 getDtFmt, get date format . . . . . . . . . 581 getDtStr( (get date string) . . . . . . . . . 582 getKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453, 582 getTime, get current time . . . . . . . . . 582 Getting Started See examples, Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 getTmFmt, get time format . . . . . . . . 582 getTmStr( (get time string) . . . . . . . . 582 Goto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442, 583 graph database (GDB) . . . . . . . . . . . 207 graph style above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 animate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 shade above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 shade below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 thick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 graph styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 graphing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 graphingorder modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 GraphStyle( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446, 583 graphtable splitscreen mode (GT) . 24, 216, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 greater than (>) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 622 greater than or equal to () . . . . . 88, 623 Index 678 greatest common divisor (gcd( ) . . . . . 71 greatest common divisor (gcd( ) . . . . 580 greatest integer (int( ) . . . . . . . . . 70, 235 greatest integer (int( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 GridOff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 583 GridOn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 583 grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 GT (graphtable splitscreen mode) . 24, 216, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Histogram plot type (&) . . . . . . . . . 320 home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Horiz (horizontal splitscreen mode) . . 24, 215, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Horizontal (draw line) . . . . . . . . 191, 583 hyperbolic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 hypothesis tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 H I
i (complex number constant) . . . . . . . 74 I% (annual interest rate variable) . . . 391, 406 identity( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239, 583 If instructions If . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437, 583 IfThen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437, 584 IfThenElse . . . . . . . . . . . . 438, 584 imag( (imaginary part) . . . . . . . . 77, 584 imaginary part (imag( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 imaginary part (imag( ) . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Index implied multiplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 increment and skip (IS>( ) . . . . . . . . . 443 increment and skip (IS>( ) . . . . . . . . . 586 independent variable . . . . . 177, 180, 584 IndpntAsk . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 180, 584 IndpntAuto . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 180, 584 inferential stat editors . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 inferential statistics alternative hypotheses . . . . . . . . 338 bypassing editors . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 calculating test results (Calculate) . . 339 confidence interval calculations . 339 data input or stats input . . . . . . . . 337 entering argument values . . . . . . 337 graphing test results (Draw) . . . . 339 input descriptions table . . . . . . . . 367 pooled option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 STAT TESTS menu . . . . . . . . . . 340 test and interval output variables 370 inferential statistics See stat tests . . . . . 52 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448, 449, 584 insert cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Installing New Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . 11 Installing new faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . 11 inString( (in string) . . . . . . . . . . . 419, 585 instruction, definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 int( (greatest integer) . . . . . . 70, 235, 585 integer part (iPart( ) . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 235 integer part (iPart( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 integral See numerical integral . . . . . . . 52 679 interest rate conversions 4Eff( (compute effective interest rate) 402, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 4Nom( (compute nominal interest rate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 internal rate of return (irr( ) . . . . . . . . 398 internal rate of return (irr( ) . . . . . . . . 586 intersect operation on a graph . . . . . 129 inverse (/) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 233, 623 inverse cumulative normal distribution (invNorm( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 inverse cumulative normal distribution (invNorm( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 inverse trig functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 invNorm( (inverse cumulative normal distribution) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375, 585 invT (inverse Student T distribution) . 375 iPart( (integer part) . . . . . . . 69, 235, 586 irr( (internal rate of return) . . . . 398, 586 IS>( (increment and skip) . . . . . 443, 586 isClockOn, is clock on . . . . . . . . . . . 586 L
L (usercreated list name symbol) . . . 268 LabelOff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 586 LabelOn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 587 labels graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 586 program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442, 587 Last Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Lbl (label) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442, 587 lcm( (least common multiple) . . . 71, 587 least common multiple (lcm( ) . . . . . . . 71 least common multiple (lcm( ) . . . . . . 587 length( of string . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420, 587 less than (<) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 622 less than or equal to ({) . . . . . . . . 88, 623 line graph style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 line segments, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Line( (draw line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 587 lines, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 191 LINK RECEIVE menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 LINK SEND menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 linking receiving items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 to a CBL 2™ or CBR™ . . . . . . . . 551 to a PC or Macintosh . . . . . . . . . 552 to a TI84 Plus Silver Edition or TI84 Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 transmitting items . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 two TI84 Plus units . . . . . . . . . . 556 LinReg(a+bx) (linear regression) 310, 587 LinReg(ax+b) (linear regression) 308, 588 K
keyboard layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 math operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 keycode diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Index 680 LinRegTTest (linear regression t test) . . 363, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 LinReqTInt (confidence interval for slope) 365 LIST MATH menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 LIST NAMES menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 LIST OPS menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 List4matr( (liststomatrix conversion) 241, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 588 lists accessing an element . . . . . . . . 250 attaching formulas . . . 253, 255, 289 clearing all elements . . . . . . . . . 287 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 286 deleting from memory . . . . 251, 519 detaching formulas . . . . . . . 256, 292 dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 entering list names . . . . . . . 252, 284 indicator ({ }) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 naming lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 storing and displaying . . . . . . . . 249 using in expressions . . . . . . . . . . 256 using to graph a family of curves 112, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 using with math operations . 52, 257 ln( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 588 LnReg (logarithmic regression) 310, 589 log( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 589 Logistic (regression) . . . . . . . . . 311, 589 logistic regression formula . . . . . . . . 629 M
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Manual Linear Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . 306, 313 marked for deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 MATH CPX (complex menu) . . . . . . . . 76 MATH menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 MATH NUM (number menu) . . . . . . . . 68 math operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 MATH PRB (probability menu) . . . . . . 79 Matr4list( (matrixtolist conversion) . 240, 267, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 matrices accessing elements . . . . . . . . . . 230 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 deleting from memory . . . . . . . . . 225 dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223, 238 displaying a matrix . . . . . . . . . . . 229 displaying matrix elements . . . . . 224 editing matrix elements . . . . . . . . 226 indicator ([ ]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 inverse (/) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 math functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 matrix math functions (det(, T, dim(, Fill(, identity(, randM(, augment(, Matr4list(, List4matr(, cumSum( ) 236 referencing in expressions . . . . . 228 relational operations . . . . . . . . . . 234 row operations (ref(, rref(, rowSwap(, row+(, *row(, *row+( ) . . . . . . 242 Index 681 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 MATRX EDIT menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 MATRX MATH menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 MATRX NAMES menu . . . . . . . . . . . 228 max( (maximum) . . . . . . . . . 70, 270, 590 maximum of a function (fMax( ) . . . . . 59 maximum of a function (fMax( ) . . . . 578 maximum operation on a graph . . . . 129 mean( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 590 Med(Med (medianmedian) . . . . . . . 308 median( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 590 MedMed (medianmedian) . . . . . . . 590 Mem Mgmt/Del menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 memory backing up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 checking available . . . . . . . . . . . 514 clearing all list elements from . . . 521 clearing entries from . . . . . . . . . . 521 deleting items from . . . . . . . . . . . 519 error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 insufficient during transmission . 565 resetting defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 resetting memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 MEMORY menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Menu( (define menu) . . . . . . . . 444, 591 menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 35 defining (Menu( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 defining (Menu( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 min( (minimum) . . . . . . . . . . 70, 270, 591 minimum of a function (fMin( ) . . . . . . . 59 minimum of a function (fMin( ) . . . . . . 578 minimum operation on a graph . . . . . 129 minutes notation (') . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 626 ModBoxplot plot type (*) . . . . . . . . 320 mode settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 a+bi (complex rectangular) . . 24, 72, 568 Connected (plotting) . . . . . . . 23, 571 Degree (angle) . . . . . . . . 22, 85, 573 Dot (plotting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 575 Eng (notation) . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 576 Fix (decimal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 577 Float (decimal) . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 577 Full (screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 579 Func (graphing) . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 579 GT (screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 583 Horiz (screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 583 Normal (notation) . . . . . . . . . 21, 592 Par/Param (graphing) . . . . . . 23, 594 Pol/Polar (graphing) . . . . . . . 23, 596 Radian (angle) . . . . . . . . 22, 85, 600 re^qi (complex polar) . . . . . . . . . . 601 re^θi (complex polar) . . . . . . . . 24, 72 Real . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 601 Sci (notation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 606 Seq (graphing) . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 606 Sequential (graphing order) . 23, 607 Simul (graphing order) . . . . . 23, 609 modified box plot type (*) . . . . . . . 320 multiple entries on a line . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Index 682 multiplication (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 624 multiplicative inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 N
N (number of payment periods variable) . 391, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 nCr (number of combinations) . . 80, 591 nDeriv( (numerical derivative) . . . 60, 592 negation () . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 55, 624 nonrecursive sequences . . . . . . . . . . 157 normal distribution probability (normalcdf( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 374, 592 Normal notation mode . . . . . . . . 21, 592 normal probability plot type ()) . . . 322 normalcdf( (normal distribution probability) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 normalpdf( (probability density function) . 373, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 NormProbPlot plot type ()) . . . . . . 322 not equal to (#) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 622 not( (Boolean operator) . . . . . . . 91, 593 nPr (permutations) . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 593 npv( (net present value) . . . . . . 398, 593 numerical derivative . . 60, 130, 143, 151 numerical integral . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 131 oneproportion z test (1PropZTest) 349, 597 onesample t confidence interval (TInterval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353, 613 onevariable statistics (1Var Stats) 307, 616 or (Boolean) operator . . . . . . . . . 90, 594 order of evaluating equations . . . . . . . 40 Output( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 452, 594 Overwrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538, 560 Overwrite All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 P
P/Y (numberofpaymentperiodsperyear variable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391, 406 P4Rx(, P4Ry( (polartorectangular conversions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 599 panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Par/Param (parametric graphing mode) . 23, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 parametric equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 parametric graphing CALC (calculate operations on a graph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 defining and editing . . . . . . . . . . . 138 freemoving cursor . . . . . . . . . . . 141 graph format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 graph styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 moving the cursor to a value . . . . 142 selecting and deselecting . . . . . . 138 setting parametric mode . . . . . . . 137 O
Omit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538, 560 oneproportion z confidence interval (1PropZInt) . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 597 Index 683 tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 window variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Y= editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 zoom operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 parentheses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 path graph style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441, 594 pausing a graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 permutations (nPr) . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 593 phase plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Pic (pictures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 pictures (Pic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 pixels in Horiz/GT modes . . . . 205, 219 Plot1( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 594 Plot2( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 594 Plot3( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 594 PlotsOff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325, 595 PlotsOn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325, 595 plotting modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 plotting stat data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 PMT (payment amount variable) 391, 406 Pmt_Bgn (payment beginning variable) . 405, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Pmt_End (payment end variable) . . . 404, 596 poissoncdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 596 poissonpdf( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 596 Pol/Polar (polar graphing mode) . 23, 146, 596 polar equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 polar form, complex numbers . . . . . . . 75 polar graphing CALC (calculate operations on a graph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 defining and displaying . . . . . . . . 146 equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 freemoving cursor . . . . . . . . . . . 150 graph format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 graph styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 mode (Pol/Polar) . . . . . . 23, 146, 596 moving the cursor to a value . . . . 151 selecting and deselecting . . . . . . 147 tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 window variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Y= editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 ZOOM operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 PolarGC (polar graphing coordinates) . . . 109, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 pooled option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336, 338 power (^) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 624 power of ten (10^( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 power of ten (10^( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 present value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391, 395 previous entry (Last Entry) . . . . . . . . . 29 prgm (program name) . . . . . . . . 445, 596 PRGM CTL (program control menu) . 435 PRGM EDIT menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 PRGM EXEC menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 PRGM NEW menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 probability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Index 684 probability density function (normalpdf( ) 373 probability density function (normalpdf( ) 593 prod( (product) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271, 597 programming copying and renaming . . . . . . . . 433 creating new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 deleting command lines . . . . . . . 433 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 entering command lines . . . . . . . 430 executing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 inserting command lines . . . . . . 433 instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 name (prgm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 445, 596 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 running assembly language program 458 stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450, 597 PtChange( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 598 PtOff( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 598 PtOn( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 598 PV (present value variable) . . . 391, 406 pvalue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 PwrReg (power regression) . . . 310, 598 PxlChange( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 598 PxlOff( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 599 PxlOn( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 599 pxlTest( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 599 Q
QuadReg (quadratic regression) 309, 599 QuartReg (quartic regression) . . 309, 600 Quick Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538, 560 R
r (correlation coefficient) . . . . . . . . . . 304 R (radian notation) . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 620 r2, R2 (coefficients of determination) 304 R4Pr(, R4Pq( (rectangulartopolar conversions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 R4Pr(, R4Pθ( (rectangulartopolar conversions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Radian angle mode . . . . . . . . 22, 85, 600 radian notation (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 620 RAM ARCHIVE ALL menu . . . . . . . . 529 rand (random number) . . . . . . . . 80, 600 randBin( (random binomial) . . . . . 83, 600 randInt( (random integer) . . . . . . 82, 600 randM( (random matrix) . . . . . . . 240, 600 randNorm( (random Normal) . . . . 82, 601 random seed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 RCL (recall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 256 re^qi (polar complex mode) . . . . . . . . 601 re^θi (polar complex mode) . . . . . . 24, 72 Real mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 601 real( (real part) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 601
685 Index RecallGDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 601 RecallPic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206, 601 rectangular form, complex numbers . . 74 RectGC (rectangular graphing coordinates) . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 602 recursive sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 ref( (rowechelon form) . . . . . . . 243, 602 RegEQ (regression equation variable) . . 303, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 regression model automatic regression equation . . 303 automatic residual list feature . . 302 diagnostics display mode . . . . . . 304 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 relational operations . . . . . . . . . . 88, 234 Removing a Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440, 602 RESET MEMORY menu . . . . . . . . . 533 resetting all memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 archive memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 RAM memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 residual list (RESID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445, 602 root (x$) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 621 root of a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 round( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 233, 602 row+( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 rowSwap( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 603 rref( (reducedrowechelon form) . . 243, 603 S
Sci (scientific notation mode) . . . 21, 606 scientific notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 screen modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 second cursor (2nd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 second key (2nd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 seconds DMS notation (”) . . . . . . . . . . 84 sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Select( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 606 selecting data points from a plot . . . . . . . . 264 functions from the home screen or a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 functions in the Y= editor . . . . . . 100 stat plots from the Y= editor . . . . 100 Send( (send to CBL 2™ or CBR™) . 455, 606 SendID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 sending See transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . 52 SendSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 Seq (sequence graphing mode) . 23, 606 seq( (sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 606 sequence graphing axes format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 CALC (calculate menu) . . . . . . . . 164 evaluating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 freemoving cursor . . . . . . . . . . . 162 graph format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Index 686 graph styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 moving the cursor to a value . . . 163 nonrecursive sequences . . . . . . 157 recursive sequences . . . . . . . . . 158 selecting and deselecting . . . . . . 156 TI84 Plus versus TI82 table . . . 173 tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 web plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 window variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Y= editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 ZOOM (zoom menu) . . . . . . . . . 164 Sequential (graphing order mode) . . . 23, 607 service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 setDate( (set date) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 setDtFmt( (set date format) . . . . . . . 607 setTime( (set time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 setting display contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 graph styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 graph styles from a program . . . 104 modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 modes from a program . . . . . . . . . 21 splitscreen modes . . . . . . . . . . . 213 splitscreen modes from a program . 220 tables from a program . . . . . . . . 178 setTmFmt( (set time format) . . . . . . . 607 SetUpEditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301, 607 shade above graph style . . . . . . . . . 101 shade below graph style . . . . . . . . . . 101 Shade( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 608 Shade_t( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384, 609 Shadeχ²( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385, 608 ShadeF( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385, 608 ShadeNorm( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383, 609 shading graph areas . . . . . . . . . 103, 195 Simul (simultaneous graphing order mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 609 sin( (sine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 609 sin/( (arcsine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 609 sine (sin( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 sine (sin( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 sinh( (hyperbolic sine) . . . . . . . . 423, 609 sinh/( (hyperbolic arcsine) . . . . 423, 609 SinReg (sinusoidal regression) . 311, 610 Smart Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 solve( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 610 Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 solving for variables in the equation solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 SortA( (sort ascending) . . . 259, 299, 610 SortD( (sort descending) . . 259, 299, 610 splitscreen modes GT (graphtable) mode . . . . . . . 216 Horiz (horizontal) mode . . . . . . . . 215 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 220 splitscreen values . . . . . . . 199, 205, 219 square (²) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 623 square root ($( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 square root ($( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 startTmr, start timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 Index 687 STAT CALC menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 STAT EDIT menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 stat list editor attaching formulas to list names . 289 clearing elements from lists . . . . 287 creating list names . . . . . . . . . . . 286 detaching formulas from list names . 292 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 editelements context . . . . . . . . . 296 editing elements of formulagenerated lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 editing list elements . . . . . . . . . . 288 entering list names . . . . . . . . . . . 284 enternames context . . . . . . . . . 298 formulagenerated list names . . . 291 removing lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 restoring list names L1–L6 . . . . . 287 switching contexts . . . . . . . . . . . 294 viewelements context . . . . . . . . 295 viewnames context . . . . . . . . . . 297 STAT PLOTS menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 stat tests and confidence intervals 1PropZInt (oneproportion z confidence interval) . . . . . . . 357 1PropZTest (oneproportion z test) . 349 2PropZInt (twoproportion z confidence interval) . . . . . . . 357 2PropZTest (twoproportion z test) . 350 2SampFTest (twosample FTest) . . 361 2SampTInt (twosample t confidence interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 2SampTTest (twosample t test) 347 2SampZInt (twosample z confidence interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 2SampZTest (twosample z test) 345 ANOVA( (oneway analysis of variance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 χ²Test (chisquare test) . . . 358, 360 χ²Test (chisquare test) . . . 358, 360 LinRegTTest (linear regression t test) 363 TInterval (onesample t confidence interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 TTest (onesample t test) . . . . . . 344 ZInterval (onesample z confidence interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 ZTest (onesample z test) . . . . . 342 STAT TESTS menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 statistical distribution functions See distribution functions . . . . . . . . . . . 52 statistical plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Boxplot (regular box plot) . . . . . . 321 defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 from a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 ModBoxplot (modified box plot) . 320 NormProbPlot (normal probability plot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Index 688 tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 turning on/off stat plots . . . . 100, 325 viewing window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 xyLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 statistical variables table . . . . . . . . . . 315 Stats input option . . . . . . . . . . . 336, 337 stdDev( (standard deviation) . . 272, 611 Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446, 611 Store (!) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 611 StoreGDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 611 StorePic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206, 611 storing graph databases (GDBs) . . . . . . 208 graph pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 variable values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 String4Equ( (stringtoequation conversions) . . . . . . . . . . . . 420, 611 strings concatenation (+) . . . . . . . . 417, 626 converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 displaying contents . . . . . . . . . . . 416 entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 functions in CATALOG . . . . . . . . 416 indicator (”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 length (length( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 length (length( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414, 415 studentt distribution probability (tcdf( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 probability (tcdf( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 studentt distribution probability density function (tpdf( ) . . 376 probability density function (tpdf( ) . . 614 sub( (substring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421, 612 subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 subtraction (–) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 626 sum( (summation) . . . . . . . . . . . 271, 612 support and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 system variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 T
T (transpose matrix) . . . . . . . . . . 237, 621 TABLE SETUP screen . . . . . . . . . . . 176 tables description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 178 tan( (tangent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 612 tan/( (arctangent) . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 612 tangent (tan( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 tangent (tan( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 tangent lines, drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Tangent( (draw line) . . . . . . . . . 192, 612 tanh( (hyperbolic tangent) . . . . . 423, 612 tanh/( (hyperbolic arctangent) . . 423, 612 TblStart (table start variable) . . . . . . . 177 tcdf( (studentt distribution probability) . . 376, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 TEST (relational menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Index 689 TEST LOGIC (Boolean menu) . . . . . . 90 Text( instruction . . . . . . . . . . 198, 219, 613 placing on a graph . . . . . . . 198, 219 Then . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437, 584 thick graph style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 TI Connect™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 TI84 Plus key code diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Time axes format . . . . . . . . . . . 161, 613 time value of money (TVM) C/Y variable (number of compounding periods per year) . . . . . . . . . 406 calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 FV variable (future value) . . . . . . 406 I% variable (annual interest rate) 406 N variable (number of payment periods) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 P/Y variable (number of payment periods per year) . . . . . . . . . 406 PMT variable (payment amount) 406 PV variable (present value) . . . . 406 TVM Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 tvm_FV (future value) . . . . . 396, 614 tvm_I% (interest rate) . . . . . . . . . 615 tvm_I% (interest rate) . . . . . . . . . 395 tvm_N (# payment periods) 396, 615 tvm_Pmt (payment amount) 394, 615 tvm_PV (present value) . . . 395, 615 variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 timeCnv( ), convert time . . . . . . . . . . 613 TInterval (onesample t confidence interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 TInterval (onesample t confidence interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 tpdf( (studentt distribution probability density function) . . . . . . . . . 376, 614 TRACE cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 entering numbers during . . 116, 142, 150, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 expression display . . . . . . . 110, 116 Trace instruction in a program . 118, 614 transmitting error conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 from a TI83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 from a TI83 Plus Silver Edition or TI83 Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 from a TI84 Plus Silver Edition or TI84 Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 to a TI84 Plus Silver Edition or TI84 Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 transpose matrix (T) . . . . . . . . . . 237, 621 trigonometric functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 TTest (onesample t test) . . . . . 344, 614 turn clock off, ClockOff . . . . . . . . . . . 570 turn clock on, ClockOn . . . . . . . . . . . 570 turning on and off Index 690 axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 stat plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 325 tvm_FV (future value) . . . . . . . . 396, 614 tvm_I% (interest rate) . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 tvm_I% (interest rate) . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 tvm_N (# payment periods) . . . . 396, 615 tvm_Pmt (payment amount) . . . 394, 615 tvm_PV (present value) . . . . . . 395, 615 twoproportion z confidence interval (2PropZInt) . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 597 twoproportion z test (2PropZTest) . 350, 598 twosample FTest formula . . . . . . . . 632 twosample t test formula . . . . . . . . . 633 twovariable statistics (2Var Stats) . 308, 616 V
v sequence function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 value operation on a graph . . . . . . . . 126 variables complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 displaying and storing values . . . . 27 equation solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 graph databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 graph pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 independent/dependent . . . . . . . 180 list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 247 matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 222 real . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 recalling values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 solver editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 statistical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414, 415 test and interval output . . . . . . . . 370 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 user and system . . . . . . . . . . 26, 627 VARS and YVARS menus . . . . . . 38 variance of a list (variance( ) . . . . . . . 272 variance of a list (variance( ) . . . . . . . 616 variance( (variance of a list) . . . 272, 616 VARS menu GDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 U
u sequence function . . . . . . . . . . . . . UnArchive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 523, ungrouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . user variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . uv/uvAxes (axes format) . . . . . . 161, uw/uwAxes (axes format) . . . . . 161, 154 615 535 627 615 615 Index 691 Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Vertical (draw line) . . . . . . . . . . 191, 616 viewing window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 vw/uvAxes (axes format) . . . . . 161, 616 W
w sequence function . . . . . . . . . . . . . warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Web (axes format) . . . . . . . . . . 161, web plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . While . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440, window variables function graphing . . . . . . . . . . . . parametric graphing . . . . . . . . . . polar graphing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 661 616 165 616 105 140 147 sequence graphing . . . . . . . . . . . 155 YFact zoom factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 YVARS menu Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Parametric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Polar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Z
ZBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 617 ZDecimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 617 zero operation on a graph . . . . . . . . . 127 ZInteger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122, 617 ZInterval (onesample z confidence interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352, 617 zoom 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125 cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 function graphing . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 parametric graphing . . . . . . . . . . 143 polar graphing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 sequence graphing . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Zoom In (zoom in) . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 618 ZOOM MEMORY menu . . . . . . . . . . 123 ZOOM menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Zoom Out (zoom out) . . . . . . . . 120, 618 ZoomFit (zoom to fit function) . . 123, 618 ZoomRcl (recall stored window) 124, 618 ZoomStat (statistics zoom) . . . . 123, 618 ZoomSto (store zoom window) . 124, 618 X
x$ (root) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 XFact zoom factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 xintercept of a root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 xor (Boolean) exclusive or operator . . 90, 617 xth root (x$) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 xyLine (() plot type . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Y
Y= editor function graphing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 parametric graphing . . . . . . . . . . 137 polar graphing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Index 692 ZPrevious (use previous window) . . . 619 ZSquare (set square pixels) . . . 121, 619 ZStandard (use standard window) . . 122, 619 ZTest (onesample z test) . . . . 342, 619 ZTrig (trigonometric window) . . 122, 620 Index 693 ...
View Full
Document
 Spring '07
 Guggenberger

Click to edit the document details